Missionary Family
A missionary family discovers Malawi.
Author's Note: First and foremost, if you have any hangups, you won't like this story, especially if those hangups involve incest, interracial sexuality, and/or bisexuality of any type. This story takes place in a universe where there are no STDs. Secondly, I wish to apologize to anyone offended by my portrayal of Malawi and its people and customs. I have taken very generous liberties with regard to customs and the general infrastructure of the country for the sake of the story. Comments are greatly appreciated.
Missionary Family
"We are so blessed to be given this opportunity to serve the Lord through Christ," Harriet Moore said as she intoned a prayer before lunch. "May He continue to bless each of us as we strive to do His work."
"Amen!" James Moore replied to finish his wife's prayer.
"Amen!" John, 23, and Mary, 22, added.
"There was a lot of interest in this mission," James explained as they ate. "I don't know why they picked us as opposed to some of the other fine families, but the Lord's Blessing has fallen upon us."
"I had no idea where Malawi was," Mary said. "I had to look it up."
"David Livingstone was the first European to discover Malawi," Harriet explained. "That's the Dr. Livingstone of Stanley & Livingstone fame. He thought it was a beautiful land and encouraged the British government to create settlements. It was part of the British crown territories for a long time."
"How do they feel about Christians and white people today?" John asked.
"The country is basically a Christian nation," James replied. "The Anglican church and our own Presbyterian church were very active early on. There is almost no racial strife. English is the primary language, though there are probably a dozen native dialects spoken."
"And we're going to be based in the town of Nkopola, very close to the border with Mozambique at the southern edge of Lake Malawi," Harriet added. "It should be very exciting. We'll have a wonderful opportunity to spread the word of Christ."
"I hope we can make some new friends," Mary said. "I'm going to miss mine."
"We're all going to miss friends," Harriet sympathized. "And we're going to have the opportunity to make new ones. I'm sure we'll have no trouble."
"How is it that there is this opening?" John asked.
"The last family that they sent had some difficulties adjusting," James replied. "Not every family is cut out to live in primitive, 3rd-world conditions."
"We've had some correspondence with other missionary families already," Harriet explained. "They've all pretty much said the same thing; if you truly believe in the Lord and his Word and Christ, His Son, and can adapt and accept that not all people do all things alike, then Malawi is a kind of heaven on earth."
"They advised us to keep a very open mind," James added, "and to trust in our faith in Christ."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Wow, it sure is warm here," Mary said when they deplaned into the sweltering tropical heat.
"I think we're not going to be able to wear a lot of the clothes that we've brought," Harriet said.
"This is like summer," John said, "and it's December."
"Oh, look at all of the colors!" Mary exclaimed. "It's so beautiful against their black skin."
"It looks sensible, too, for the weather," Harriet observed.
"Ah, there they are," James said, seeing a sign labeled MOORE waving from the small crowd awaiting the passengers.
"You must be James Moore," a large, florid-faced man said, a big smile on his face.
"I am indeed," James said, holding out his hand. "Are you Abel Hooker?"
"I am," Abel confirmed, "and this is my wife, Julie," he said, introducing the small, blonde woman next to him.
"Welcome to Malawi," Julie said, smiling as she held out her hand, her sea-green eyes sparkling. "We're so happy to have you here and I just know that you'll come to love Malawi as much as we."
"Thank you," Harriet said as they shook hands. "I'm Harriet, this is John and Mary."
"Let's get you to the house that's been prepared for you," Abel said. "Then we'll let you get settled in and rest a bit. We're having a community dinner in your honor tonight so that you'll get a chance to meet a large part of our community, plus all of the mission leaders."
"That sounds wonderful," Harriet said.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, what a beautiful house!" Harriet exclaimed when she saw the colonial-era, colonnaded and balconied, 2-story home that was to be theirs.
"This house is over 125 years old," Julie explained. "It's very comfortable. Anything that's missing that you need, just let me know and I'll do what I can. Once you learn the ropes, you'll find that pretty much anything is available."
"This is Chabwera and his wife, Teleza," Abel said, introducing an ebony couple in their 50s. "Chabwera means 'he who has arrived at last', though you'll find that he is always on time, if not early. Teleza means 'slippery'. She lives up to her name, always finding ways of getting things done. They'll be in charge of the house for you. You just let them know what it is that you require and they'll make it happen."
"I'm not sure if I'm comfortable with the idea of servants," Harriet said after shaking hands with Chabwera and Teleza. "It seems contrary to the Lord's word."
"You shouldn't think of them as servants," Abel explained. "They're more like extended members of your family, just like you'll be extended members of theirs. Them helping you is part of their service to the Lord, just as you helping them to understand our Lord's Word is your service."
"Chabwera and Teleza will bring you to the community hall for dinner," Julie said. "We'll leave you to get settled in and see you then."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, James, this is so beautiful!" Harriet exclaimed as they stood with their arms around each other's waist on the balcony of their bedroom overlooking the town of Nkopola and Lake Malawi beyond.
"It does seem like paradise," James concurred. "I'm really looking forward to this."
"Me, too," Harriet replied, "though I do have to admit to having had serious trepidations. I'm mostly worried for the children. I worry for them socially. They're at an age where they should be starting to look to their own future families."
"I'm sure things will work out just fine," James assured her. "There are the other four missionary families and I understand that there's a bit of a European population spread throughout the country. I'm sure that they'll meet people."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Good friends, please join me in welcoming the newest members of our missionary family, James, Harriet, John, and Mary Moore," Abel said.
The room contained one long table around which sat all five of the missionary families. There was a simple, yet banquet-like meal served, accompanied with seemingly unlimited supplies of South African wine. Though a bit uncomfortable at first, the Moores slowly relaxed in the obviously friendly atmosphere, meeting each of the families and learning a bit about them, as well as telling about themselves.
Abel and Julie Hooker, 53 and 50 respectively, were stationed in the capital, Lilongwe, not that far as the crow flies from Nkopola, but a full day's travel given the circumstances of Malawi. Abel was 6'1" and 240lbs with balding brown hair and hazel eyes. Julie was 5'6" and 135lbs. She seemed a bit more serious than jovial Abel with her dark brown hair and dark eyes.
Harry and Sally Simmons, 48 and 45 respectively, were stationed in Mzimba in central Malawi close to the Zambian border. Harry, at 5'10" and 185lbs had reddish hair and green eyes which lent themselves to his playful personality. Sally with her brown hair and eyes on her 5'4", 140lb. frame was the perfect complement to her husband, her C-cup breasts seeming a lot larger than they really were because of her diminutive stature.
Greg and Susan Nance, 44 and 42, were stationed up north in Chipita near the Zambian and Tanzanian borders. Greg's 6'1" and 195lbs fit well with his blonde hair and blue eyes on a very fit frame. Susan at 5'8" and 150lbs with brown hair and grey eyes was a couple of inches shorter than their daughter, Charlene, 22, whose 145lbs and full C-cup breasts were complimented by the same blonde hair, though far longer, and had the same blue eyes as her father.
Steve and Sara Bishop were the youngest of the group at 40 and 38 respectively. They were the children of missionaries who had served for many years in Malawi and were as good as natives. They were stationed at Rhumpi in the north. At 6'3" and 200lbs, Steve was a physical presence with his brown hair and hazel eyes. Sara was typically Irish in appearance at 5'6" and 125lbs with her red hair and green eyes, her B-cup breasts seeming perfect for her. Their son, Bruce, 19, was 6'2" and 185lbs, his brown hair and green eyes going well with his dark tan.
Harriet noticed that John seemed to spend time talking with Charlene Nance, while Bruce Bishop kept Mary engaged in conversation. Everyone was full of encouragement, telling how they wouldn't dream of living anywhere else.
"Given, not every place is right for everybody," Abel Hooker said, "and we've gone through several families before you trying to fill this post, but I have a feeling that your family is going to be perfect for Malawi."
"We sure hope so," James said. "We've dreamed for a long time of doing the Lord's missionary work."
"You'll find the people very receptive to the Lord's Word," Susan Nance said, "especially in the towns and cities. When you start moving into the bush and dealing with the various native groups, then you need to be more open, tolerant, and imaginative."
"You'll find that you can't sell the whole car, that you need to first get them to accept a wheel, then later a door," Steve Bishop explained.
"There's a lot of give and take," Sally Simmons said. "When they see that you are accepting of their ways, then they'll be more inclined to be accepting of ours."
"It's a fantastic growing experience," Julie Hooker said. "You'll learn a lot about yourselves and your faith."
"We're a bit worried about John and Mary," Harriet said.
"They're the least of your worries," Susan Nance said. "Our experience is that the children adapt faster, are more open to other ways of thinking and being and doing."
"It does seem so exciting," Mary Moore said.
"I'm sure you'll catch on quickly," Bruce Bishop said. "Nothing opens doors better than a beautiful girl."
"Well, aren't you the gallant one!" Harriet said with a smile when she saw Mary blush.
"We're all going to stay for a few days to help you get oriented," Abel Hooker explained. "We'll take turns spending time with you, showing you different things, explaining how things work, and answering your questions. After a few days with input from all of us, you'll be ready to take the bull by the horns. I'm sure that Bruce and Charlene will be happy to show John and Mary around."
"Well, this is certainly a warm welcome," James said. "We're very grateful for any help and advice you care to share."
The next few days were a whirlwind of orientation for the Moores, half of each day spent with a different family as they were shown around. Finally, everyone needed to begin their journey back to their own homes and good-byes were said with promises to come visit to see the other parts of Malawi.
James and Harriet poured themselves into starting the free school that they had planned, while John and Mary continued to explore the area. Chabwera and Teleza turned out to be invaluable, seeming to know anybody and everybody of any importance, always knowing where to find whatever it was that needed.
"I think that the two of you choosing to spend a year with us on missionary service before going back to school is a great idea," James said that evening at dinner. "You'll be much better people for it."
"I'm a lot more optimistic about things now," John said. "I wasn't so sure at first, but the people I'm meeting are really great."
"Me, too," Mary agreed. "I was so nervous, worried about leaving all of my friends, but the people here have been wonderful. I feel quite at home."
"I think your mother and I are about ready for our first excursion into the bush to some of the native villages," James said. "I want to talk to some of the others first to find out what they can tell me."
"How long would you be gone?" Mary asked.
"Well, since it will be our first time, I'd think it would be a short trip, no more than a few days," James replied. "The two of you will be fine here with Chabwera and Teleza."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"James, I am totally falling in love with this place," Harriet said later that evening when they were in bed, their skins glistening with the sheen of sweat that they had worked up.
"It's hard not to," James said, turning onto his side and leaning over to capture one of Harriet's hard, ruby-like nipples between his lips and teeth.
"God, I've felt so turned on these past weeks," Harriet sighed as she held her husband's head as he suckled.
"So I've noticed," James said, one hand trailing down between her legs, his fingers sliding between her cum-slicked pussy lips.
"And you've been quite the stud yourself," Harriet said as James rolled onto her, her legs going up around his waist as his cock found her already well-used pussy once again.
"You've always inspired me and you know it," James said, rising up onto his knees, his cock ensconced in Harriet's pussy as he lifted her legs by the ankles, holding them well apart so that he could see his cock sliding in and out of her, her delicate pussy lips clinging to the shaft of his cock, the fiery red bush that she kept intact above her pussy, her pussy lips shaved bare.
"Oh, James," Harriet sighed as he massaged her clit with his thumb while he kept his cock plunging in and out of her juicy pussy.
"Time to meet God," James gasped, their personal code for him being ready to cum.
"Mmm, I love His blessings," Harriet said as James pulled his cock from her pussy and crawled up her body so that his glistening, gooey cock was sticking in her face.
"Ahhhh!" James cried out when he felt Harriet's lips close on his cock just as it erupted, cum blasting into her mouth as he emptied his balls.
"Sex has never felt so good as it has since we've been here," Harriet said when she had finished sucking him off and swallowing the last of his cum, milking his 8" of cock with her mouth and throat. "Once again I'm ashamed to say that I'm grateful that the Bible doesn't say anything specific about what kind of sex is okay."
"Restricting sex too much would make it impossible to get people to accept religion. Besides, you've never tasted better," James replied, falling onto his back next to her, pulling her over and onto him so that his tongue could sluice up into her sopping pussy.
"Oh, this is so incredible," Harriet sighed as he ate her pussy, her eyes on the town and lake beyond as she looked out the open balcony doors.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"John, can I come in?" Mary asked, knocking on the door to his room from their common bathroom.
"Sure," John called out, smiling when he saw his sister come into his room.
"This place is really pretty cool, isn't it?" Mary asked as she sat on the edge of his bed in her usual sleeping attire, a t-shirt and panties, the ruby nipples on her C-cup breasts clearly visible through the material.
"I like it more every day," John replied, shifting a bit as he felt his cock react to the sight of his sister's hard nipples.
It was almost a month and John was getting very horny. The steady supply of girls back home was just that, back home. The only women he saw here were local women, the few Europeans older and married. Normally he didn't react to his sister's semi-nudity, but right now he was feeling the need to get laid. Masturbating had ceased to provide the kind of relief that he was craving.
"I miss my friends," Mary said with a sigh as she leaned back on her elbows.
"Yeah, I know what you mean," John replied, trying not to look at the camel toe of her panties, a few wisps of bright red hair escaping.
"I haven't even met anyone datable," Mary complained.
"Except the locals," John said.
"Oh! I never even thought..." Mary said. "Would you, you know, date a local girl?"
"I'm not sure," John replied. "Maybe. Some of them sure are beautiful."
"I'm not sure I could date a black man," Mary admitted.
"Don't let mom and dad hear you say that," John admonished.
"Oh, I don't have anything against them," Mary protested. "I've just never considered it. There's always been plenty of white boys."
"Well, that's certainly not the case now," John replied. "I've certainly thought about it lately."
"Really?!" Mary said, staring at him and noticing the bulge beneath the sheet.
"I'm only human," John told her. "I get horny. I keep thinking of that old joke about black or white on the outside, it's all pink inside."
"John!" Mary exclaimed, her cheeks flaming.
"Well, what can I say?" John asked. "I'm horny and that popped into my head. Do you plan on being a nun for the next year?"
"I don't know," Mary replied, closing her knees as she felt her pussy get wet. "I don't know what to do," she added.
"Well, mom and dad sure are having a good time," John said with a chuckle, trying not to stare at Mary's now hard nipples.
"They are, aren't they?" Mary agreed, giggling. "And you can hear everything in this house."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Hi, Abel," James said into the telephone.
"James, how are things going down there in Nkopola?" Abel asked.
"Couldn't be better, Abel," James replied. "We really feel at home here and the people have been great, really open and accepting."
"That's Malawi," Abel replied. "I'm glad you're enjoying it. The last three families they brought in seemed to dislike everything about it right from the get-go."
"Well, the school is going really well," James explained. "We've already got 18 children showing up every day."
"That's great!" Abel replied. "When you love their children and they see this, the people will love you and respect you in turn. Their children are everything to them."
"That makes us all the same, doesn't it?" James said.
"True, true," Abel replied. "How are John and Mary getting along?"
"Oh, they seem to like it well enough," James replied. "They spend a large part of their day wandering the town, meeting people. This is going to be a great experience for them for a year before they head back to school."
"No surprise there," Abel said. "I'm sure they've picked up their attitudes from you and Harriet. She seems like a wonderful woman."
"The best," James replied. "And I've never seen her happier than she's been since we've been here."
"Funny how that works," Abel said. "Julie totally blossomed when we moved here."
"I'm thinking about taking my first trip into the bush to meet some of the local natives," James said. "What do you think of that idea?"
"Well, you've got to do it sooner or later," Abel said. "You don't have any fears or trepidations about going into the bush alone?"
"I don't think so," James replied. "We've encountered nothing but friendliness from everyone we've met. Can it be that much different outside of the town?"
"Not really, though there are definitely differences," Abel replied. "The people in the towns and cities are further removed from their primitive pasts, though never completely. I've seldom been in a home where there wasn't some native, pagan shrine right beneath or next to the cross and picture of Jesus."
"Is there anything in particular that you'd advise?" James asked.
"That's hard to say," Abel replied. "There are several totally different groups, all descended from the original Bantu who came here about 1,000 A.D. down the rift valley. They've each evolved and developed differently, sometimes radically differently. Some are more amenable to incorporating Christ into their lives than the others."
"Will we have a language problem?" James asked.
"You're not taking Chabwera or Teleza with you?" Abel asked.
"It hadn't occurred to me," James replied. "I thought that they'd look after John and Mary while we were gone. Do we need to take someone local with us?"
"No, not necessarily," Abel replied. "You don't have to worry about violence or anything like that. You'll find that you have the Chewa, Nyanja, Tumbuka, Yao, Lomwe, Sena, Tonga, Ngoni, and Ngonde tribes fairly evenly represented all over the country in the bush and also across the borders into Mozambique, Zambia, Tanzania, and even into Zimbabwe. I'd avoid Zimbabwe if I were you. They've been having serious racial issues for a number of years now. The others are far more tolerant."
"I think Malawi is enough on our plate for now," James said. "Once we feel more confident, I'm sure we'll expand our horizons."
"You'll need to be ready to expand your horizons in the bush in Malawi, too," Abel advised. "Each of the tribes has different customs. Like you were advised, your ability to adapt, accept, and adopt are going to be the keys to your success with the bush tribes. Everything that you've learned about life up until now is going to be challenged in the bush. I can't emphasize that enough. If you are open, tolerant, and flexible towards accepting the ways of the bush tribes, you will not only succeed, but you will grow and evolve as a person yourself. If you can't, you will break and you will leave."
"I understand what you're saying, but I guess the reality won't really hit me until I'm confronted," James said. "I feel confident that we're open enough to the differences in people that it won't be a problem."
"Exactly," Abel agreed. "We've all been through it, so we understand. That said, if you ask any of us if we'd come here again, knowing what we'd be dealing with and the changes it was going to engender in our lives, I'm certain that everyone would say yes. I'm a better person, man, and husband for my experiences here."
"You just make me hunger all the more to go out and try to spread His Word in the bush," James replied, overcome with emotion.
"God Bless, James," Abel said. "I look forward to hearing from you when you get back."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Chabwera," James asked at dinner the next evening, "do you have any suggestions about which bush tribe Harriet and I might visit first?"
"You want me or Teleza to go with you?" Chabwera asked.
"Do you think that that's necessary?" James asked.
"Not for most tribes," Chabwera replied. "Some tribes, you need more time here before you approach them by yourselves. Maybe you should start with the Ngoni. They are good people, not aggressive."
"Is there a Ngoni tribe anywhere near here?" Harriet asked.
"There is one, maybe half a day of driving, then 5-6 hours walking," Chabwera replied after a moment. "You will need to dress properly and take water."
"Is the route to walk well marked?" James asked.
"You won't have any trouble," Chabwera replied. "Keep the sun in front of you."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Don't you two look like something out of a safari movie ad" Mary said with a laugh a couple of days later as the dawn was breaking.
"I feel like a safari movie ad," Harriet replied with a laugh, looking down at the bush outfit she was wearing, loose long pants rolled up to mid-thigh, loose long-sleeved shirt with the sleeves rolled up to the biceps, each of them with a Tilley LTM6 Airflo bush hat which were gifts from Chabwera and Teleza.
"Remember, if the flies come, you must roll down the pants and shirt as quickly as possible," Chabwera reminded them. "Drop the screen from the hat to your shoulders to protect your neck and face. A few bites won't hurt you, but if you get really attacked, it can be serious. You put the injectable antihistamines in your pockets?"
"Yes," James replied, his hand going up to feel his left breast pocket.
"And you have the map?" Chabwera asked.
"Right here," Harriet said, holding it up. "I'm the navigator."
"We'll be back in 2-3 days," James said, hugging Mary. "Chabwera and Teleza will be here if you need anything."
"Have a good time," John said, shaking his father's hand and hugging his mother.
"And be safe!" Mary admonished. "I can't believe you're really going to do this."
"There has to be a first time," Harriet said.
"Take lots of pictures," Mary said. "You have plenty of batteries and memory cards?"
"More than enough for a few days," James assured her, patting the pocket of his bush vest that held the camera.
"They'll be fine," Teleza assured John and Mary as they watched James and Harriet drive away. "Don't you worry."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"What do you think?" Chabwera asked Teleza for the dozenth time when they got back to the kitchen.
"They'll be fine," Teleza insisted. "They got what it takes. Besides, I sent a message to Bwerani."
"Teleza!!" Chabwera gasped.
"I like this family," Teleza said. "Better than the last ones they sent. These people are real and they really believe."
"We both know how Ngoni are," Chabwera said.
"We should," Teleza said with a laugh. "We're Ngoni. I just told Bwerani to go easy and to make sure he gets a good video. He's my cousin, after all."
"And chief of the tribe. And you think that they're going to go along?" Chabwera asked.
"I do," Teleza replied firmly. "They really want to succeed, especially knowing that the last families didn't. They got pride. Besides, they love to fuck, do it all the time."
"Hard to miss that," Chabwera admitted grudgingly. "I guess we'll know in a few days."
"I guess so," Teleza agreed.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Okay, turn here," Harriet instructed about 3 hours later. "It looks like we go about an hour or so until the road ends. That's where the trail starts."
"Calling this rutted dirt track a road is quite generous," James said with a grin.
"This is amazing country," Harriet observed. "It changes so quickly when you move away from the lake. It's really quite dynamic."
"Ready?" James asked as he helped Harriet into her small backpack after they had parked their car at the end of the road, the trail to be taken obvious at this point.
"Do you think we'll get there before dark?" Harriet asked. "I'm not so sure I'd like being out in the middle of nowhere at night."
"Chabwera said it was about a 5-6 hour walk," James replied. "It's just noon now, so we should be okay. He said the trail was fairly level until the end when it starts going up at the beginning of the foothills."
"Is that it, do you think?" Harriet asked a little over 5 hours later, her shirt drenched in sweat, as well as the waist and crotch of her pants, just like James.
"I think it might be," James said, stopping next to her. "The timing is right. You ready for this?" he asked, smiling at her, reaching out to brush a strand of fiery red hair from her face.
"I suppose so," Harriet replied, "though I have no idea what to expect."
"We'll just take it slow, introduce ourselves, see what happens from there," James said, as they had already discussed many times.
"What do you want here?" a dark man with long hair said, suddenly appearing from behind some rocks in front of them. He was wearing a short, skirt-like piece of material around his waist and had a variety of necklaces hanging down onto his tattooed chest.
"I am James Moore and this is my wife, Harriet," James said, smiling easily. "We are with the Presbyterian mission in Nkopola and are interested in meeting the people who live in the bush."
"Wait here," the man said. "I will report to my chief."
"Well, that was certainly different," Harriet said when the man left.
"Think about it," James said. "Their village is out in the middle of nowhere and two white people show up. I'd say it was a fair question."
"He never even said hello," Harriet pointed out.
"Maybe that's not their way," James suggested.
"Chief Bwerani invites you to visit our village," the man said when he reappeared. "Do you accept his invitation?"
"Yes, we do," James replied, smiling.
"Follow me," the man said, turning on his heel and leading them the last couple of hundred meters to the village, a collection of 20-30 huts made from foraged tree branches, all sitting around a central clearing where a tall man with many necklaces hanging down his tattooed chest stood, wearing the same type of wraparound short skirt but of a brighter blue color. Next to him stood a tall woman with necklaces hanging down between her naked breasts, topped with large dark nipples. She, too, wore a similar wraparound skirt of the same bright blue.
"This is Chief Bwerani," the man said, stopping in front of the regal-appearing couple. "James Moore, Harriet Moore," he said, surprising both James and Harriet.
"I welcome you," Chief Bwerani said. "You accept my invitation?"
"Yes, we do, and thank you," James replied with a smile.
Chief Bwerani glanced at the woman by his side, the entire village in a semi-circle around them, and gave a short nod, at which the woman stepped forward and dropped to her knees in front of James, reaching for his trousers.
"Wha-what are you doing?" James gasped as the woman quickly opened his trousers and extracted his cock.
"You accepted my invitation," Chief Bwerani said, stepping forward one step and pulling aside his wraparound, his thick, ebony cock dangling in front of him as he put his other hand on Harriet's shoulder, pressing downward as she gasped at the sight of James' cock disappearing into the woman's mouth and then the sight of 10" of solid ebony cock that she was obviously expected to suck.
"But-but-but we-we," James gasped as against his will his cock swelled to its full 8" under the expert ministrations of the woman, disappearing down her throat as she sucked on him.
"You have accepted my invitation," Chief Bwerani said sternly, pressing on Harriet's shoulder so that she had no choice but to drop to her knees, Chief Bwerani's huge ebony cock dangling in her face.
"James!" Harriet gasped as Chief Bwerani tilted her head back, sticking the head of his cock into her open mouth.
James was doing everything in his power not to cum, as the blowjob he was receiving was by far the best one he had ever received. At the same time, the sight of Chief Bwerani's cock in Harriet's mouth was inexplicably turning him on instead of inducing horror and dread. He was aware enough to realize that even though Harriet easily took all of his cock into her mouth, she was actually gagging on Chief Bwerani's as it pressed against the entrance to her throat.
"We have not invited anyone in a long time," Chief Bwerani said, standing with one hand on his hip, the other holding his wraparound to the side as Harriet used both hands to hold his cock while sucking him and getting her face fucked at the same time. "It is an honor for us," he added, looking down with a smile at James' cock disappearing into the woman's mouth, then looking down to watch as Harriet sucked his cock.
"Uh, uh, we are honored to be invited," James stammered, his eyes widening when he saw Harriet's tongue snake out beneath Chief Bwerani's cock filling her mouth, a technique that he was all too familiar with, one that often induced him to lose control and cum.
"You are ready for the Blessing," Chief Bwerani said, observing James and realizing that he was close to losing control.
"Oh, oh, oh!" James gasped as his cock erupted, cum pulsing into the woman's eagerly sucking mouth.
"Ahh, the Blessing," Chief Bwerani said, his hand on Harriet's head whose eyes bulged when his cock exploded into her mouth, hot thick cum filling her mouth, causing her to choke as she gulped it down, her mouth filling again, gulping again, and again, and again, until finally the flow slowed down, then stopped, and breathlessly Harriet was able to squeeze and milk the last drops of cum from his cock, the pointed tip of her tongue probing the slit of Chief Bwerani's cock for any last bits as James stared in astonishment.
"Thank you for accepting my invitation and receiving my Blessing," Chief Bwerani said, helping a gasping Harriet to her feet as the woman who had just sucked James off rose to her feet. "Thank you for Blessing my wife, who is named Dziko."
"I thank you for your invitation and Blessing," Harriet said, her head spinning from what had just occurred.
"Yes, thank you," James added as he tucked his still-hard cock back into his trousers and fastened them.
"Please, come into my home and tell me about why you are here," Chief Bwerani said, turning to lead the way, Dziko following right behind him.
"Are you okay?" James whispered to Harriet as they followed.
"My God, James," Harriet exclaimed, "I just sucked his cock!"
"And his wife sucked mine," James replied.
Chief Bwerani's home turned out to be a larger stick and bramble hut. There were several throw rugs covering the ground and a few small cushions. As they sat, bowls of dried fruit were placed in the middle and they were given gourd-cups of some liquid.
"Welcome!" Chief Bwerani said, raising his gourd-cup.
"Oh, my!" Harriet said, coughing when she swallowed the fiery, strong liquid.
"That's something else," James said, barely managing not to cough himself.
"Dziko makes it," Chief Bwerani said proudly, beaming at his wife.
"Do you like it?" Dziko asked in a soft voice, a smile on her face.
"It's very strong," Harriet replied, "but it has a nice taste. I'm sure I could learn to drink it without coughing."
"You received Bwerani's Blessing without coughing, I am sure that you will be able to drink ktang without coughing," Dziko said. "They are both things that are accomplished only with practice."
"Well, yes, I suppose so," Harriet replied, blushing furiously at the memory of Chief Bwerani's huge ebony cock swelling, then exploding in her mouth. Against her will, she felt her pussy flooding with juices, just as it had when it actually happened.
"I also enjoyed the Blessing of James," Dziko continued. "It was a good Blessing."
"Yes, thank you," Harriet replied awkwardly.
"Now, please explain to me why you come to receive my invitation and Blessing," Chief Bwerani said.
For the next half an hour, James explained about Christ and the Presbyterian church, the teachings and purported benefits of following those teachings. He explained that their purpose was to introduce Christ and his Blessings to those who had not had the chance to know them so that Christ might be a part of their lives.
"These are not bad things," Chief Bwerani said when James stopped talking. "We, too, have these things, but we find them in the running water, the rushing wind, the mountain spirits."
"And those are good things," James conceded. "More people need to be aware of these things, to be open to the energy that they possess and offer."
"What you say is true!" Chief Bwerani said, jumping to his feet, excitement in his face. "And you say that this Christ, he does all of these things himself?"
"And more, though not necessarily himself," James replied. "Everything that he does, he does in the name of God, His Father and the Father of us all."
"This we understand," Chief Bwerani said, nodding. "The all spirit, Ur-Rah. Even the rivers, winds, and mountains all talk to him."
"Do you think that you would want to have Christ as a part of your life also?" James asked.
"I will need to think about this," Chief Bwerani said. "You ask me to make room for your gods next to my own. My gods might not like to give up the room that they have. I will need to consult them."
"Come, enough of gods," Dziko said. "It is time for evening meal. You will join us," she said as she rose to her feet.
The meal was served in the center of the open area with everyone in the tribe eating communally and together. Chief Bwerani ate the same food as the rest of his people, though the sea did part to let him through as he approached to fill his gourd-bowl.
James and Harriet enjoyed the stew, some kind of meat with various vegetables. Sitting right next to Chief Bwerani and Dziko, they couldn't yet talk, so they observed the people, colorful, full of joy, clearly caring of one another.
"Your people are beautiful," Harriet said.
"They are a good people, happy," Chief Bwerani replied. "That is my duty. We share our Blessings. That is the key to our happiness."
As the meal finished, some men beat on some drum-like instruments, creating a rhythm, and people started to dance, to move to the rhythm. No two moved or danced alike, they each moved according to how the rhythm affected them. Gourd-cups of ktang were shoved into their hands and then they were up dancing to the rhythm of the beating drums, losing themselves in the trance of everyone moving together, a seething mass of passion seeming to dominate all feelings.
And then they were being led to a hut and allowed to slide to the cloth-covered ground, exhausted, drunk, their minds exploding from the experience of the day.
"Oh, James, I'm so sorry," Harriet said, sprawled on her back, her head slightly spinning from all of the ktang.
"Sorry?" James replied. "For what?"
"James!" Harriet exclaimed, turning onto her side to face him. "The invitation. Sucking Chief Bwerani's cock."
"You did exactly the right thing," James replied evenly, turning to look at her. "Do you think we'd still be here if we hadn't acceded to their invitation?"
"Sucking cocks for Christ," Harriet said, then burst out laughing. "Oh, James, I'm sorry. I just couldn't help it. I think that I'm a little drunk. Did it bother you, to see that?"
"I was a bit busy with my cock buried in Dziko's mouth at the time," James replied.
"But you looked, you watched?" Harriet asked.
"Yes, I looked, I watched," James admitted.
"How did that make you feel?" Harriet asked.
"I remember thinking about the contrast of your pale skin with his ebony cock," James replied, blushing slightly.
"And?" Harriet asked.
"And I remember noticing your tongue under his cock," James replied. "I almost came when I saw that. I knew that you were trying to make him cum. I briefly wondered if you were enjoying it."
"I had no doubts that you were enjoying Dziko," Harriet said, then smiled when she saw the look of dismay start to form on his face. "You'd have to be dead not to. I thought for a moment about how white your cock looked, but otherwise, I didn't really think about it at all. I wasn't insulted or angry or anything normal like that. I was more numb than anything, especially when Chief Bwerani stuck his cock in my mouth."
"She had an amazing talent for sucking a cock," James admitted, grinning sheepishly. "I can't believe I lasted as long as I did. Was anything about sucking his cock good for you?"
"Good for me!" Harriet exploded, her eyes wide. "James!"
"Well, it wouldn't be entirely outside the realm of possibility, would it?" he asked. "Sucking a cock is your favorite thing to do, isn't it? Or has that changed?"
"Bastard!" Harriet said, then laughed. "Okay, when he started to cum, I came. When I thought about it again after dinner around the fire and the dancing, I came again."
"No kidding!" James said, staring at her. "Do you ever cum when I cum in your mouth?"
"All the time," Harriet replied, nodding her head. "But Chief Bwerani cums. I mean, he really cums. I've never had to swallow more than twice with you. I had to swallow five or six times with him. Thick cum, too. I'll bet that's why Dziko brews that ktang. It cleared my mouth totally, even the taste of his cum. But I can feel my jaw aching now. He's pretty big."
"So I noticed," James said. "You looked like a little girl because his cock was so big."
"So you're not upset about it?" Harriet asked.
"Are you upset at all about Dziko sucking my cock?" James asked.
"No," Harriet replied, shaking her head.
"And I'm not bothered that you sucked Chief Bwerani's cock," James said, "though I wish I had thought of my camera."
"You wouldn't dare!" Harriet said with a laugh, climbing on top of him.
"Do you think we should?" James asked when Harriet reached down between them to grab his cock.
"I doubt that it matters," Harriet replied, kissing him.
"The camera," James said, trying to reach for his vest.
"What?" Harriet exclaimed.
"For us," James pleaded. "Look at where we are. "I'll just set it away from us. You'll thank me one day."
"So this is what you're really like," Harriet said, stripping her clothes off while James got the camera and set it up, propping it on a backpack facing the entrance to the hut and the central square beyond where the fire's embers still glowed in the night.
"You really came twice?" James asked as he quickly stripped, his cock standing out in front of him.
"Care to make it three times?" Harriet asked, pulling her knees to her chest and exposing her pussy to him.
"Definitely," James said, dropping to his knees.
"No, no, not that!" Harriet cried out when James leaned down and slid his tongue into her pussy. "Oh, God!" she gasped as James fastened his lips on her clit and teased it in just the way he knew would trigger an orgasm, arching her hips into his face as she began to cum.
"You bastard!" she hissed when he crawled up her body and kissed her, the taste of her pussy thick on his tongue as his cock slid into her, her legs reaching up to wrap around his waist.
"This is great," James gasped as he began to plunge his cock in and out of Harriet's sopping pussy. As wet as she was, he could feel the hydraulic-type pressure of her pussy on his cock as she squeezed him with her muscles.
"Don't cum in me," Harriet gasped as she came on his cock yet again. "No way to clean up."
"Here you are," James gasped a few minutes later, pulling his cock from Harriet's pussy and crawling up her body to stick his gooey cock in her mouth as his balls exploded.
Unlike Chief Bwerani, Harriet had no trouble taking all of James' cock into her mouth and she used all of her mouth and throat muscles to milk him, not stopping until she had extracted every last drop of cum that she could.
"This is amazing," Harriet gasped as she lay sprawled on her back, looking out the entrance to the hut to the glowing embers beyond.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Did you sleep well?" Chief Bwerani asked them the next morning when they emerged from their hut to the sounds of the village coming awake.
"We did, thank you," James replied.
"Please accept my Blessing to start your day," Chief Bwerani said, pulling aside his wraparound to reveal his thick, ebony cock.
"You honor me, Chief Bwerani," Harriet managed to croak as Dziko knelt in front of James and quickly extracted his cock, inhaling it.
Harriet's cheeks were flaming like her hair as she knelt in front of Chief Bwerani in the center area, everyone gathering around, and began to suck his thick ebony cock. She could hear the sounds of Dziko sucking James' cock as she attempted to get her mouth around the hugeness of Chief Bwerani's cock.
"James and Harriet are our blessed guests," Chief Bwerani announced to the gathered crowd as Dziko and Harriet continued their blowjobs.
There was a general murmuring of approval as everyone gathered close, wanting to see the Blessing bestowed. James was the first, stifling a cry as his balls exploded. Racking her eyes over in spite of Chief Bwerani's cock filling her mouth, Harriet could see cum pulsing from the end of James' cock onto Dziko's extended tongue just before she inhaled his cock, burying her nose against his belly.
And then Chief Bwerani began to cum, his cock exploding in her mouth, cum gushing onto her tongue and down her throat as she gulped as fast as she could. She could feel his hand on her head as she sucked and gulped, milking him with both hands and her mouth as she squeezed every possible drop of cum from him before rocking back on her heels and trying to clear her mouth of his thick cum.
"Thank you for receiving my Blessing," Chief Bwerani said as he helped Harriet to her feet.
"Thank you for your Blessing, Chief Bwerani," Harriet replied with a wan, cummy smile.
"Come, let us get some morning meal to help wash down the Blessing," Dziko said, taking Harriet's arm. "Ktang is too strong for the morning."
Harriet couldn't help laughing as Dziko led her to the communal breakfast offering, some fruits, cheeses, and bread.
"Just like at home," Harriet observed to James when they sat to eat. "Suck your cock, eat some breakfast, usually fruits, cheeses and some bread."
"Feeling at home, are you?" James asked with a chuckle.
"I'm feeling almost disembodied," Harriet replied. "This is a Fellini movie gone wrong. Sucking the big, black cock of a stranger in the center square of town while everyone gathers to watch."
"If it's any consolation, you looked pretty hot doing it," James said, raising an arm to fend off the blow that she aimed at him.
"I suppose you like an audience?" Harriet asked.
"Actually, I was thinking that I was lucky to have anything left for Dziko after last night," James replied, smiling as her cheeks flushed. "I think the wild brought out the wild in you."
"Just keep up the good work," Harriet said smugly, flashing a smile at him. "And don't forget why we're really here."
"Not a chance," James assured her. "I don't care how many times Dziko sucks my cock."
"See, this is such a Fellini conversation," Harriet said. "It's like our life has suddenly turned into a Dali painting; everything's become a bit surreal."
"God works in mysterious ways," James said. "I've given up questioning; I just accept."
"I keep trying to find shame in myself," Harriet confessed. "The only shame I've found is that I'm ashamed to say that I can't find any. I feel as though there's something wrong with me."
"I don't see how you've violated any of Christ's laws," James said slowly. "I've been thinking about it because I realized that my feelings towards you haven't diminished because of...if anything, I feel closer to you, more in love with you than ever."
"But the 8th Commandment, 'Thou shall not commit adultery'," Harriet said.
"I don't consider what has happened here to be adultery," James said after a moment.
"But what about Hebrews 13:4?" Harriet asked. "Marriage should be honored by all, and the marriage bed kept pure, for God will judge the adulterer and all the sexually immoral."
"The first thing that comes to mind is that what we've gone through here is all about honor, honoring the guest, honoring the host, honoring God because of the purity of our actions," James said. "I also see the adultery they are referring to as being about unfaithfulness, falseness, or disloyalty. There's been none of that in any way, shape, or form."
"I'm not so sure that that would be a general interpretation," Harriet said, "but I love you to death for it. And in the way you describe it, I agree."
"James, please come and talk with me some more about Christ," Chief Bwerani said as he came up.
"I'd like that, Chief Bwerani," James said, getting to his feet.
"Dziko enjoys your Blessing," Chief Bwerani said.
"Uh, that's very kind," James stammered. "She is very talented."
"She is," Chief Bwerani agreed. "I make certain that she practices frequently so that she can honor all Ngoni."
"I am very honored, Chief Bwerani," James assured him.
"Now," Chief Bwerani said as they took their seats in his hut, and for the next 3 hours, Chief Bwerani asked about Christ, sharp, insightful questions, with depth, wanting to know about ramifications pro and con to a variety of situations.
"Bwerani, we should offer our guests the midday meal," Dziko said. "You have done nothing but talk. They must be tired and thirsty."
"This is true," Chief Bwerani said, smiling at his wife. "I have learned much from James, and Harriet. We will eat and then I will decide."
"Never would I have expected such questions," Harriet said when they got some food and sat in the shade to eat. "That'll teach me to judge a book by its cover."
"Amen," James agreed. "That is one very bright man."
"I'm impressed with his integrity," Harriet said. "This is a very lucky village to have him as their chief."
"I have decided," Chief Bwerani said loudly in the midst of the midday meal.
Conversation stopped and everyone looked to the chief expectantly.
"James and Harriet have explained to me about Christ," Chief Bwerani explained. "I have asked many questions and have received good and honest answers to my questions. I am satisfied that there is room for Christ in our lives."
There was much murmuring now, as nobody had any idea what he was talking about, but this was their chief and he always led them and guided them properly.
"You ask me, ask us to join your Presbyterian tribe of Christ," Chief Bwerani said. "I will agree to do this if you will also agree to join our tribe of the Ngoni."
"We would be honored, Chief Bwerani," James replied after exchanging looks with Harriet.
"We will hold the ceremony after the evening meal," Chief Bwerani announced.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"This has gone beyond my wildest hopes," James said to Harriet as they sought the shade of the hut they had used the previous night.
"It is about as good as we could have hoped for," Harriet agreed. "I can't help wondering about what the ceremony will be like."
"Me, too," James agreed. "Whatever it is, I'm sure it will be interesting."
"I must admit that I am looking forward to getting home so that I can bathe," Harriet said. "Other than the kids, that's what I miss."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"We will now hold the ceremony," Chief Bwerani announced after an hour of incredible feasting, at which a small deer had been grilled on a spit over the fire, apparently a signal honor and a rare event. "First, I will join your Presbyterian tribe of Christ," he declared. "Then you will join the Ngoni tribe."
"We do it very simply," James explained. "I ask you a question and you answer yes or no."
"I will speak for my people," Chief Bwerani said. "My words will be theirs."
"Okay," James said, reaching into his back pocket for a bible. "This is our holy book," he explained. "Put your hand on the book while I ask the question."
"So if I do not answer true, your god will strike me down," Chief Bwerani said, nodding approvingly.
"Chief Bwerani, do you believe that Jesus Christ died for your sins and the sins of your people and do you accept him as your Savior?" James asked.
"Yes," Chief Bwerani answered strongly. "For myself and for my people."
"Welcome to the community of Christ," James said, a big smile on his face.
"Am I now a Christian?" Chief Bwerani asked.
"You are," James replied, his heart full of joy.
"Are you now ready to become part of the Ngoni tribe?" Chief Bwerani asked.
"Yes, we are," James replied.
"Prepare," Chief Bwerani said, and people went scurrying. "We will drink," he said, handing each of them a full gourd-cup of ktang. "You will be our first new Ngoni while I am a Christian Chief," he announced proudly.
James and Harriet watched curiously as a huge pile of dried grasses were piled up in the center. When it was about 4 feet high, it was covered with a large, embroidered cloth. Children were encouraged to play on it and they compressed the grasses down to about a foot in height.
"In the way of our ancestors as it always has been and always will be, we now welcome to the Ngoni, James Moore and Harriet Moore," Chief Bwerani announced to the gathered people who crowded close. "Are you ready?" he asked Harriet.
"Y-yes," Harriet replied, confused. "W-what..." she said when Dziko and two other women stepped forward and began undressing her. "James!" she cried out, her voice quavering as her bra was removed and her naked breasts exposed, her thick ruby nipples immediately screwing into hard knots.
"James!" Harriet cried out weakly as there were many gasps from the ebony crowd of people surrounding her, everyone wanting to reach out and touch her freckled, alabaster skin, so unlike their own.
James was frozen, unable to move, not sure what he would do if he could as Harriet was stripped naked. Dziko and the two women now gently pulled Harriet onto the embroidered cloth, pulling her down onto her back. One woman knelt above her head, her hands resting lightly on her shoulders. Dziko and the other woman each knelt on one side of her legs.
"James!" Harriet gasped when she felt her legs grabbed and pulled wide apart, exposing her pussy, which elicited even more murmuring as everyone saw her pale, bald pussy, her lips spread apart to show the glistening interior, her fat clit above, and above everything a fiery thatch of hair.
James could only stare as Chief Bwerani dropped his wraparound, his huge 10" of ebony cock swinging in front of him. He turned to Dziko who took his cock in her mouth, all of it. James felt his mouth hanging open when he saw her do this and noticed that Harriet had a similar reaction.
Then Chief Bwerani turned from Dziko, his thick ebony cock glistening from her mouth, and knelt in front of Harriet's spread thighs.
"Oh, my God!" Harriet gasped when she felt Chief Bwerani rub the head of his cock up and down between her spread pussy lips, then press it into her, slowly and inexorably, until every inch had disappeared inside of her as she lay there gasping for breath, her pussy filled and stretched like it had never been before.
Then he started fucking her, sliding every inch of ebony cock from her each time before filling her up again. James was mesmerized by the sight of that huge ebony shaft sliding in and out of Harriet's spread pussy, her delicate inner lips sliding along the shaft each time it moved in and out.
Everyone started chanting, a low chant, in time with Chief Bwerani's strokes as he continued fucking Harriet. Slowly but surely, the tempo and volume of the chants increased until it was a rapid crescendo, Chief Bwerani's hips a blur as he fucked Harriet like a maniac.
And then they stopped, holding one high tone, Chief Bwerani's head thrown back, his hips pressed tightly up against Harriet's ass, his cock buried in her pussy.
James could see Harriet trembling as Chief Bwerani slowly withdrew his cock from her pussy, which gaped lewdly open, a veritable river of cum flowing out. The women in the crowd did a very high-pitched ululation while the men barked like dogs as Chief Bwerani displayed his glistening ebony cock.
James saw Harriet still gasping for breath, her legs spread wide, her pussy gaping open, cum still flowing from her. He saw her eyes widen in synchronicity with his own when Chief Bwerani turned to Dziko once again and she engulfed his glistening, gooey cock, taking it all the way into her throat, sucking it clean as he slowly pulled it back out.
"You are now Ngoni," Chief Bwerani declared, reaching down with both hands to pull Harriet to her feet, cum now running down her inner thighs. "You may now give and receive Blessings from all Ngoni."
Everyone was trying to crowd around, reaching out to touch Harriet. The ones that managed to reach her inner thighs licked their fingers to taste the chief's blessings.
"And now James Moore will become Ngoni," Chief Bwerani announced, and three husky young men stepped forward and began stripping James of his clothes, leaving him naked with his 8" of hard white cock standing out in front of him.
Harriet could only stare as the three men pulled James onto his back like she had been, his hard cock sticking up in the air. Chief Bwerani was holding her against his body, her back to him, his huge cock along the outside of her thigh, one hand draped over her shoulder to cup her breasts and pinch and pull on her hard, aching nipples, unable to ignore the feeling of cum sliding down the inside of her thighs.
Then Dziko appeared, shedding her wraparound to reveal a gleaming ebony body with a thick thatch of dark hair covering her pussy. Bending over and taking James' cock in her mouth, she sucked on him, making sure that he was nice and hard and liberally lubricating him before squatting over him and guiding his cock to her pussy.
James groaned when Dziko sank onto his cock, her pussy picking up where her mouth had left off, like a hydraulic machine sucking and milking his cock as she slammed her hips up and down as the rest of the people took up their chant, slowly increasing the pitch and tempo in time with Dziko's pussy rising up and down on James' cock. It didn't take long before Dziko was grinding her hips down on him as he came, filling her hungry pussy. When she had milked him dry, she stood up, one hand cupping her pussy which she then held up to show the cum.
Everyone gathered close as she dragged her tongue through the cum, then offered her hand to the crowd, the women fighting to get close enough to either lick her hand or drag their fingers through the cum so that they could taste it.
"You are now Ngoni," Chief Bwerani said, offering James a hand and helping him to his feet. "You are now free to give and receive Blessings from all Ngoni."
"Thank you for the honor, Chief Bwerani," James gasped, his legs still shaking from the intensity of his orgasm.
Everyone started shouting and yelling as they jumped up and down in riotous dance in celebration. James and Harriet looked around for their clothes but didn't see them. Gourd-cups of ktang were shoved into their hands and they both greedily gulped it down. They were getting used to the taste.
"James, I had no idea," Harriet said, shaking her head.
"Neither did I," he replied.
"I'm still cumming," she said, then burst out laughing. "God, I'm still cumming!"
"That impressive, was it?" James asked.
"James, you're big and you know that you make me cum like crazy," Harriet replied. "But Chief Bwerani is big, really big. I've never had anything that size in me before except a baby being born and it was coming the other way."
"It was something to see," James told her.
"What do you mean?" Harriet asked, her eyes flashing with alarm.
"You are so tiny, so white, so red, so pink," he replied. "He is so black, so big. It looked like your pussy would split in two."
"That's exactly what it felt like, too," Harriet replied, then laughed.
"Come, we dance," Chief Bwerani said, still naked himself.
With a shrug of the shoulders, James and Harriet joined the crowd, dancing naked until they were too tired to stand up anymore. When they staggered to the hut they had slept in, they found their clothes there.
"I don't know that I've ever been so exhausted," Harriet said, sprawled on her back.
"I know what you mean," James said, dropping to his knees, "but there's no way I'm going to sleep without fucking you."
"James!" Harriet hissed, then started laughing when he lifted her legs high into the air and glued his mouth to her well-used pussy. "Oh, James," Harriet sighed, her hand on his head as she felt his tongue in her, then she was arching her hips in orgasm as he sucked on her clit, her juices flowing onto his tongue as he slid it back into her to drink her up before crawling up her body, his cock finding its way deep into her pussy as her legs rose up to wrap around his waist.
"I can't believe you ate my pussy after all of that," Harriet said, kissing him.
"Tasted as good as ever," James assured her as his hips rose and fell, her pussy clasping him in its familiar way until finally he came, this time pumping his cum deep into her pussy before falling over asleep next to her.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Ready for a hike?" James asked the next morning when they awoke and dressed after indulging in a last fuck in the village before leaving.
"Yes," Harriet replied, her cheeks glowing along with her eyes. "I feel like I have so much energy."
"I'd say this experience has agreed with you," James observed, smiling at the flush that appeared on her cheeks.
"It's been an experience unlike any other and far more than I ever expected," Harriet replied.
"I'll say," James said with a laugh as they exited their hut.
"Good morning, James and Harriet," Chief Bwerani said as he approached them with Dziko, a big smile on his face. "Did you sleep well?"
"Like the dead," James replied. "That was quite a party."
"Yes, we like to celebrate," Chief Bwerani said. "We are always looking for an excuse."
"It was a wonderful celebration, Chief Bwerani," Harriet said.
"Yes, it was," Chief Bwerani agreed. "Will you allow me to give you my Blessing before you leave us?" he asked, pulling aside his wraparound to reveal his massive, ebony cock.
"Oh!" Harriet gasped, her cheeks flushing as she stared at his huge cock, remembering how it had felt filling her pussy. "Yes, thank you," she replied as she sank to her knees. "I'd be honored," she said as she opened her mouth and took the head of his cock in.
"Please, give me your Blessing," Dziko said, sinking to her knees in front of James and extracting his cock, licking her lips and smiling as she let it slide onto her tongue and down her throat as her nose pressed up against his belly.
James suppressed a groan as Dziko's mouth and throat massaged his cock, looking over to see Chief Bwerani's huge ebony shaft sticking out of Harriet's mouth, her tongue along the underside of his cock as she sucked on him.
Dziko's talent proved too much, even though James had just finished fucking Harriet, and his balls spasmed as he pumped cum into Dziko's eager, sucking mouth.
Looking over at Harriet on her knees, her mouth full of Chief Bwerani's thick ebony cock, James saw her tilt her head back and then he saw the outline of the head of Chief Bwerani's cock entering her throat. Harriet closed her lips on the shaft of his cock and tried to take more of it in, holding him by the ass, then gave it up, breathing heavily through her nose as she controlled her urge to choke.
James heard her moan, her eyes widening, and he knew that Chief Bwerani was once again filling her mouth with cum. He watched her gulp, once, twice, several times as she pumped his cock with both hands, coaxing all of the cum from him that she could, finishing with her lips locked on the tip of his cock. When she opened her lips, James was able to see the sharp tip of her tongue jammed in the slit of his cock.
"Thank you for receiving my Blessing," Chief Bwerani said as he helped Harriet to her feet.
"It's my honor, Chief Bwerani," Harriet said, gulping as she swallowed the last of his hot, thick cum.
"You are now Ngoni," Chief Bwerani said. "Any time you meet Ngoni, custom dictates that you offer and receive Blessings. When you are here in your new home, you are free to offer and accept Blessings as you choose."
"Thank you," James said, holding back a smile as Harriet scraped some cum from her chin into her mouth. "You have honored us by accepting us into your tribe."
"And you have honored us with the gift of Christ," Chief Bwerani replied.
"Please accept this Bible," James said, proffering the Bible that Chief Bwerani had sworn on when he accepted Christ. "Here you will find the words of Christ. When we meet again, perhaps you will have more questions for me."
"I will read this, every word," Chief Bwerani replied, clearly proud at receiving the Bible. "We look forward to your return."
"And perhaps you will honor us with a visit in Nkopola," James said. "You will always be welcome. You could see how we celebrate our relationship with Christ."
"One day perhaps," Chief Bwerani replied. "Would you like some of my people to accompany you to the road?"
"Thank you, but I'm sure we'll manage," James replied.
Nothing more was said as James and Harriet turned to leave. When they got to the rocks where they had first encountered a member of the village, they turned and looked back and saw that everyone was still standing in the center of the village, watching them depart. Waving, they turned and headed down the trail to the road and their car.
"James, I need to know something," Harriet said when they made their first stop after a couple of hours of walking in silence.
"What would that be?" James asked, laying back on the ground and stretching his back.
"Is there anything about the last couple of days that bothers you, that you regret in any way?" Harriet asked.
"Only that I might have hurt your feelings by enjoying Dziko," he replied after a long pause.
"Really?" Harriet asked. "Even with what we talked about, I still feel a sense of guilt."
"Nonsense," James said emphatically. "I wouldn't change a thing."
"You're sure?" Harriet asked. "No doubts? You're not just saying that to make me feel good?"
"I wouldn't change a thing," James repeated, sitting up, then kneeling in front of where she was sitting on a large boulder. "When I think of how incredibly erotic it was seeing Chief Bwerani's huge cock sticking out of your pussy," he said, reaching up to open her pants.
"What do you think you're doing?" Harriet asked, looking around as James worked her pants down her legs and pulled them off.
"Showing you how upset I am," James replied, lifting her legs as she laughed and gluing his mouth to her wet pussy.
"God, you are totally insane," Harriet gasped as he ate her pussy, immediately cumming on his tongue as he easily tripped her orgasm.
"It's you who drive me insane," James said, standing up and dropping his pants, his cock sticking out in front of him as he lifted Harriet's legs and slowly slid his cock into her as they both watched. "You've got to be the sexiest woman alive," he said as he began to pump his cock in and out of her.
"Oh, James, we've got so far to walk yet," Harriet gasped when she felt his cock pulse inside of her as he came, filling her pussy with cum.
"Your pussy just felt too good to stop," James gasped, kissing her as the last drops of cum dripped from his cock. "And I wouldn't do that to you," he said, dropping to his knees.
"James!" Harriet gasped as he leaned towards her cum-oozing pussy. "Oh, god," Harriet screamed at the top of her lungs when she felt his mouth fasten onto her cum-filled pussy. "You haven't done that in so long."
"Shame on me," James said, lifting his face from her pussy for a moment, his own cum dripping from his lower lip as he looked at her, then leaned forward again, his tongue sliding into her cum-filled pussy.
"God, whatever did I do to deserve a husband like you?" Harriet gasped when James finally sat back on his heels licking his lips, her pussy glistening pink and clean.
"Call it the latent Ngoni in me," James replied, licking his lips.
Twice more before they reached the road and their car, they stopped, once for Harriet to suck James' cock, once for James to fuck her again, filling her pussy with cum then going down on her.
"I think we need to take bush trips more often," Harriet said as they started the car for the drive back.
"You won't get any argument from me," James said, then burst out laughing. "I feel like a teenager again."
"I'm not sure what it is I feel like other than very horny," Harriet said.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Mom, Dad," Mary cried out, running up to hug them each in turn. "I'm so glad that you're back."
"How did it go?" John asked as he shook his father's hand, then hugged his mother.
"Definitely the most interesting experience of our lives," James replied, his arm across John's shoulders as they went into the house.
"And very rewarding," Harriet added, her arm around Mary's waist. "Your father convinced the Ngoni tribe to accept Christ."
"The whole tribe?" John asked. "That's incredible! Great!"
"The chief speaks for the tribe," James explained. "Once Chief Bwerani decided that it was for him, that meant it was for everyone."
"You must be so proud!" Mary said, beaming.
"I only explained things as best I could, answered Chief Bwerani's questions," James said. "The Lord is responsible. I am very happy, but I feel no pride. I am proud of the fact that we were made members of the Ngoni tribe."
"You are Ngoni?" Teleza asked, her eyes wide.
"Yes," Harriet replied.
"You were invited and received Chief Bwerani's Blessing?" Chabwera asked.
"Yes," James replied.
"Right now, I want a bath more than anything," Harriet said with a sigh. "It's been a long 3 days."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I can't wait to sleep in a bed again," Harriet said as she sat back from her plate, her stomach full, a glass of wine in hand.
"This is good, but it doesn't have the kick that ktang does," James said, twirling his wine glass with his fingers.
"If ktang tasted this good, I'd be an alcoholic," Harriet said with a smile.
"It sounds like an incredible experience," John said. "I wish I could have been there."
"Yes, well, maybe one day," James said, clearing his throat as he saw a bit of color creep into Harriet's cheeks.
"You look like you need to go to bed," Mary said. "You're falling asleep at the table."
"It has been a long few days," Harriet agreed, "and we walked for almost 6 hours this morning before driving back another 5 hours."
"Come, we will make you comfortable," Teleza said.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Harriet stretched her hands up above her head, looking out the balcony as Chabwera opened the curtains while Teleza turned down the bed.
"You are truly Ngoni?" Chabwera asked.
"We are," James replied.
"Do you feel this in your heart or is it only words that you used for Chief Bwerani?" Teleza asked.
"I feel it in my heart," James replied. "I am proud and honored to be Ngoni."
"And you?" Teleza asked Harriet.
"Yes, me, too," Harriet replied.
"We are Ngoni," Teleza stated. "Chief Bwerani is my cousin."
"You are Ngoni?" James asked.
"Yes," Chabwera replied. "Do you accept that?"
"Yes, of course," James replied.
"I offer you my Blessing," Chabwera said, 8" of solid ebony cock suddenly appearing.
"Oh!" Harriet gasped, her cheeks flushing with color. "I-I-I'm honored to receive your Blessing," she stammered, shocked to the core as she sank to her knees in front of him.
"You will give me your Blessing?" Teleza asked, sinking to her knees in front of James and reaching for his pants.
"Y-yes, of course," James replied, his eyes glued to Harriet, one hand cupping Chabwera's balls, the other wrapped around the ebony shaft of his rock-hard cock as she leaned forward, her tongue extended to slide beneath his cock as she took it into her mouth, not stopping until her nose was pressed up against Chabwera's stomach.
James felt his cock enveloped by Teleza's hot, wet mouth, her nose pressing up against his belly as she milked him with her throat muscles. He felt his head spinning at the surreal scene of Teleza sucking his cock while Harriet sucked Chabwera's, right in their own bedroom. This wasn't out in the bush where they could pretend that it wasn't real. This was all too real, James realized as he felt his balls reach overload and explode, cum pouring into Teleza's eagerly sucking mouth as she drank up his Blessing.
Chabwera grunted and James saw Harriet's nostrils flare and her cheeks hollow as Chabwera came, filling her mouth with his thick seed.
"You are truly Ngoni," Teleza said as she got to her feet licking her lips and swallowing the last of James' cum. "Thank you for your Blessing."
"I am honored," James said, his balls still spasming from the force of his eruption.
"It is a pleasure to share my Blessing with you," Chabwera said, looking down as Harriet squeezed the last drops of cum from his cock, chasing into the slit with the tip of her tongue to make sure.
"I am honored to receive your Blessing," Harriet said as she got to her feet, scraping cum from her chin into her mouth as she continued to swallow Chabwera's thick cum.
Nodding but saying nothing, Chabwera and Teleza turned and left the room.
"My God, James!" Harriet gasped, scraping yet another blob of cum from the corner of her mouth into her mouth. "Is it going to be like this every time we meet Ngoni?"
"I'm not sure," James replied. "But Chief Bwerani did say that custom dictates that you offer and receive Blessings when you meet other Ngoni."
"You're right, he did," Harriet said, remembering. "I didn't understand what he meant at the time."
"Are you okay?" James asked, looking at her with concern in his eyes.
"Oh, I'm okay," Harriet replied with a laugh. "What a picture that would have made, me on my knees sucking the black cock of our houseman."
"It would be a hot picture," James said. "I cannot explain it, but seeing you with a black cock in your mouth is incredibly hot. It's far hotter than seeing my cock in some black woman's mouth."
"Well, at least Chabwera's cock is more normal in size, not like Chief Bwerani's," Harriet said. "And he didn't cum forever."
"Did you?" James asked, a leer in his eyes.
"There's only one way to find out," Harriet replied as she dropped her clothes to the floor and crawled onto the bed, laying back and spreading her legs to open her pussy to him.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I told you they were sex crazy," Teleza said with a grunt as they listened at the grill in the kitchen that was connected to the main bedroom as James ate Harriet's pussy.
"She sure likes being Blessed," Chabwera replied, rubbing his crotch.
"Him, too," Teleza said, "but that's true of all men. Tasty Blessing, though. Lucky that he's not one of those white men with little equipment."
"Bwerani said that Dziko liked it, too," Chabwera said. "Said she came like crazy when he fucked her."
"It's good to be Ngoni," Teleza sighed. "Sharing Blessings. We're a happy people."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Mom, Dad, I got a letter from Charlene Nance," Mary announced the next morning at breakfast. "She's invited me and John to visit her and her family in Chipita for a week."
"Where is Chipita?" Harriet asked.
"I looked it up," Mary replied. "It's way up in the north, near the border with Zambia and Martinique, right at the edge of the foothills."
"James?" Harriet asked.
"I don't see why not," James said. "We can't get away for that long because of the school, but I don't see any reason why the two of you shouldn't go and see some of the country. I'm sure Greg and Susan will look after them."
"How would you get there?" Harriet asked.
"I checked," Mary said. "The best way is by bus, though we'd have to overnight in Mzuzu. It's the 3rd largest city in Malawi and it will be easy to find a hotel for the night. That's ¾ of the trip and it will take a whole day. The last ¼ to Chipita takes just as long as getting to Mzuzu."
"How long would you be gone then?" Harriet asked.
"I don't know," Mary replied. "A couple of days to get there, a couple of days to get back. There's no reason to hurry, is there? I mean, we can stay until we feel like coming back?"
"That sounds like a great idea," James said. "I'll give Greg a call and see what he has to say."
"I guess John won't mind seeing Charlene again," Harriet said with a smile.
"Hey, she's the only western female that I've met," John replied defensively.
"Well, at least you'll have your sister along to keep you in line," Harriet said. "Remember, you represent us as well as our church and Christ."
"How could we possibly forget, mom?" Mary said. "We have you and dad as living examples every day."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I feel like such a hypocrite," Harriet said when John and Mary left to go down to the lake to watch the fishing boats come in.
"Nonsense," James replied.
"Do you think it's safe to let them travel by themselves?" Harriet asked.
"I'm sure it is," James replied. "In any event, I'll talk to Greg later."
"Good morning," Teleza said, entering the dining room, Chabwera right behind her. "You slept well?"
"We did, Teleza, thank you," Harriet replied. "I hope you did, too."
"I did," Teleza replied. "I had such happiness that you are now Ngoni. Shall we share Blessings? The children are not here?"
"No, the children are not here," Harriet replied, her face coloring as Chabwera stepped forward to stand next to her, extracting his ebony cock from his trousers as Teleza knelt in front of James, reaching for his zipper.
"You enjoy sharing Blessings?" Chabwera asked as Harriet reached for his cock and balls.
"You honor us," Harriet said as she leaned forward and took his ebony cock into her mouth.
"Yes," James agreed as his cock disappeared into Teleza's mouth.
"It is a pleasure to Bless you," Chabwera said, one hand holding Harriet's head while he sawed his cock in and out of her mouth.
"Ahh," James groaned, his cock exploding in Teleza's mouth.
"Your Blessing is very delicious," Teleza said when she had finished sucking him off, licking her lips as she got to her feet.
"Your mouth is made to be Blessed," James replied, at which Teleza started laughing.
"Many men have said this," Teleza said, wiping her eyes of tears. "I am pleased that you appreciate."
"You love Blessings, don't you?" Chabwera asked as Harriet sucked the cum from his cock, jacking him with both hands.
"I do," Harriet said, looking up from Chabwera's cock in her fist as she licked her lips, then stuck out her tongue to catch the cum that dripped from his slit before going all the way down on him one last time, sucking hard as she pulled back, her cheeks hollowed as she extracted every last drop of cum from his cock.
"Chief Bwerani asked us to give this to you," Chabwera said, offering a CD/DVD case after putting his cock away.
"He says this is so that you will always remember becoming Ngoni," Teleza added.
"Thank you," James said, looking at the disc case speculatively.
"Chabwera, Teleza, the Nances have invited John and Mary to visit them in Chipita," Harriet said. "Do you see any problem with that? They would go by bus."
"Chipita is Tumbuka tribe area," Chabwera said. "Very different from Ngoni, though the name Chipita is Ngoni and means 'it has gone'. They do not share blessings like Ngoni. Ancient enemies. Ngoni fought many battles with Tumbuka when they came from South Africa long ago. That is why the Tumbuka are only in the far north today."
"Is there anything that we should worry about?" Harriet asked. "Is it unsafe?"
"Not unsafe," Chabwera replied. "And Nance family is many years in Chipita. There will be no problem."
"Do we need to hide the fact that we are now Ngoni?" James asked.
"Never!" Teleza replied. "Always be proud to be Ngoni. But nobody will ask white people if they are tribe members. It is very unusual. You are special."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Well, I talked to Greg Nance today," James said when they were all gathered for dinner. "They're really excited that you're going to visit them. He insists that you won't be any trouble and that you're welcome to stay as long as you like."
"Can we leave tomorrow?" John asked.
"I don't see why not," James replied.
The rest of the evening was spent pouring over atlases and maps and reading up on whatever they could find about northern Malawi.
"God, I'm beat," Harriet sighed as she fell onto their bed.
"Let me help," James offered, reaching up beneath her skirt to grab her panties and peel them down her legs.
"You're going to help?" Harriet asked, smiling as he finished undressing her and then himself, his cock standing at attention in front of him.
James' cock lurched when he pulled Harriet's legs wide apart and spread her pussy with his fingers, the pink interior glistening wetly as he leaned forward and slid his tongue into her. He loved eating her when she was wet like this and thoroughly enjoyed himself, bringing her to several orgasms before crawling up her body and sinking his cock into her.
"I'm going to miss the kids," Harriet said as James fucked her.
"With them not here, you won't need to hold back," James responded as he plunged his cock into her hot pussy.
"I've been so afraid that they'd walk in on Chabwera and Teleza sharing Blessings us," she said, giggling as she squeezed James' cock with her pussy.
"Ah, ah, ah," James groaned as his balls let loose as he pictured Chabwera's ebony cock in Harriet's mouth, cum leaking from the corners as he filled it with cum, just as James was doing right now with her pussy.
"Mmm, perfect," Harriet sighed as she unwrapped her legs from around his waist and lay sprawled beneath him.
"I'll say," James agreed, rolling off of her onto his back next to her.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Mom, dad, wake up," Mary said the next morning, knocking on their door before opening it and barging in, stopping in her tracks when she saw that they were both naked on their backs.
"M-Mary," Harriet said, grabbing a sheet and throwing it over James and pulling it up to her neck. "What..."
"We have to be at the bus station in 30 minutes," Mary explained.
"But it's still dark out," Harriet complained, looking out the balcony to see the lights still twinkling in the town.
"The bus leaves at 5:00, mom," Mary said. "You know that."
"Give us a minute," Harriet said. "We'll be right down."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I couldn't believe it!" Mary whispered to her brother while they waited for their parents.
"So they sleep naked," John said. "That's no big deal. Now, if you had caught them in the act, that would be more interesting."
"Oh, you are so terrible sometimes," Mary said, slapping his shoulder as she laughed with him.
"So, you're off on your first African adventure," James said as he came into the kitchen with Harriet trailing, both of them wearing bathrobes.
"Yes!" Mary replied, her eyes bright and shining.
"John, you take good care of your sister," Harriet admonished.
"I will, mom. I promise," John replied.
"Oh, I'm going to miss you!" Harriet all but sobbed as she hugged first Mary, then John.
"It's only going to be a week or two," Mary said, her eyes glistening with suppressed tears.
"Call us tonight," James reminded them. "You have the camera, plenty of batteries and memory cards?"
"And every night," Harriet insisted.
"Mom!" Mary said. "We'll be okay."
"Yes, I've got the camera," John said, patting his pocket.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, James," Harriet wailed as she sat at the kitchen table while he made them coffee.
"They'll be fine," he reassured her, setting a steaming mug of coffee in front of her.
"I know, it's just...it's just," Harriet said.
"I know," James commiserated. "But they'll be fine."
"You're right," Harriet said, sitting up and consciously making her face more cheerful, smiling as she brushed the tears from her eyes.
"Maybe you need a Blessing to help you feel better," James said, getting to his feet and letting his robe part, his rock-hard cock sticking out.
"Yes, I'm sure that a Blessing will help," Harriet said, smiling. "Blessings are the cure for all that ails a person."
"I couldn't agree more," James said as Harriet leaned over and wrapped her lips around his cock. She could still taste herself on him from their night's fun.
"Ah, the morning Blessing," Chabwera said when suddenly the door opened several minutes later and he entered, followed by Teleza just as James was exploding in Harriet's mouth.
Harriet could only stare wild-eyed at them as she struggled to gulp all of James' cum down, her cheeks flaming as she finished sucking him off.
"We, too, always begin with a morning Blessing," Chabwera assured her. "Please, allow me to add my Blessing," he said as he stuck his ebony rod in her face as she was still struggling to swallow James' cum.
"Th-thank you," Harriet stammered, still swallowing. "You honor me," she said as she opened her mouth and let him slide his cock in.
"She is very beautiful during the Blessing, don't you think so?" Teleza said as she stood next to him, one hand dropping to wrap around his still-hard cock.
"She is at that, very beautiful," James agreed as he watched Chabwera slowly sliding all 8" of his cock into Harriet's mouth until his belly was pressed up against her nose, the shape of his cock clear in her throat.
"Are you able to give me your Blessing?" Teleza asked as she stroked him.
"Yes, it would be my pleasure, Teleza," James said, smiling and shaking his head as she sank to her knees and took his cock into her mouth.
Knowing that he wouldn't cum so fast, having just done so, James enjoyed watching Harriet sucking Chabwera's cock. He could tell that she was enjoying it when she would hold his cock up and run her tongue up and down along the underside, then softly suck on his balls before taking him back into her mouth and down into her throat.
Slowly but surely, Teleza coaxed James to a state of excitement and over the edge, his balls spasming as he came in her mouth.
"Yes, yes," he heard Harriet gasp softly as Teleza finished sucking him off.
Turning to look, he saw Harriet jacking Chabwera's big ebony cock onto her extended tongue, ropes of cum spurting out and onto her tongue and into her mouth. Harriet gulped quickly, cum splashing onto her upper lip before she opened her mouth and took him in, her cheeks hollowing as she siphoned his cum from his cock.
"Thank you," Harriet whispered when she finished sucking Chabwera off, making sure to get every last drop of his cum, "for the honor."
"It is truly a pleasure to give you a Blessing," Chabwera said as he put his cock away.
"There are a few other Ngoni families here in Nkopola," Teleza said. "They have expressed an interest in meeting you. "Would you like to meet them?"
"Of course," Harriet replied automatically.
"Would you visit our home to meet them?" Teleza asked. "We all live in the same neighborhood. Perhaps you'd like to see what a real home for a normal family is like."
"That sounds like a wonderful idea," Harriet said.
"I'll speak to them," Teleza said. "Maybe tomorrow evening."
"That would be fine," Harriet said. "Just let us know."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I am so beat," Mary moaned when the bus finally pulled into Mzuzu 14 hours later, having made hour-long stops at Salima, Nkhotakota, and the fishing village of Nkhata Bay before finally arriving. After the first few stops, John hadn't even bothered with the camera. There just wasn't much of anything worth memorializing.
The road had been like an off-road obstacle course and the bus felt as though it had no shocks. The Africans on board didn't seem to pay it any mind, but John and especially Mary were beaten up by the experience. They weren't looking forward to the next day's journey on purported lesser roads.
They were pointed to a hotel where a smiling desk clerk registered them, then gave them a key, explaining that the room was on the top floor, the 5th, and that the stairs were over there, pointing.
"The 5th floor!" Mary moaned as they dragged themselves up the stairs, their rucksacks on their backs.
"We'll dump these packs and go find something to eat," John said.
"Go down all these stairs again?" Mary wailed.
"Here we are," John said as they arrived at the 5th floor.
They had to go to the left and theirs was the second door they came to. After some fumbling with the key, the door opened.
"No way!" Mary gasped when she saw the room.
It was a small, single room with a naked lightbulb hanging from a wire in the middle of the room. There was a single twin bed and no other furniture of any kind. The toilet/shower was where a closet would normally have been situated and had no door.
"You want to go down and complain?" John asked, totally deflated.
"This just sucks!" Mary said, stamping her foot. "Damnation!"
"Well, it's only for one night," John said.
"Damn!" Mary said.
"I have to take pictures of this," John said as he shook his head. "Nobody would believe us otherwise."
"You want to get some food and then take a shower or the other way around?" John asked after taking a few quick shots.
"If I take a shower, I'll never go down those stairs," Mary said. "I'm so numb right now that I could probably do it. And I am really hungry."
"Food it is," John said.
The market across from their hotel was an open-air market with hundreds of vendors offering a whole range of goods, mostly foodstuffs. They found one vendor who was grilling some sort of meat and then cooking it in a large, wok-like iron pan with a variety of vegetables and spices. It turned out to be incredibly delicious and incredibly spicy. Their mouths were on fire by the time they finished eating.
Desperate for something to drink, they found a vendor that had a couple of rickety tables with plastic chairs. There were a couple of local men squatting nearby, passing a pint bottle of some clear liquid back and forth.
They ordered two local versions of coke, ice being non-existent, and gulped half of the warm liquid down, each of them making a face when they lowered their glass.
The two men passing the bottle laughed, smiling and pointing to them, then holding up their bottle. After a minute, the man holding the bottle at that moment staggered to his feet and came over to their table, then held out the bottle to John with a big smile on his face.
Smiling back and nodding, John accepted the bottle and sniffed at the opening, his eyes widening as he realized that this was some serious white lightning. Steeling himself, he brought the bottle to his mouth and took a sip. It was the foulest-tasting anything he had ever had in his mouth and it must have shown in his expression, because the man exploded in laughter, as did his friend.
Gulping down the fiery liquid, John shook his head, then smiled, feeling a tingling all the way down to his toes.
"That bad?" Mary asked, smiling.
"Worse than you can imagine," John replied.
"That bad?" Mary said, cocking her head. "Should I try it?"
"It's awful, Mary," John said. "And it's toe-tingling strong."
"Just what I need," Mary said, turning to smile at the man.
His eyes widened and he half proffered the bottle, smiling broadly when Mary reached out to accept it. Not heeding her brother's warning, she brought the bottle to her mouth and took a healthy gulp. Immediately her face turned red, her nostrils flaring as she gulped down the foul-tasting, fiery liquid, coughing, her eyes flooding with tears as the two Africans rolled on the ground laughing.
"Are you okay?" John finally asked when she stopped coughing, unable to restrain his smile.
"That was awful!" Mary said, wiping her eyes with the backs of her hands.
"I tried to tell you," John said.
"I mean, that was really awful!" Mary said, reaching for her cola. "It would be better in the coke."
Looking over at the counter area, John saw several bottles of the same liquor they had just tasted. A bottle was only $1.50, so he bought one. Returning to the table, he opened it and offered it to the two Africans. With big smiles of thanks, they took healthy gulps from the bottle, returning it to him ¼ drained. John then poured a good measure into their colas.
"It's still awful, but it's better," Mary said.
"I agree," John said after tasting his, the two Africans moving back to where they had been squatting after exchanging big smiles of friendship.
"I don't feel nearly so bad now," Mary said with a sigh, "just tired."
"I know what you mean," John said. "We'll probably sleep like the dead."
"Just make sure your watch is set to wake us in time," Mary admonished.
"Ready to go back?" John asked.
"Might as well," Mary said, draining her drink and making a face. "Ugh!"
"This will be a great story," John said as he drained his, unable to refrain from making a face as he put the remainder of the bottle in his back pocket for future use.
Several times John had to put out a hand to steady Mary as they made their way back to their hotel. Mary made liberal use of the walls as they staggered up the stairs to the 5th floor and their room.
"This is not a Hilton," Mary stated breathlessly when they finally shut the door behind them.
"You first for the shower," John said, falling onto the bed.
"John!" Mary cried out some minutes later, waking him. "The hot water isn't working."
"Maybe there isn't any," John suggested.
"But the controls have hot and cold," Mary said.
"What do you want me to do about it?" John asked, rolling onto his side so that he was looking directly into the bathroom, his eyes widening as they focused and he saw his sister reaching up to the shower controls, her dark-ruby nipples hard knots on the ends of her full C-cup breasts.
"Isn't there anything you can do?" she asked, turning towards him, her arm going up reflexively to ineffectively cover her naked breasts when she saw that he was looking into the bathroom.
"I can fiddle with the controls as well as you," John said, trying not to stare at her shaved pussy with its vermillion slit, her clit just visible peeking out.
"Would you, please?" she asked. "Of course this place doesn't have any towels," she said as he got to his feet and entered the bathroom, trying not to look at her.
"I don't think there is any hot water," John said after a minute or so of fiddling with the controls. "I guess it's cold showers."
"Damn!" Mary said, stamping her foot and clenching her fists, forgetting to cover herself. "What a day!"
John had just fallen asleep again when Mary shook his shoulder.
"Your turn, John," she said. "You get used to the cold water."
"Yeah," John said as he got to his feet, just getting a glimpse of her naked ass as her t-shirt settled.
John didn't find the water that cold and enjoyed just standing beneath it, his head thrown back, letting the dirt and grime of the day slowly wash away.
"John, I need to pee," Mary said from the doorway, her hand between her legs.
There was barely room for two people with the toilet against the far wall and the shower mounted above it. The room was only 4' wide; a closet. Despite wanting to keep her eyes closed, Mary was unable to, getting a good eyeful of John's cock.
"Thanks," she said as she finished, quickly rinsing her hands as she scuttled out.
Mary wasn't a virgin. She had been with several different boys, one for an extended period of time. She enjoyed sex, finding everything about it to her liking. She had been worried about what she was going to do for a whole year in Malawi. The past week or so she had actually been looking over some of the young Africans that she encountered, speculatively wondering before discarding the idea as improper.
But now she was shocked by the sight of her brother's cock, even though he was trying to hide it behind his hands. He was definitely bigger than any of her boyfriends. She tried not to think about it as she lay on one side of the bed, her back to the middle, her hands clenched between her thighs.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
As small as the bed was, they both slept the sleep of the innocent, shocked awake in the morning when John's watch buzzed. They fumbled into their clothes and staggered down the stairs and made their way to the bus station.
They found seats together on the right side, which was going to be the scenic side as they drove 122 miles up the west side of Lake Malawi to Karonga, stopping along the way at each and every town, no matter the size, for 30 minutes up to an hour. Once again, after the first couple of stops there just didn't seem to be any point in taking any photos. They had adequate time to totally walk Khondowe, Kliwawa, Matete, Nchewere, Nyungwe, Ngara, and Mlali before they arrived at Karonga, 8 hot, tired hours later.
The remaining 61 miles west through the foothills of the mountains pushed up by the spreading of the Rift Valley were absolutely tortuous, the road winding, narrow, rutted, potholed, and just simply nightmarish. The only stop before Chipita was Lufita, a frustrating and tantalizing 7 miles from Chipita, which they could just make out as they wasted another 30 minutes.
John and Mary were absolutely relieved when they saw Greg, Susan, and Charlene Nance waiting as they disembarked the bus.
"It's quite the trip, isn't it?" Greg asked as he shook John's hand and then kissed Mary on the cheek, Susan having already hugged her.
"I never imagined it would be so brutal," John said, smiling when he saw Charlene and Mary hugging, Charlene seeming huge and Mary child-like due to the 10" difference in their height.
"Oh, I'm so glad you came, both of you," Charlene said, turning to kiss John on the cheek then impetuously quickly hugging him. "Those few days in Nkopola were such a treat, to see people, a new place. I would have loved to have spent more time with you."
"Well, it seems like we've seen every town there is between here and there," Mary said. "We had plenty of time to walk them all and get intimately familiar."
"Did you find anything memorable?" Susan asked.
"Not really," Mary replied with a laugh. "We even stopped taking pictures."
"Well, I'm sure you're going to have some memorable experiences while you're here," Greg said as he led them to their car, an old Land Rover, "and plenty of wonderful pictures to take."
"This is great!" John said when he saw the small farmhouse set amongst the trees on the northeast side of town.
"Yes, we were lucky to be able to get it," Susan said. "One of our biggest supporters left it to his family when he died with the provision that we be allowed to buy it if we wished. We were able to get the Mission back home to come up with the money and we've been here for 6 years now."
"Did you get to grow up here?" Mary asked.
"Yes and no," Charlene replied. "I'd go to school back home and stay with my grandparents, but always come here for vacations. I wasn't sure what I wanted to study after high school and came here. I still don't know what or if I want to study, but I know I love living here."
"Mary, if you don't mind, you'll be sharing Charlene's room," Susan said.
"Oh, this looks like heaven compared to last night," Mary cried out when she saw the perfect bed with proper bedding and pillows, explaining what they had been through.
"You had to share a bed?" Charlene asked, her eyes wide.
"Yes, and not much bigger than that one," Mary replied. "If we hadn't been totally exhausted, I'm sure neither of us would have gotten any sleep."
"This is small, but you should be comfortable, John," Greg said, showing him a very small bedroom across the hall from Charlene's. It was just big enough for a bed, a chair, and a small dresser.
"This is fine," John said. "It only a place to sleep."
"We figured that you'd be hungry, so we've got a meal ready for you," Susan said. "Unless you want to freshen up first."
"Actually, I'm starved," Mary said. "If it wouldn't offend you..."
"Goodness, no," Susan said, shepherding everyone to the large kitchen table.
"As you can see, this is an old farmhouse," Greg explained. "The kitchen was the center of everything. That's why it's the largest room in the house."
"I love the way this place feels," Mary said with a sigh.
"When I get done showing it to you, you won't want to leave," Charlene said.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, I cannot wait to get into that bed," Mary sighed.
"I'm sure you're exhausted," Charlene said as she undressed for bed, Mary in her usual t-shirt and panties after her shower. "I'm just dying to talk, but it will wait until tomorrow."
"Me, too," Mary said. "It really does feel nice to be here."
"Sleep well," Charlene said as she climbed into bed totally nude.
Mary couldn't help noticing Charlene's heavy, C-cup breasts with large pale nipples. She didn't see any hair on her pussy and thought she caught a glint of pink as she swung her legs onto the bed. Once again, she fell asleep on her side with her hands clenched between her thighs.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Man, I slept so good!" John declared the next morning when he entered the kitchen. "Great food, great bed. Just what I needed."
"I'm glad to hear it," Susan said with a smile. "I usually cook, but it's definitely a do-it-yourself, help-yourself kind of a house. If you're hungry, don't be shy. If I'm not here or there's nothing prepared, you're on your own."
"That works for me," John said.
"You'll regret that," Mary said as she appeared, looking totally refreshed. "He eats like a horse."
"Well, it's worked, because he's as big as one," Charlene said with a smile, John's 6'5" making her 5'10" seem small, something that she wasn't used to.
"We have to go to the mission," Susan explained as Greg appeared. "We're going to leave you in Charlene's capable hands."
"What do you have in mind for today, Charlene?" Greg asked.
"I'll show them the overlooks, get them oriented," Charlene replied. "As much history as they care for. If the weather stays like this, maybe end up at the swimming hole for sunset."
"Well, have a good time," Greg said after exchanging glances with Susan.
"Do we need to dress in any special way?" Mary asked.
"Shorts, t-shirts, good walking shoes if you have them," Charlene replied.
"It seems pretty amazing to be here," John said as Charlene drove away from town up into the foothills.
"I often feel like I live in a movie," Charlene said.
"Oh, what a view!" Mary exclaimed when Charlene turned the car onto a deeply rutted lane for 100m and then pulled out into a small field with some boulders scattered around.
"You can see the whole city from here and down into the valley until it disappears in haze," Charlene explained. "We're at the bottom of the Rift Valley, one of the oldest places on the planet, where they think all humans originated."
"This is really great," Mary said as she sat down next to Charlene on a large boulder near the edge.
"Yeah, I could spend time here," John agreed as he joined them after having taken a bunch of photos. "I should have brought my real cameras."
"This is my favorite lookout," Charlene explained. "I have two more, each different in its own way. There's seldom anyone here, so I sunbathe."
"Has anyone ever shown up when you were sunbathing?" Mary asked.
"Oh, sure," Charlene laughed. "It's always a toss-up as to who is more surprised. I usually just cover up and it's no big deal. Malawians in general aren't all that hung up about nudity. You'll see it all the time, everywhere."
They sat in silence, just looking out over the valley to the mountains beyond.
"What is that?" Mary asked when she smelled the smoke and looked over to see Charlene smoking.
"Some of Malawi's best," Charlene said, taking a deep drag on the joint and holding her breath. "Do you indulge?" she asked after finally expelling her breath, offering the joint in their direction.
"I never have tried it," Mary replied.
"I used to," John said, reaching for the joint. "I had to stop when they started drug testing at university in the sports programs."
"I never knew you smoked pot," Mary said, watching with surprise as her brother took a big pull on it.
"Wow, it's been a while," John said, coughing as he exhaled. "That tastes great."
"It'll knock you on your ass if you're not careful," Charlene warned with a laugh. "You should take it easy if you're not used to it."
"Do your parents know that you smoke it?" Mary asked.
"Sure," Charlene replied. "Everyone smokes it. I don't know anyone that doesn't."
"Is it legal?" Mary asked.
"I don't think they bother about it," Charlene replied. "Everyone smokes it and always has. People smoke in restaurants and bars. I've never seen anyone have a problem."
"Is that all of Malawi?" John asked, reaching for the joint again and taking another pull on it.
"I'm not sure," Charlene replied. "I know north of Mzuzu it's like that. That's the part of the country that I'm most familiar with. This is Tumbuka country. Ganja's been a part of their culture forever. They're basically an agricultural people."
"I can feel that," John commented, handing the joint to Charlene. "Feels good."
"Shall we go to the next overlook?" Charlene asked. "We can stop for drinks on the way at a place I know."
"Yes, let's," Mary said.
They drove for about 20 minutes before pulling over to a broken-down, ramshackle type of a place. There was an old, toothless woman sitting in the shade smoking a big hand-rolled cigarette, the unmistakable aroma of ganja coming from it.
Charlene ordered 3 bottles of beer and a bottle of the firewater they had bought the previous day at Mzuzu while John took photos.
"What is that stuff?" Mary asked, pointing at the bottle.
"Ktang," Charlene replied. "Vile stuff, but effective. Beer's a good chaser to wash the taste away."
"We bought some in Mzuzu," John explained. "Didn't take much to knock us out after a day on the bus."
"It's good for that, easing all sorts of aches," Charlene said, taking a pull from the bottle and then reaching for her beer. "Ah!" she said, smacking her lips. "Now I'm awake."
John and Mary imitated her, gulping the beer afterwards, then piling back into the car.
"This place always has the best sun," Charlene explained after 10 minutes of bouncing down a terrible, rutted path which ended abruptly at a huge wall of boulders. "Come on," she said as she got out of the car, grabbing the bottle of ktang and her beer.
John and Mary followed, scrambling over some boulders to find a semi-circular ledge of rock about 20' deep with a curving overhang of rock making a partial ceiling. The entire ledge ran for almost 100', surrounded by the mound of boulders and a line of trees.
"This is great," Mary said, hands on hips as she surveyed the view.
"You can be in the sun or shade, in the breeze or not," Charlene explained, taking a pull on the bottle of ktang, then chugging her beer. "Ahhhh!" she cried out, shaking her head.
"I really like this place," John said after taking several photos, picking up the bottle of ktang and taking a swig, then washing it down with his beer. "I think I'm getting used to the taste of that ktang," he said as he sat down and leaned back against a boulder, closing his eyes as the sun beat down on them.
Charlene was sitting with her back to a boulder, her face lifted to the sun, and Mary found one for herself. She started awake at some point, surprised that she had fallen asleep, and looked over, surprised to see that Charlene had removed her t-shirt and was sitting back topless, her large C-cup breasts with the large pale nipples basking in the sun. There were no tan lines, so it was clear that this was something that she regularly did.
Seeing that John was asleep, his head back against the boulder, Mary quietly got to her feet and made her way over to where Charlene was sitting.
"Mind if I join you?" Mary asked.
"Of course not," Charlene replied, smiling down at the smaller woman as she sat down next to her.
"I hope he doesn't wake up," Mary said, taking a deep breath and pulling her t-shirt off over her head, her dark, ruby nipples knurling into knots.
"You've got great nipples," Charlene said as she appraised Mary. "I wish I had nipples like that."
"Sometimes they get so hard, they hurt," Mary said, cupping her breasts.
"Mine only hurt when someone bites them too hard," Charlene said with a sigh.
Mary watched Charlene take a slug from the bottle of ktang, then finish her beer before she leaned back and closed her eyes. Mary reached for the bottle and took a swallow, struggling not to cough as she swallowed the vile liquid, then finished her beer trying to ameliorate the taste of the ktang in her mouth.
"See something interesting?" Mary heard Charlene's voice as though from a distance, opening her eyes to see John sitting with his back to the boulder, his shirt off, facing them.
"I'd have to say yes," John replied, nodding.
Mary blushed when she felt her brother's eyes on her naked breasts.
"Good," Charlene said, leaning back and closing her eyes.
It took all of Mary's self-control to just lean back and close her eyes, knowing that John was looking at her.
"This pale skin of yours will burn quickly if you're not careful," Charlene said a while later, Mary gasping when she felt her hand slide across her stomach, then up and over her breasts. "We should go to the last overlook."
They all dressed and climbed back into the car for the ride to the next overlook, about a 30-minute drive. This time the overlook didn't view the town and valley, but the Rift Valley to the north. They could easily see the convolutions of the ground where the movement of the earth spitting apart when the tectonic plates moved had pushed up foothills and then small mountains.
"It's called the East African Rift Valley," Charlene informed them. "It was formed where the Somalian and Nubian tectonic plates are pulling away from the Arabian plate. The eastern branch of the rift passes through Ethiopia and Kenya, and the western branch forms a giant arc from Uganda down to Malawi. It's really quite amazing."
"How do you know so much about it?" Mary asked.
"I'm addicted to knowledge, among other things," Charlene replied. "Since I live here, I wanted to know as much about it as possible, so I've studied, learned about how it was formed, the history of the peoples, and as much about the different tribes as possible."
"I'm impressed," John said. "We haven't been here long enough, though we've pretty thoroughly explored Nkopola. I see we've got a lot to learn."
"It's impossible to learn it all, but there's enough that you can pick and choose the parts that interest you," Charlene said.
"Have you thought about studying African history?" John asked.
"I have," Charlene replied. "It's about the only thing that interests me academically."
"You could probably teach at a university," Mary said.
"Maybe, one day," Charlene sighed. "Right now I'm just enjoying being alive."
They all sat down with their backs to a rock wall to watch the view, the colors changing as clouds scudded by overhead, the variations in the colors of green dazzling the eyes. John would occasionally take a photo as the lighting changed.
"I think there's enough for each of us to have a bit more," Charlene said, holding up the bottle of ktang.
"I can't believe I'm getting used to this stuff," John said when he drained the bottle after the two girls had each had a mouthful.
"I know," Charlene said with a smile. "It's terrible stuff, but it makes you feel so nice and loosey-goosey."
"Ugh, nothing to wash it down," Mary said, making a face.
"We should go now if we want to be at the swimming hole for sunset," Charlene said a while later. "It's really beautiful to see through the trees as it sets behind the mountains."
"Let's do it," John said, getting to his feet and offering a hand to each of the girls, helping them up.
"Should we stop for some more ktang and beer?" Charlene asked, slowing as they approached one of the ubiquitous road-side stands.
"Why not?" John said.
"We're almost to the swimming hole," Charlene announced. "Let's save it for there."
"Oh, my, this is just beautiful," Mary gasped when the car pulled through a stand of trees after bouncing along a rutted road for 10 minutes.
The river snaked by, leaving a nice swimming hole in the bend that it created. The light was changing to a buttery yellow and the reflections on the slow-flowing water glistened and effervesced as it undulated by.
"There's only water for 3-4 months of the year," Charlene explained as they stood on the embankment enjoying the view, the mountains just visible through and above the trees lining the river. "You're lucky to be visiting now."
"Why aren't there any people here?" Mary asked, taking the ktang from Charlene after she took a slug on the bottle.
"Sometimes there are," Charlene replied after washing the ktang down with a chug on her beer. "There are half a dozen of these swimming hole bends in the river nearby. This one is my personal favorite."
"This is definitely special," John said after taking several photos.
"I'm going swimming," Charlene announced, pulling her t-shirt off over her head to reveal her gorgeous breasts once more, then dropping her shorts to the ground to stand naked before them.
John and Mary could only stare open-mouthed at the blonde Valkyrie, her long blonde hair gently being blown by the slight breeze, her big pale nipples covering the ends of her full breasts, no hair on her pussy to hide her long, furled pussy lips, her clit just peeking through.
"Oh, this is perfect," Charlene sputtered after jumping into the water and then surfacing. "It's the perfect temperature at this time of day. In the mornings, it's sometimes a bit cool until the sun warms it. Aren't you coming in?" she asked, water dripping from her breasts as she faced them with a smile on her face.
John and Mary exchanged glances and John shrugged, pulling his t-shirt off and then dropping his shorts and boxers, quickly jumping into the water before his cock's reaction to seeing Charlene naked became obvious. Taking a deep breath, Mary pulled her t-shirt off and then pushed her shorts and panties to the ground, the bright thatch of fiery red hair above her pussy shining in the waning light of day.
Mary could feel her cheeks flushing as Charlene and John looked at her, so she quickly jumped into the water. John had to squat down as his cock reacted to the sight of his naked sister, whose pussy had split open as she jumped, giving him a quick glance at the pinkness within.
"Here," Charlene said, standing up and leaning over the embankment to grab the bottle of ktang and their beers, her naked ass and pussy pointing right at them.
Mary's face flushed when she caught John's eye when she realized that he had seen her also looking and she sank down into the water to cover herself, her nipples achingly hard.
"Nudity doesn't bother you, does it?" Mary finally asked.
"No, not anymore," Charlene replied. "I forget that you're still new to Malawi," she said. "When I first got here, I was shocked at how much nudity there was. Then I got used to it. Now, it's no big deal. I hardly think about it. In the towns you won't see so much unless it's some bush people who have come to town to trade, but even they often cover up in town. At home, we often don't wear any clothes. It's much more comfortable, depending upon the weather."
"You mean your parents go around naked?" Mary asked, shocked.
"All the time," Charlene replied with a laugh. "Though I'm sure they'll exercise restraint while you're visiting. They wouldn't want to shock you. Does nudity bother you?" she asked.
"I'm not used to it," Mary replied. "Yesterday was the first time John ever saw me naked, and today."
"You've seen him naked before?" Charlene asked, a glint in her eyes.
"Oh, no!" Mary gasped, her eyes wide.
"What about you, John?" Charlene asked.
"Well, I'm not used to it, that's for sure," John replied. "But it doesn't bother me. I guess it's different for guys and girls."
"Most of the Malawians aren't that tall," Charlene said. "I'm usually taller than most of them and my dad is the tallest person around. You're going to raise some eyebrows."
"I've noticed people looking at us in Nkopola when we're wandering around," John said.
"I'm not surprised," Charlene commented. "Between your height and Mary's red hair and pale skin, you look very exotic to the Malawians."
"Now I understand why you're so tanned," Mary said.
"Ah, there it goes," Charlene said, turning to watch the sun as it sank behind the far mountain peaks. "I guess we should get going. Mom and dad will be home getting dinner ready," she said, standing up and turning to face them as they stayed squatted down in the water, her pussy level with their faces and only a couple of feet away.
John felt his cock swell when he saw the water dripping from Charlene's furled pussy lips just before she turned and scrambled up the bank, once again giving them both a show of her ass and pussy. Mary took a deep breath and stood up, following Charlene up the embankment of the river. John's cock got even harder as he unsuccessfully averted his eyes to avoid seeing his sister's ass and pussy as she scrambled up the embankment. He almost groaned out loud when he saw her pussy split apart to reveal her delicate inner lips and the fat button of her clit.
"You coming?" Charlene asked, taking a slug from the bottle of ktang, then smiling at John knowingly.
"John?" Mary asked in a puzzled voice as he stayed in the river, submerged up to his shoulders.
John was beside himself. His cock only got harder as he stared at Charlene and Mary standing naked side by side, the vermillion slit of Mary's pussy and the fiery thatch of red hair above and Charlene's long, furled pussy lips and clit peeking at him.
"I think John's seen something that got him excited," Charlene said, a big smile on her face.
"Oh!" Mary said, blushing as she understood and suddenly feeling self-conscious as she stood naked in front of her brother.
"It's okay, John," Charlene said. "I've seen hard cocks before and they don't offend me. We'll take it as a compliment."
"Oh!" Mary gasped.
"Maybe you could turn around?" John suggested.
"Oh, no, not a chance," Charlene replied with a laugh. "I want to see proof of your appreciation of our beauty and charms."
John's face flushed as Mary turned her back to him.
"Suit yourself," he said, standing up and striding out of the water and up the embankment, 9" of thick, solid hard cock leading the way.
"Nice, very nice," Charlene said, a big smile on her face as John grabbed his shorts and pulled them on. "Now you've seen mine and I've seen yours."
Mary quickly dressed, keeping her back to John, while Charlene took her time and seemed to take delight in making sure that John saw as much of her as possible as she dressed.
"How often do you come here?" Mary asked when they had all got back in the car.
"During the rainy season, pretty much every day," Charlene replied. "I spend the other 8 months waiting for the rain."
"Well, how was your day?" Susan asked when they arrived back at the farmhouse.
"Wonderful!" Mary replied. "It's so beautiful here."
"I understand why you like it here so much," John said. "It's totally different than Nkopola."
"There's an incredible diversity of geography and peoples in such a small area," Greg said. "Lake Malawi takes up about â…“ of the country's area, the rest is mostly foothills and small mountains with enough flat areas that agriculture can flourish."
"Which overlook did you like the best?" Susan asked. "We each have our favorites."
"I liked the last one, looking up the Rift Valley," Mary said. "The colors were amazing and there was no sign of humanity."
"I liked the second one, the sun ledge," John said. "I think I could easily spend a day up there."
"Did you make it to the swimming hole?" Greg asked.
"Yes, just in time for the sunset," Charlene replied. "The water was great, perfect temperature."
"Well, I'm sure you'll have appetites, then," Susan said. "Dinner's about ready."
"Have you met any local people in Nkopola yet?" Greg asked.
"Not really," John replied. "Everyone is friendly enough, though."
"It'll happen soon enough," Susan said. "Believe me, they want to meet you, to know you, but they've had experience with white outsiders showing up, then leaving. They want to understand you better before they open themselves to you."
"When that happens, then you'll understand why Malawi is heaven on earth to us," Greg said. "These are the best people I've ever known and I love living amongst them, sharing Christ with them, and learning about their lives and ways of living."
"Mom and dad have just started meeting some of the bush people," Mary said.
"Oh! Which tribe?" Susan asked.
"I think it was the Ngoni," Mary said. "They were gone for three days."
"The Ngoni are very friendly people," Greg said with a smile. "To be invited by the Ngoni is very special, not often done with whites."
"Dad said that they got the tribe to accept Christ," John said.
"You don't say!" Susan said, a surprised look on her face. "That's remarkable!"
"They also became members of the Ngoni tribe," John added.
"Members?" Greg asked, his fork pausing halfway to his mouth. "Actual members, Blessed by the chief and all that?"
"That's what they said," John replied. "They were pretty beat, but they also seemed really happy. I think it was a good experience for them."
"I'll bet it was," Greg said, a grin on his face. "The Ngoni are famous for their hospitality when they choose to extend it. I've seldom heard of whites being made members of the tribe, though. That's quite extraordinary."
"The most populous tribe around here is the Tumbuka," Susan explained. "They are old enemies of the Ngoni. The Ngoni almost exterminated them when they migrated up from South Africa. Many of the Tumbuka were sold into slavery to the Arabs. There are a few hundred thousand of them now, but at one time their existence hung in the balance."
"I was thinking of taking them up to Chinunka tomorrow," Charlene said. "It's only 12 miles, maybe about an hour to drive. That way they could see the deep rift. Maybe hike up to Ifumbo. That's only 6 miles along the river. The river should have plenty of water now."
"That's a beautiful area," Greg said approvingly.
"Would you be back in time for dinner?" Susan asked.
"Probably, but I'll take the tent anyway," Charlene replied. "Maybe we'll camp by the river for the night and come back the next day."
"Well, you know the area well enough," Greg said. "Just be careful. I wouldn't want anything to happen to any of you."
"We'd better turn in, then," Charlene said. "If we get an early start, we can find a place to get set up and have a bit of a hike before the day gets too hot."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"We need to make a stop first to get some supplies," Charlene announced the next morning after they had piled into the Rover.
They stopped at a larger road-side kiosk and purchased a whole case of beer, half a dozen bottles of ktang, a variety of fresh fruits, and a goat's leg, which Charlene assured them would be delicious after grilling it over an open fire.
Sipping ktang and drinking beer, they careened around the mountainous terrain until they arrived at Chinunka a little over an hour later, one bottle of ktang already finished. It only took 15 minutes to walk around Chinunka to see it, a nothing of a town, then they drove along the river road towards Ifumbo, pulling off of the road and splashing across a shallow fording spot to finally bounce to a stop in a small grassy clearing next to a bend in the river, a small stand of trees bordering the river on both sides.
"This is about halfway between Chinunka and Ifumbo," Charlene announced. "We can explore the whole valley from here."
"This place feels old," John observed, noticing the ancient, dark rocks.
"I love that feeling," Charlene said, pulling the tent out of the Rover.
John tried to help, but it was clear that Charlene had set up this tent many times. In just 10 minutes it was set up and Charlene threw some blankets and pillows inside of it.
"It's sort of small, isn't it?" Mary asked.
"Mom, dad, and I use it all the time," Charlene replied. "It's just for sleeping. Sometimes at night there are some wild animals. Nothing dangerous, but they won't bother you in a tent. Outside, they might get curious."
"I like this place," John said, looking around. "It's like we're the only people in the whole world."
"That's an easy feeling to find in Africa," Charlene said. "We should gather up a bunch of branches and things to make a fire later. Better to do it early while we've still got energy. You'll find plenty along the river, beneath the trees."
"Shouldn't we stay together?" Mary asked.
"It's not unsafe, but there's no reason not to," Charlene replied. "Come on."
For the next hour, they foraged along the river, building up a substantial pile of sticks and branches with which to build a fire.
"That's an awful lot," Mary observed.
"What we don't use, we'll leave for the next person," Charlene said. "Better to have too much instead of not enough. I hate eating undercooked meat."
"Oh, yeah," John sighed as he removed his hiking shoes and sat on the bank of the river, letting his feet dangle in the water. "This is great," he said, pulling his t-shirt off to feel the sun.
"It's so peaceful here," Mary said, joining him, spreading her toes in the sandy bottom of the river as it lazily streamed by.
"So many westerners have trouble learning how to relax and smell the roses," Charlene said as she appeared and sat on the other side of John, her hands full with 3 beers and another bottle of ktang, a big, fat joint between her lips and her t-shirt nowhere to be seen, her big, naked breasts with their large, pale nipples bouncing as she sat down.
Opening a beer, Charlene leaned across John, her breasts rubbing against his arm and offered it to Mary, then opened another and handed it to John before opening one for herself.
"If you push it firmly into the sandy bottom, the river water will actually cool it down," Charlene explained, showing by example what she meant, John and Mary following suit.
Lighting the joint, Charlene took a big drag on it before offering it to John, who accepted it, taking a long drag on it, too.
"I've missed this," John observed, looking at the joint in his hand as he exhaled. "It was a great buzz yesterday," he said, taking another hit before passing it back to Charlene.
"It doesn't bother you that I smoke ganja?" Charlene asked Mary before taking another deep hit.
"No, not at all," Mary replied. "I have some friends that smoke, it's just that I never tried it."
"Were you ever curious?" Charlene asked as she exhaled a long plume of pungent smoke?
"Maybe a little from time to time," Mary conceded. "I was always a bit worried about it affecting my studies. One of the guys I dated smoked it. He always told me that it was good that I didn't smoke because it meant more for him."
"At American prices, I can understand that kind of an attitude," Charlene said, taking another hit and handing the joint to John. "But here," she said, turning and draping an arm on John's shoulder, her naked breasts rubbing against his arm, "it's almost free," she said, exhaling, blowing the smoke in Mary's direction. "It's far more fun to share."
"I always liked the smell of it," Mary said as she watched her brother take a long hit on the joint, trying not to obviously stare at Charlene's big breasts rubbing his arm, but noticing the growing bulge in his shorts.
"You're welcome to try it," Charlene said, "but I don't want you to think at all that I'm trying to push you to try it. I'm being polite. Whether you smoke it or not is all about you, nobody else. That's my main rule of life."
"Your main rule of life is about smoking weed?" John asked, handing her the joint, all too aware of the feeling of her breasts on his arm and his growing cock in his shorts.
"Not just weed, everything," Charlene explained as she took a hit on the joint. "Anything I do, I do it because I want to do it, not because it's expected of me by anyone else. That's one of the things that Africa has taught me and it's a great way to live."
"I think I still do some things because of the expectations of others," Mary said.
"Of course you do, living in the USA," Charlene said. "It's almost impossible not to with all of the stupid rules that they have. That's one of the biggest differences to me between Africa and the USA. The USA is all about shame and guilt; Africa is all about pride and joy in living life for the moment. I suppose that's one of the reasons I'm in no hurry to go to university. I'd hate to live in the Western straight jacket of morality. I much prefer the African attitude."
"We're only going to be here for a year," Mary said, trying to control her face when she saw John take the joint from Charlene, his arm slipping around her waist as she snuggled her naked breasts against his side.
"I wouldn't mind absorbing some of that attitude while I'm here," John said as he took a long hit on the joint, glad for once that his cock was slightly trapped beneath his leg. Charlene's breasts were driving him crazy.
"I have no doubts that both of you will get Africanized," Charlene said, sitting up and disengaging herself from John. "It's just a matter of to what degree," she said, suddenly standing up and dropping her shorts to the ground and bounding naked into the river.
The river only had about 2' of water in it and was perhaps 10'-12' across. Charlene sat on the bottom facing into the current, leaning back on her elbows, her long, blonde hair streaming across the top of the river behind her as it flowed by, her large, pale nipples just above the water line.
"This is one of the best sensations in life," Charlene sighed. "Aren't you going to come in?" she asked, looking over at them.
John was too embarrassed to move, certain that his hard cock would be impossible to miss. He was surprised, though, when he heard Mary next to him say yes, then get to her feet, pulling her t-shirt off over her head to reveal her perfect breasts topped with hard, dark-ruby nipples.
"Bring the ktang with you," Charlene said as Mary pushed her shorts to the ground, John's eyes widening as he looked directly at her pussy just a foot in front of him. He managed to avert his eyes when she lifted her foot to step out of the shorts, though not in time to avoid seeing her pussy lips spread apart, a sticky string of pussy juice strung between them as the glistening pink interior was momentarily visible before she disappeared, splashing into the river.
John's cock was harder than ever now and he blushed, realizing that it was because of seeing his own sister's pussy, not because of Charlene, which was certainly reason enough.
"John, bring the beers, will you?" Charlene asked, turning to flash a bright smile at him. "They should be cold now."
As quickly as he could while Charlene maneuvered Mary to sit next to her, John shed his shorts and slipped into the water, hoping that the coolness of the water would help to dissipate his raging hard-on.
"Ah, there you are, finally" Charlene said, taking a big slug from the ktang and shaking her head violently before passing it over her shoulder to John.
"Here you are," John said, taking the ktang from her and handing her one of the beers, then handing one of them over her shoulder to Mary as he sat behind them, perpendicular to the current, praying for his cock to relax.
Taking a big slug on the ktang, John handed it over her shoulder to Mary, then tried to clear the taste from his mouth with his beer, which to his delight was reasonably cool. They continued passing the ktang and washing it down with beer until the ktang was half empty.
"I feel like my whole body is tingling," Mary said as Charlene flipped the remainder of the ktang up onto the bank.
"Ktang's good that way," Charlene sighed. "It might taste awful, but I've never had any alcohol that affects me the way ktang does. Even the hangovers aren't all that bad."
"Charlene!" Mary squealed, then burst into laughter after Charlene leaned over and whispered into her ear.
"Well?" Charlene asked, arching an eyebrow as she looked at Mary. "Every girl over 3 has done it and you know it. Go on, do it with the river. It's like magic. Much more subtle."
"You are too much!" Mary declared as she laughed.
"John, be a dear and be useful," Charlene said as she joined Mary in laughter. "Will you be our pillow?"
"Your pillow?!" John asked.
"Yes," Charlene replied. "Just stay right there," she said as she lay back, reaching over her head with her hand to find his leg, laying her head on the middle of his thigh. "Like that," she sighed. "Oh, this is so nice. A warm pillow in the cool water. You're so small, you need to use his chest," Charlene said to Mary.
"John?" Mary asked, turning to look over her shoulder at him.
"Why not?" John replied, shrugging. "I've got to be good for something."
Mary leaned back off her elbows until her head and shoulders were resting against John's rib cage. Mary's hard, dark-ruby nipples were clearly visible, as was the fiery red patch of hair above her pussy. Charlene's large breasts floated on the water with their big, pale nipples.
"Go on, do it," Charlene urged Mary, who giggled. "Go on!"
Not understanding, but curious, John saw through the water as his sister spread her legs apart, her left leg pressing against Charlene's right leg, whose left leg was spread wide.
"Well?" Charlene asked after a minute or so.
"I can't believe it," Mary replied, sighing, then laughing. "I'd never have thought of it in a million years. It is really nice," she added with a sigh after a bit.
John didn't understand what they were talking about, but he did understand that his cock was rock hard and laying across his thigh, just above where Charlene's head lay. He couldn't tear his eyes from them, finding Mary's hard, ruby nipples even more exciting to see than Charlene's large breasts with her large, pale nipples. Either way, the view only perpetuated and exacerbated his problem.
"We should probably go for a hike," Charlene said, rolling onto her side towards Mary, her eyes opening wide when she saw the head of John's cock not an inch from her nose. "Or we can just waste the day away here," she said, her eyes locked with John's.
"We can hike first, then come back here and soak, right?" Mary asked.
"Sure, anything is possible," Charlene said, breaking eye contact with John and staring at his cock as she reflexively licked her lips.
"That's probably a good idea," John managed to say, moving just enough that the two girls were forced to sit up, a smile on Charlene's face.
They clambered out of the river, Mary noticing her brother's huge erection as they pulled on their shorts. Mary was about to pull her t-shirt on when she saw that Charlene wasn't going to bother, so she forewent the urge and remained topless.
"Let's take a few beers and the rest of the bottle of ktang," Charlene suggested, putting it into a small rucksack. "Do you have any sunscreen?" she asked Mary, eyeing her pale, freckled skin. "You should put your t-shirt on if you don't."
"I do have some," Mary said, feeling her face flush as attention was drawn to her naked breasts in front of her brother.
"Here, let me," Charlene insisted, taking the sunscreen from Mary when she extracted it from her pack.
John was bent over in front of Mary, tying the laces on his hiking shoes while Charlene applied the sunscreen to her back. He stood up just as Charlene's hands reached around Mary from behind to smear sunscreen onto her breasts, Charlene filling her hands with them and pinching and pulling on her hard, ruby nipples.
Mary gasped, her face suffusing with color both from the sensation of having her breasts grabbed by another woman, as well as the fact that her brother had seen it, was now watching with his mouth hanging open as Charlene continued to apply the sunscreen to her front side from behind, constantly returning to her breasts.
"Mmm, that was nice," Charlene said, then laughed. "You really do have great nipples."
"God, Charlene, are you always so...so...direct?" Mary asked, blushing.
"Actually, yes," Charlene replied, "though I'm really trying to be restrained with the two of you."
"Restrained?" Mary gasped.
"Yes," Charlene replied, turning to lead the way. "I mean, think about it. You're the children of missionaries. Normally that's a pretty screwed up thing. Most of the ones I've met have their parents' zeal about religion."
"You don't?" Mary asked as she followed Charlene, John bringing up the rear.
"Not really," Charlene replied. "Oh, maybe there was Christ and all that, but I don't think it matters all that much. Religion, I mean. I'd rather practice respect than religion."
"Wow," Mary gasped.
"That makes a lot of sense, actually," John said from the rear. "Personally, I don't buy into the whole religion thing. I really, really respect mom and dad for their belief and commitment, but it's not for me."
"Well, I'm not at all interested in being a missionary," Mary said, "but I always accepted Christianity and all that. Does your attitude include Christ?"
"Oh, it includes everything," Charlene replied, stopping and turning around, smiling when she saw John take a picture. "That's the beauty of respect; anything is possible as long as you have respect for everyone else and what they think and believe, whether you agree with them or not. There is no one size fits all when it comes to people, I don't think."
"I have to agree with that," Mary said, nodding as they resumed their hike.
"Anyway, as I was saying," Charlene continued. "If you're typical missionary kids, full of religion, then I have to respect that and behave accordingly, with some restraints, as it were. Since I'm realizing that you're not, I can be more myself, which is pretty much unrestrained. I really meant what I said yesterday about loving to do what I want, when I want, without having to have any regard for anything but my own desires."
"But what if what you do hurts someone?" Mary asked.
"Then clearly I've not shown proper respect in some way," Charlene replied. "Have I hurt either of you in any way?" she asked turning to face Mary.
"No, no, not at all," Mary stammered. "You've been great. I love your way of looking at things. It's new to me. It makes me think. I mean, I would never have imagined that I'd be on a hike with my brother topless," she said, laughing.
"Isn't it great?" Charlene asked, putting an arm around Mary's shoulders and holding her close, smiling as John took a photo.
"John!" Mary gasped.
"Some photos will be just for us, some will be for others to see," John replied, shrugging.
"Can you take a picture of the three of us?" Charlene asked.
"I do have a mini-tripod," John replied. "It shouldn't be that hard to set up."
"Would you mind?" Charlene asked.
"Like this?" Mary asked, her eyes wide.
"A photo for us," Charlene said.
"As long as it's only for us!" Mary insisted.
"Of course," Charlene said with a laugh.
"Okay," John said after he had found the shot he wanted with the mountains and the river and trees behind them and a place to set the mini-tripod. "Once I press the shutter, we have 10 seconds."
John pressed the shutter and quickly moved to stand between the two girls. Charlene moved close, an arm around his waist her breast mashing against his side. John put his arms around each of their shoulders and then the shutter tripped.
"I think I might have moved," Charlene said. "Can you take another one for insurance?"
"Sure," John said, moving to the camera. "Here we go," he said, pressing the shutter and quickly getting between the two girls, this time both of their arms going around his waist as he held them close. Just before the shutter tripped, John gasped as Charlene grabbed his cock, then quickly released him.
"I think that was better," she said, smiling at his disbelieving face.
They continued their hike, not getting back to their camping site for another 3 hot, sweaty hours.
"Well, how did you like it?" Charlene asked as she stripped and walked into the river.
"It was great," Mary said as she followed.
John stripped, wanting to join them before his cock reacted to the sight of them.
"John, will you please let me use your camera and bring the ktang and some beers, please?" Charlene asked.
"It's not waterproof," John said as he handed the camera to Charlene, his cock swinging semi-hard already in front of him.
"Charlene!" Mary gasped, then burst out laughing when she saw her take a photo when John turned and bent over to pick up the ktang and the beers, getting a perfect shot of his ass with his cock and balls hanging down.
The three of them stood in the middle of the river naked, drinking ktang and beer, taking turns with the camera.
"I can't believe you took a picture of my ass!" John said, laughing as he flicked through the photos they had taken.
"Here, you can take one of mine," Charlene said, turning around and bending over, her legs wide apart. "I'll even give you a nice, big smile," she said, looking back over her shoulder with a big smile on her face at the same time that she reached back with both hands and grabbed her own ass cheeks and pulled them as far apart as possible, spreading her pussy wide open, her long pussy lips unfurled and gaping open, the pink interior glistening wetly.
"Wow!" Mary breathed, her mouth hanging open as John unfroze enough to use the camera, kneeling down to get close as he took photo after photo of Charlene's spread pussy and ass.
"Let's see them," Charlene insisted when she stood up, her face flushed.
Charlene pressed close to him on one side, while Mary was standing next to him on the other side as John flipped through the photos, his cock now at full size and standing out in front of him.
"No wonder your cock is so hard," Charlene said as they looked at the photos of her holding her ass wide apart to expose her rosebud and open pussy. "Those are absolutely pornographic. I love them."
Mary felt her pussy getting very wet as she looked at the photos and also her brother's huge, hard cock standing out in front of him just inches from her hand.
"We should start the fire already," Charlene suddenly said, changing tack completely. "It'll take a couple of hours to cook that leg properly."
Just like that, the mood changed. Nobody bothered to dress as they went about starting the fire and getting things ready for the evening meal, everyone acting completely normal in spite of the fact that they were all naked. Mary actually got used to the sight of John's cock swinging in front of him.
Charlene definitely knew what she was doing when it came to cooking the leg of meat and a couple of hours later they were all sitting around the fire feasting on the juicy shank and munching on the fruit that they had bought.
"Isn't this the best?" Charlene asked, a big smile on her face. "Just like tens of thousands of years ago, naked people around a fire eating the leg of some animal."
"It's really basic, isn't it?" John agreed, now able to stare at either of the girls without feeling any guilt.
They finished eating, then cleaned up any mess that they had made, going down to the river to wash before going up to sit on the large woven blanket that Charlene spread on the ground in front of the tent.
"This blanket is Tonga work," Charlene explained as they all sprawled on the blanket. "They're a tribe that's located near Nkhata Bay."
Charlene produced a joint which she lit, taking a deep drag on it before exhaling, then another before passing it to John who did the same.
"Man, this stuff is so relaxing," John said as he reclined on an elbow on his side, his cock dangling over his thigh to touch the blanket.
"Maybe I'll try it tonight," Mary said.
"You sure you want to?" John asked.
"Any reason why I shouldn't?" Mary asked.
"None at all," John replied. "I'm just making sure you're doing it for the right reasons."
"I just want to try it, see what it's like," Mary replied. "Should I just smoke it?"
"Do you smoke anything?" Charlene asked.
"No," Mary replied.
"Then smoking it directly from the joint will probably irritate your throat, burn it a bit," Charlene said. "You'd cough like crazy and probably not enjoy it so much."
"Well, is there any other way?" Mary asked, perplexed, having made up her mind to try.
"Shotgun might be a good way," Charlene replied.
"Shotgun?" Mary asked.
"It's a technique," Charlene explained, laughing.
"But let's desensitize your throat a bit first," she said, reaching for the bottle of ktang she had brought to the blanket.
"Wait, I want to get the camera," John said, springing to his feet and going for the camera with the mini-tripod still attached. "This thing has a night photo mode that's supposed to be really good. We'll test it."
Charlene tilted the bottle of ktang to her mouth and let it flow, James leaning in close and taking photos. When she passed it to Mary, he continued taking photos.
"Stick your tongue into the bottle," John suggested as Mary tilted the bottle into her mouth.
"Oh, that's great!" Charlene laughed when Mary's sharp, pointed tongue stuck into the end of the ktang bottle as she let the fiery liquor flow into her mouth.
"Ugh!" Mary said, making a face and coughing as the vile liquid went down.
John took a slug from the bottle and passed it back to Charlene. In no time they had finished half the bottle and they were all feeling it, laughing and a bit unsteady on their feet when they tried to stand up.
"I'd say you're feeling no pain," Charlene said.
"Definitely feeling no pain," Mary agreed, laughing. "Lots of tingling, though."
"Ready to try a shotgun?" Charlene asked.
"What the hell," Mary replied.
"There are two ways to do a shotgun," Charlene explained. "The first way, the smoke's still hot, but not as hot as if you were taking it directly from the joint. The second way the smoke is cooled way down before it's passed. I'll show you both ways and use John."
"Sounds good to me," John said with a smile. "Here, you can take pictures," he said, handing the camera to Mary.
Charlene knelt in front of John, her naked breasts almost grazing his chest. Lighting the joint, she reversed it, putting the lit end in her mouth and leaning forward so that the other end was right in front of John's mouth.
"Oh, wow!" Mary gasped, taking pictures as Charlene gently blew on the joint in her mouth, a stream of smoke coming out the other end which John was able to inhale.
"Wow!" John said a minute later when he exhaled. "That was incredible."
"Ready for technique number two?" Charlene asked, a big smile on her face.
"Give me a minute," John said, his head spinning from the shotgun.
Charlene smiled and smoked the joint, sitting on her knees in front of him as he sat cross-legged on the blanket.
"Okay," John said after a couple of minutes. "Go for it."
"This is my favorite way," Charlene explained. "The first way is really for homophobic guys giving shotguns to other guys."
While Mary knelt right next to them with the camera, Charlene took a big, deep hit on the joint then leaned forward and pressed her lips to John's.
"Oh, wow!" Mary gasped as Charlene slowly exhaled into John's mouth, a little smoke coming out of her nose.
Mary was taking pictures as Charlene pressed harder against John's mouth, turning the shotgun into a shotgun kiss. Her arms went around his neck and she crawled onto his lap as her tongue slipped into his mouth as she finished exhaling, finding his tongue as his arms wrapped around her, pressing her naked breasts against his chest as they kissed, Charlene's hips rocking back and forth, rubbing her naked pussy on John's rock-hard cock.
"How was that?" Charlene asked softly as she broke the kiss, not moving from John's lap, feeling his cock throbbing against her pussy.
"Definitely the best kiss ever," John replied as Charlene's tongue flicked out to touch his lips. "Decent hit, too."
"Oh, hahahahaha," Charlene laughed, her arms still around his neck, her head thrown back. "It was, wasn't it?" she agreed, leaning forward and kissing him again, hard, before releasing him and sliding off his lap, his cock now standing straight up in front of him.
"That was really something," Mary said, her eyes wide.
"It definitely was," John agreed.
"I hope you don't mind," Charlene said. "That was a shotgun, just a bit over the top."
"I didn't mind at all," John confessed.
"Me, either," Mary said. "Really. That was pretty steamy."
"Your brother is a good kisser," Charlene said, smiling at Mary.
"I've heard that before," Mary said, smiling at the shocked look on John's face. "And other things, too."
"Hey!" John said, looking pained.
"Ready for a shotgun?" Charlene asked Mary. "I promise to restrain myself a bit."
"Then, yes," Mary said, handing the camera to John. "I'm a bit nervous," she said.
"That's okay," Charlene said with a smile. "It's natural."
John took the camera as Charlene took a hit on the joint, exhaled, then took another hit, a big one. Smiling at Mary, she leaned forward and softly placed her lips against Mary's and gently began to exhale. She felt Mary's lips part and then was surprised to feel the tip of her tongue touching hers.
Continuing to softly exhale, Charlene put her hands on Mary's waist, letting them slide up until she was covering her breasts with their hard, ruby nipples. Charlene could feel Mary moan into her mouth when she found and pulled on her nipples with her fingers. She finished exhaling and slowly disengaged, Mary's tongue slipping back into her own mouth as Charlene let her hands drop to her lap.
Mary sat with her eyes closed, smoke drifting from her mouth as she slowly exhaled, coughing slightly a couple of times.
"What a nice flavor," Mary finally said softly after several minutes. "My head feels light."
"Are you okay?" Charlene asked.
"Mmm, yes," Mary replied. "I never kissed a girl before."
"Did you like it?" Charlene asked.
"Yes," Mary replied. "It's much softer than a man's kiss."
"Do you like the feeling of the ganja?" John asked.
"Mmm, yes," Mary replied, smiling wanly at her brother. "It's different than alcohol. So relaxing. Can I have some more?"
"Maybe you should drink something first, wait and see how much it affects you," John suggested. "It can keep coming on for quite a while."
"Okay," Mary agreed, accepting the beer that Charlene put in her hands.
"You want another shotgun while we're waiting?" Charlene asked John with a smile.
"Definitely," John said, his cock visibly lurching.
"Do you mind, Mary?" Charlene asked.
"No, you two are hot," Mary replied, then giggled.
"You're next," Charlene warned her, leaning over and softly kissing her.
Mary smiled as Charlene sat back and picked up the bottle of ktang.
"This is so much fun," Charlene said, taking a big slug from the bottle. "You have no idea what it means to me to have both of you here."
"We're not having a terrible time, either," John said after taking a slug from the bottle that she handed him.
"Well, it's only going to get better," Charlene said, lighting the joint and taking a big hit on it, then handing it to Mary to hold.
Holding her breath with a big smile on her face, Charlene knelt in front of John and began to softly kiss him, exhaling in the process.
"Something's in the way," she said as she tried to climb up onto his lap again, her breasts mashing into his face. "May I have the joint?" she asked, holding her hand out to Mary who handed it to her.
"Maybe this will help," she said, toking on the joint, getting it nice and hot before taking as big a hit as she could, then handing it back to Mary.
"Now," she croaked, some smoke leaking from her mouth as she tried to get onto John's lap, "let's get this out of the way," she said as she locked her lips onto John's, softly exhaling as his tongue found hers as she reached beneath herself to wrap her hand around John's rock-hard cock, smiling to herself when she felt him sharply inhale.
"That's much better," Charlene sighed after totally exhaling into John's mouth and lowering herself onto his cock.
"Oh, God!" John gasped when he felt the hot wetness of Charlene's pussy envelope his cock.
"It's about as close as we're going to get," Charlene said before locking her lips on his and kissing him as she rocked her hips back and forth, fucking herself on his cock.
"Oh, wow!" Mary gasped as Charlene pushed John over onto his back, never breaking their kiss, her ass pumping up and down as she fucked him, Mary realizing for the first time that that's what was happening.
"You've got a nice cock," Charlene gasped, nose to nose with John as she continued to fuck him.
"Your pussy feels great," John replied, reaching up to fill his hands with her big breasts.
"Bite them, hard," Charlene said as she increased the tempo of her hips slamming up and down on John's cock. "Oh! Yes!" she gasped as John took a big pale nipple into his mouth, sucking hard on it then chewing, closing his teeth on it slowly until she gasped in pain.
"I'm going to cum," John warned.
"Not yet," Charlene said, slowing her rhythm.
"Remember how much you hate the taste of ktang?" Charlene asked, turning to look at Mary as she continued a leisurely fucking of her brother.
"Yes," Mary replied, her eyes glued to John's cock as it disappeared up into Charlene's pussy.
"Well," Charlene said, picking up the bottle and taking a swig without missing a beat on John's cock, "the only thing that will take the taste of ktang from your mouth is the most delicious thing in the world."
"What?" Mary asked.
"Cum!" Charlene replied, dismounting John's cock and turning around to wrap her hand around the glistening shaft as she ran her tongue up the length of it before taking the head in her mouth and softly sucking on it, tasting herself, then his pre-cum as she darted the tip of her tongue into the slit of his cock.
"Oh, God!" John gasped as Charlene went down on him, taking every bit of his cock into her mouth and down her throat.
"Wow, you two really are hot," Mary gasped as she watched Charlene sucking her brother's cock.
"I can't, can't...oh, God!" John gasped, his balls exploding, cum shooting into Charlene's mouth.
Mary's mouth was hanging open as she leaned forward and watched as Charlene sucked John off. Every time some cum would escape the corner of her mouth, she brought a finger up to push it back in. Finally, Charlene lifted her mouth from his cock and Mary could see that cum was still oozing from the slit.
"Oh, wow!" Mary practically shouted as she watched Charlene swirling her tongue around the head of John's cock, slurping up the cum, sucking on the slit then taking all of him into her mouth.
"Oh, I needed that," Charlene sighed as she lifted her face from John's cock with a big smile. "What a nice cock," she said, still jacking him. "And no taste of ktang, only cum," she said, licking her lips as she smiled at Mary.
"You are totally hot," Mary breathed, staring at Charlene.
"Ready for another shotgun?" Charlene asked.
"Yes," Mary replied without hesitating.
"Here," Charlene said, handing Mary the bottle of ktang.
Mary laughed as she gulped down a mouthful, choking, her eyes watering. Charlene picked up the joint and lit it, puffing it up and then taking a big hit.
"Try this," Charlene croaked, leaning forward to softly kiss Mary, then to exhale when she felt her lips part.
Mary was inhaling, then she felt Charlene's tongue and they began to kiss, Mary freezing when she realized that Charlene's tongue was totally coated with cum, John's cum. Charlene finished exhaling and Mary held her breath, realizing that she no longer tasted the ktang in her mouth. The only thing she could taste was her brother's cum.
"Oh, wow!" Mary said, slowly collapsing onto her back, her arms flung wide as the ganja took its effect, along with the ktang. "I'm floating," she said as Charlene leaned over and licked her lips, then softly kissed her before slipping her tongue into her mouth for a long, sensuous, cummy kiss.
"Are you okay?" Charlene asked softly after breaking the kiss, their noses almost touching.
"Yes," Mary replied in a whisper. "I feel so good, like I'm floating."
"Do you want anything?" John asked as he rolled over to look at her.
"My whole body is tingling," Mary said, smiling up at her brother. "It's wonderful. I just want to lay here and watch the stars."
"Are you enjoying yourself?" Charlene asked when she got off of Mary and settled herself in John's lap, her legs around his waist, his cock sticking up between them, the shaft pressed up against her pussy.
"Immensely," John said, kissing her, his hands filled with her big breasts.
"Here, lay back," Charlene said, gently pushing him back until he was laying shoulder to shoulder with Mary.
Charlene knelt above their heads, her right knee on the blanket next to John's right ear, her left foot next to Mary's left ear. Mary stared open-mouthed as Charlene lowered her pussy down onto John's mouth. Even in the night light, the moon was almost full and the stars shone brightly. Mary could see Charlene's pussy lips hanging down, John's tongue delving up between them, then there was no space between John's face and Charlene's pussy as she sat on his mouth, John's tongue jammed up inside of her.
Mary moaned as she watched her brother eating Charlene's pussy, her own hands clasping her own pussy.
"What...what are you...oh! Oh! Oh!" Mary cried out as Charlene leaned over, pulling Mary over onto her side facing John, her left leg hooking over Charlene's shoulder before she felt Charlene's tongue in her pussy.
Mary began to cum immediately as Charlene expertly ate her pussy while John continued to eat hers. John could feel Mary next to him trembling, her hard, ruby nipples pressing into his side as he continued to feast on Charlene's unbelievably delicious pussy.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, my head," Mary groaned when she woke up the next morning. "Oh, my God! It really happened! It wasn't a dream!" she gasped when she looked to her right and saw Charlene on her back, her legs up over John's shoulders as he pumped his cock in and out of her pussy.
Memories of the previous evening came back to her while she watched her brother fucking Charlene right next to her. She had no memory of getting into the tent. The last thing that she remembered was Charlene eating her pussy while John ate hers.
"That's it, that's it," Charlene panted, lifting her hips to meet John as he slammed his cock into her and groaned, his head thrown back as he came, Charlene's pussy milking his cock until she had drained him of cum.
"God!" John gasped, falling over onto his back between them, his cock glistening with their combined juices as it lay across his thigh.
"Hello, sleepyhead," Charlene said when she pushed up onto her elbow and saw Mary. "Your brother has been the best," she said, leaning over to suck his gooey cock into her mouth. "He fucked me at least half a dozen times," she said after she finished sucking him clean and dry. "I was really ready."
"What happened?" Mary asked, pushing up onto her elbows.
"You passed out when I was eating your pussy," Charlene said with a laugh. "I never made anyone pass out before. That's quite a feather in my cap. And you have such a delicious pussy, so tangy."
"I see," Mary said, her face flushing.
"You're not sorry, are you?" Charlene asked, a stricken look on her face.
"No, no, just confused," Mary replied. "My head."
"That'll clear up quickly," Charlene assured her. "It's one of the quirks of ktang. I can help, though," she said, grinning and crawling over John's body, her big breasts dragging across his cock.
"Oh! Uh, I, I, uh, uh, oh, God!" Mary gasped when Charlene pushed her legs wide apart and lowered her face to stick her tongue into her pussy.
Mary began to cum immediately, arching her hips up to press her pussy against Charlene's mouth. Then Charlene swung a leg across Mary's body and hooked Mary's legs beneath her arms, pivoting her hips up so that her pussy was pointing straight up in the air. As Charlene stuck her tongue back into her pussy, Mary could only watch as Charlene's long pussy lips spread wide apart, John's cum drooling from her gaping hole down onto her chest.
"See how sexy her pussy is?" Charlene said, lifting her face and spreading Mary's delicate pussy lips apart for John to see. "And this clit of hers is hypersensitive," she explained, proving the point by flicking it with her finger and producing an immediate discharge of pussy juices.
Mary could only stare open-mouthed at her brother as he stared at her spread and open pussy.
"See?" Charlene said, pumping three fingers in and out of Mary's sopping pussy, then turning and sticking them into John's mouth before turning and gluing her mouth to Mary's pussy again.
"My God, you are crazy, amazing," Mary finally cried out, her pussy on fire from Charlene's talented tongue.
"Mmm, my favorite breakfast, a mouthful of cum followed by a mouthful of pussy," Charlene said, smacking her lips as she released Mary.
"Well, this is certainly the camping trip of camping trips," John said as he shook his head.
"God, I am covered with and full of cum," Charlene cried out, laughing, crawling out of the tent and heading for the river, Mary right behind her.
"So, how do you feel?" Charlene asked Mary as they washed in the river.
"Pretty crazy," Mary conceded.
"Did I go too far?" Charlene asked.
"No," Mary replied after a moment.
"Would you like me to do it again?" Charlene asked, a big smile on her face.
"Maybe," Mary replied, blushing.
"Well, this has been fun, but there's plenty more fun to be had," Charlene said. "Let's get packed up and head back."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Well, that was nice of Greg and Susan," James said after hanging up the phone. "The kids are having so much fun, they forgot to call. Charlene's taken them up the Rift Valley for an overnight camping trip."
"Oh, I'm so glad that they're having a good time," Harriet sighed as she sipped her morning cup of coffee, still in her house robe. "I was worried."
"Well, it would seem as if there's nothing to worry about," Greg said. "I'm sure that John is taking good care of Mary."
"Oh, hello, Chabwera, Teleza," Harriet said when they entered. "How are you this morning?"
"We are well, thank you," Chabwera replied with a smile. "You slept well?"
"Yes, though we were worried about John and Mary," Harriet replied with a smile. "We just got a call from Chipita and everything is okay."
"That's good," Teleza said. "Shall we share blessings?" she asked, sinking to her knees in front of James'.
"We would be honored," Harriet replied, turning in her seat to face Chabwera who had his ebony cock out.
James' face flushed when he felt Teleza's mouth close on his cock as she parted his house robe, remembering that just 20 minutes ago his cock had been buried deep in Harriet's pussy.
"You enjoy being Blessed," Chabwera said as he watched Harriet sucking his ebony cock, running her tongue all around the head of his cock before probing the slit with the tip of her tongue.
"Yes, I do," Harriet replied, smiling up at him, unaware that her robe had parted and that her breasts were clearly visible. "It is an honor and I enjoy the honor," she said before taking all of his cock back into her mouth once again.
"Ahh," James groaned as his balls began to empty into Teleza's talented mouth.
"Here, let me see your eyes," Chabwera said, tilting Harriet's head back until he could see her green eyes, his ebony cock in her mouth.
James watched as Chabwera wrapped his other hand around the shaft of his cock, jacking it as Harriet opened her mouth, her tongue extended. James' cock lurched when he saw a thick stream of thick cum shoot from the end of Chabwera's cock to land on Harriet's extended tongue, then more and more until her tongue was coated before sliding his cock into her mouth so that she could finish sucking him off.
"My God!" Harriet gasped when she finally sat back, gulping down Chabwera's thick cum, her robe open and her breasts visible, hard ruby nipples with some splashes of cum that had dripped from her tongue.
"There are 3 Ngoni families here in Nkopola that would like to meet you," Teleza said as Chabwera put his thick ebony cock away. "If you'd like."
"We'd love to meet them," Harriet said with a smile, realizing that her robe was open and closing it as she stood up.
"Perhaps you'd allow us to have a welcoming ceremony for you, to welcome you to the Ngoni tribe here in Nkopola," Teleza suggested.
"We don't want you to go to any trouble on our account," Harriet insisted.
"It's no trouble at all," Teleza insisted. "It will be an honor."
"We will send one of the children around 6:00 tomorrow evening to bring you," Chabwera said. "It's only a 10-minute walk down towards the lake."
"We look forward to it," Harriet said. "Now we need to get dressed and get ready for the children. School starts soon."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Hey, we haven't checked out the DVD that Chief Bwerani sent us," James reminded Harriet that evening as they were eating dinner.
"That's right," Harriet replied. "Actually, I had totally forgotten all about it."
"Me, too," James said. "I happened to see it under some stuff on my desk."
"Let's check it out after dinner," Harriet suggested.
"Holy Shit!" James exploded as the DVD played.
"I didn't see any cameras," Harriet said, her usually pale face even more so.
"He was big, wasn't he?" James asked as he watched cum pouring from the sides of Harriet's mouth as Chief Bwerani came in her mouth when he received them upon arrival.
"I was totally unprepared for that," Harriet said. "God, that man can cum!" she said as she watched herself finally sit back, her chin streaked with cum as she continued to swallow trying to clear her mouth.
"How did they do that?" Harriet asked in astonishment when the video transitioned to them in a 69 in their hut, then fucking.
"I am beyond surprise already," James replied, smiling as he watched the video.
"Oh, Lord!" Harriet gasped when the video became a shot from just below her when she was on her back on the embroidered cloth for her admission as Ngoni, her legs being held up and apart, her pussy clearly glistening with wetness, then Chief Bwerani's huge cock appearing, seemingly far too large for the tiny, girl-like pussy that he was rubbing it up and down between Harriet's delicate pussy lips.
"Oh, man, that is just too hot," James gasped when Chief Bwerani's cock started pressing into Harriet, slowly but surely completely disappearing.
The video continued, showing Harriet's pussy from just below as Chief Bwerani continued to fuck her. Then there was some whiteness showing around the shaft of Chief Bwerani's cock where it joined with Harriet's pussy. It was obvious that he was now cumming. When he slowly pulled his cock from Harriet's pussy, which now gaped lewdly open, a veritable river of cum flowed out, down over her rosebud to drip onto the embroidered cloth.
"Why did they do this?" Harriet asked in a shaky voice when the video ended.
"I have no idea," James said. "I guess we need to ask Chabwera and Teleza about it. Hopefully, we can take them at their word, that it's a memento of our initiation into the Ngoni."
"But who else is going to see it?" Harriet asked.
"Another question we'll need to ask," James replied.
"Let's watch it one more time," Harriet said.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Harriet was rushing the next morning, hurrying to get the coffee made when Chabwera and Teleza arrived.
"Oh, good morning," she greeted them, her face flushed from rushing, she and James having spent almost the entire night fucking after watching the DVD three times.
"Good morning," Teleza said, her big smile splitting her dark face.
"Good morning," Chabwera replied. "May I share a Blessing with you?"
"Chabwera, Teleza," Harriet said, turning to face them. "I'm trying to learn, understand Ngoni customs. Do Ngoni share Blessings every time they meet and part?"
"It is always offered," Teleza replied. "Even at innocuous times if one has the urge for a Blessing."
"This morning I am very much rushed," Harriet explained. "I overslept and we need to get ready and get to the schoolroom."
"There is never an obligation to accept a Blessing," Teleza said. "It is also never an insult to refuse, for whatever reason."
"Then I'm going to ask if I can please forgo the honor this morning," Harriet said, blushing. "I just don't have the time, though I will miss being Blessed."
"Like Teleza said, that is never a problem," Chabwera said.
"Are you looking forward to this evening?" Teleza asked.
"Oh, very much," Harriet replied, her face brightening. "We have no idea what to expect."
"It's nothing, just a simple celebration," Teleza assured her.
"Oh, good morning, Chabwera and Teleza," James said as he came into the kitchen.
"Good morning," they replied in unison.
"Do you have time to share a Blessing with me?" Teleza asked.
"Well," James started to reply, looking up at the clock.
Quickly, Harriet explained what she had just learned and explained that she needed to rush and get dressed, then left the room.
"I'd be happy to share a Blessing," James said, smiling as Teleza knelt in front of him and extracted his cock.
Once again, Teleza smiled to herself when she tasted Harriet all over James' cock as she sucked him, happily gulping down his cum when he finally filled her mouth.
"It's always great to start the day with a Blessing, isn't it?" Chabwera said when his wife finished sucking James off.
"It most certainly is," James agreed as he tucked his cock back into his trousers. "Now I need to get to the schoolroom."
"His Blessing tastes even better right after he's fucked his wife," Teleza said with a chuckle when he had gone. "She's a tasty one."
"You are the most Blessing-hungry woman that I've ever met," Chabwera said with a laugh.
"This one might end up showing me a thing or two," Teleza said, licking her lips.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Should we take something for their home?" Harriet asked as she settled her dress down over her thighs, a soft green material that perfectly complimented her eyes, the top cut to show her freckled upper chest, stopping just before the swell of her breasts.
"I don't see why not," James said, wearing long trousers and a short-sleeved shirt with buttons. "Whether it's their custom or not, it is ours and we want to share our ways with them so that they will know us better."
A few minutes later there was a knock on the door and a young boy with a broad smile greeted them. A short 10-minute walk later, they arrived at a single-story, bright blue home. All of the homes in the neighborhood were painted some bright color. The entire effect was mesmerizing.
"Welcome," Teleza said as she greeted them at the door. "You honor our house with your presence."
"And you honor us by having us," Harriet said, smiling, thinking for just a flash of a moment that this is the woman who is sucking my husband's cock every morning while I suck her husband's. She felt her pussy moisten at the thought.
"Our custom is to bring a gift when we visit," James said. "We hope you will accept this," he said as he offered a small, wrapped package.
"Thank you," Teleza said as she accepted the gift. "Please, come in."
Though small, the home was airy and very clean. Teleza led them through the house and out the back to a small courtyard that had several other houses abutting, enclosing it. The courtyard was approximately 30' on each size. A bright, crushed stone covered the area. In the center was a low, square, carved stone table, surrounded by carved stone benches. The entire area around the benches and the table was covered with hand-made carpets that could be seen in many shops in the market.
The table was covered with an embroidered cloth, on top of which was an assortment of dishes with various foodstuffs. Chabwera stood by the table with 6 other people.
"James Moore and Harriet Moore, Ngoni, you honor us," Teleza said when they had approached the table and the group of people. "Please meet other Ngoni; Funsani and Chaonaine, Kafele and Mpatuleni, and Kondwani and Mabuufo."
"Hello," James said, holding out his hand, which after a moment's hesitation was taken and shaken in the western manner.
"It's such a pleasure to meet you," Harriet said, kissing each of them on the cheek. We are so honored to be Ngoni and to meet other Ngoni."
"Do you enjoy ktang?" Chabwera asked, some cups in one hand, a ceramic jug in the other.
"We do," James replied. "It tastes terrible, but it does make you feel good."
"When you drink enough of it, you fall in love with the taste," Chabwera said, pouring a cup for each of them, then offering to the others.
"Ngoni!" Chabwera said when everyone had a cup, raising his into the air.
"Ngoni!" everyone responded, lifting their cups.
"That's better," someone said with a sigh after everyone had taken a mouthful, eliciting laughter.
The next hour was spent just like at any social gathering, talking about life and munching on the delicious variety of dishes available, along with generous and continuous libations of ktang.
"Would you like to do the welcoming ceremony now?" Teleza asked, smiling at Harriet.
"Oh! Yes, of course," Harriet replied. "What shall we do?"
"We'll take care of everything," Teleza said. "Just one minute."
"What's going on?" James asked, his arm across Harriet's shoulders as they watched the table being cleared. Half a dozen blankets were thrown onto the table which were then covered by the embroidered cloth.
"The welcoming ceremony," Harriet replied, a sudden feeling in the pit of her stomach when she remembered the last time she had seen an embroidered cloth.
"Please," Teleza said, holding out her hand to Harriet.
Now feeling very nervous, Harriet moved to stand next to Teleza at the table. The other three women stepped forward and began to undress Harriet, lifting her dress over her head and pulling away the tiny wisp of a panty that she was wearing. This happened so fast that Harriet had no time to do anything but gasp in shock before she was standing naked.
James watched from next to the table, aware of his cock growing in his trousers as he watched Harriet helped up onto the table on her back, her ass hanging just over the edge. She stared at him wide-eyed when her arms were stretched out to the sides, as well as her legs, spreading her pussy open.
"I welcome you," Chabwera said, stepping forward, his familiar ebony cock sticking out of his trousers.
"Oh, my!" Harriet gasped, lifting her head to watch as Chabwera first rubbed his cock up and down between her spread pussy lips until it picked up a sheen from her juices, then placed it at the entrance to her pussy and pushed it in, not stopping until he was pressed up against her.
James became aware of a low chanting, exactly like that which they had heard in the bush as Chabwera continued to fuck Harriet. He could see the sheen on his ebony cock as it became slick with the juices from Harriet's pussy. It seemed forever before Chabwera slammed his hips into her, his head thrown back and his mouth open. After a minute he stepped back, his glistening cock sliding from Harriet's pussy inch by inch until her gaping hole was visible, cum streaming from it.
Before he realized what was going on, Chabwera moved around the table and offered his gooey, cum-covered cock to Harriet's mouth while at the same time Teleza knelt before Harriet's cum-filled pussy and began to suck on it. James thought his cock would explode as he watched Harriet suck Chabwera's cock clean while Teleza ate her pussy. After a minute or so, they both stopped, moving away from the table, leaving Harriet spread-eagled on her back, totally exposed to everyone's gaze.
"I welcome you," Kafele said as he stepped forward, his ebony cock leading the way, larger than Chabwera's. Kafele appeared to be in his 30s as opposed to Chabwera's 50s.
"Oh, God!" Harriet moaned when she felt Kafele's cock filling her pussy.
Once again, Kafele fucked Harriet for a long time before finally cumming, filling her pussy before stepping away to let her suck him clean while his wife, Mpatuleni, knelt to eat her pussy clean. This was followed by Kondwani and Mabuufo, a couple in their 40s, and then Funsani and Chaonaine, a couple about the same age as Chabwera and Teleza.
"You have been welcomed," Teleza said, a big smile on her face as she leaned over a panting Harriet who lay sprawled on the table, her pussy gaping open from the fucking it had undergone.
The other women now stepped forward again, this time helping Harriet up, big smiles on their faces as they helped her dress.
"Thank you for sharing your Blessing with us," Mabuufo said, a shy smile on her face. "It was very nice."
"I have never been made to feel more welcome in my life," Harriet said shakily.
"And now James," Chabwera said, holding out his arm.
Exchanging looks with Harriet as he was led to the table, James had no idea what to expect as he was quickly undressed, his already hard cock standing out in front of him. Harriet noticed the raised eyes of the women as they saw James' white cock and smiled inside, realizing how exotic her own pale, pink pussy must have seemed to them.
Harriet covered her mouth with her hand in surprise when Teleza climbed up onto the table, squatting over James' cock and guiding it to her pussy.
James felt as though his whole body was on fire as he felt Teleza's hot, wet pussy slide down onto his cock and then commence fucking him. Teleza fucked him for a few minutes, then lifted off of his cock, leaving it sticking straight up in the air, glistening from her pussy juices. He was shocked when she crawled up his body and planted her pussy right on his mouth.
James slurped on Teleza's pussy, noting the musky flavor and thick, viscous juices, her fat pussy lips and clit, and then she was gone. One after the other, Chaonaine, Mpatuleni, and Mabuufo took turns first fucking him, then sitting on his face. He had been struggling not to cum, not sure of the protocol, so he was surprised when Teleza once again climbed up onto the table and commenced fucking him again.
They must have had a way of timing each woman's turn, because Teleza fucked him for a bit, then had him eat her pussy again, and then Chaonaine climbed onto his cock again. James was far past the point of no return and lost himself in Chaonaine's velvety pussy, exploding, cum painfully shooting from his cock up into her pussy as she ground her hips down on him, using her pussy muscles to milk his cock and get every drop of cum.
James collapsed onto the table, totally spent from the intensity of his orgasm. He was totally shocked when Chaonaine crawled up his body and planted her cum-filled pussy on his mouth.
The chanting picked up, a bit faster, a bit louder as James ate Chaonaine's pussy, building to a crescendo and then suddenly stopping, Chaonaine lifting herself off of his tongue.
"You have been welcomed," Chabwera said as the other men helped him to his feet and into his clothes.
"Well, you sure made a mess," Harriet said as she leaned up to kiss him, tasting his cum and Chaonaine's pussy on his mouth.
"I feel welcome," James said. "I've never felt more welcome."
The table was cleared and the food reappeared and everything continued as though the ceremony had not just happened. James and Harriet stayed for another hour before making their excuses and leaving.
"You know, I actually wondered why nobody offered to share blessings when we got there," Harriet said after a minute. "That should have warned me."
"Are you okay?" James asked, holding her hand as they walked.
"Have I sinned?" Harriet asked quietly. "For what I've done and for enjoying it?"
"Not in my eyes," James replied, his cock lurching in his pants as he realized that Harriet was enjoying the extracurricular sex.
"What about in God's eyes?" Harriet asked.
"I don't see any lightning," James replied in an attempt to lift her mood. "Do you feel any guilt?"
"Did it bother you at all?" Harriet asked.
"Which part?" James asked.
"The part where every man there took turns fucking me," Harriet replied.
"No," James replied softly. "If anything, it turned me on."
"Then I don't feel any guilt," Harriet replied. "If it bothered you at all, in any way, I'd feel guilty for enjoying it so much."
"That good?" James asked.
"I never stopped cumming," Harriet confessed with a sigh. "I could barely stand when it ended because I was still cumming."
"I think it's about time that you and I welcomed each other," James said as they arrived at their house, taking her hand and leading her up the stairs to their bedroom.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Welcome back!" Susan greeted them as they arrived. "Did you have a good time?"
"The best!" Mary replied, hugging her. "Charlene's the best guide we could have."
"I agree," John said, hugging Susan.
"We're going to the swimming hole for sunset," Charlene announced after they had recounted their adventure to Susan, and also Greg when he arrived. "You want to join us?"
"That sounds like a great idea," Susan said. "We haven't been in a while."
"Sure, let's go," Greg agreed.
It was only a 15-minute walk to the swimming hole and they were all ready for it when they got there. Mary hesitated until she saw that Susan undressed without a thought, as did Greg. She felt her cheeks start to flush when she caught herself checking out Greg's cock, noting that it didn't seem to be as big as her brother's.
For his part, John had to force himself not to stare at Susan. She had the same full C-cup breasts as Charlene with big, pale nipples, and like Charlene, she had long, furled pussy lips that were clearly visible, as was the big, fat clit which stuck out. The few extra pounds that had accrued only served to add a touch of voluptuousness to her. She was every bit a woman.
"Did you miss me?" Charlene asked her father, standing right in front of him.
"You know I did," Greg replied, hugging her tightly to him, his cock pressed up against her belly and her big breasts mashed against his chest.
They all lay in the river, watching as the sun made its way down to and then behind the mountains in the distance, the light turning buttery, then dusky, the shadows lengthening until any afterglow from the sunset had faded. Dressing, they made their way back to the farmhouse.
"Dinner will be ready in about an hour," Susan announced when they got back.
"I think I'll lay down until then," John said.
"That's a good idea," Mary agreed.
"We'll wake you when dinner's ready," Greg told them.
John had undressed down to his boxers and was laying on his back, flipping through the pictures on the camera, his cock rapidly growing as the pictures got better, when the door burst open and in came Charlene, followed by Mary.
"I thought you were going to lay down until dinner," Charlene said, dropping a hand onto the growing bulge in his boxers.
"Uh, I, I," John stammered his face flushing.
"Here, I'll help," Charlene said, dropping to her knees and extracting his rock-hard cock, wrapping her hand around the shaft. "It really is a nice cock. This will help you sleep," she said before leaning over and taking it into her mouth.
"Charlene!" Mary hissed, her eyes wide, looking back up the hallway. "Your parents!"
"Don't worry about them," Charlene said, smacking her lips.
"Charlene!" Mary gasped as she watched her go all the way down on John's cock.
"It's okay," Charlene told her, gasping for breath. "You're next."
"I'm next!" Mary almost shrieked as Charlene went back down on John's cock.
John didn't know what to do, but he realized that he wasn't in a position to do anything but push Charlene's mouth away from his cock and he knew that he'd never, ever do anything that stupid. Mary alternated between outrage and then curiosity as she watched Charlene sucking her brother's cock. Not for the first time she realized that he really did have a nice cock, and a big one, too.
"Mph, mph," Charlene gurgled, wrapping a hand around John's balls as he began blasting cum into her mouth.
"Mmm, so good," Charlene said, gasping for breath, then slurping at the cum that was oozing from the slit in John's cock before capturing it in her mouth, her cheeks hollowing as she tried to suck the cum from him.
"There, now maybe you can sleep," she said, licking her lips and scraping some cum from her chin into her mouth as she got to her feet. "Come on, I can't wait to eat your pussy again," she said to Mary, grabbing her by the hand and dragging her across the hall to her room as John lay back, blinking his eyes in amazement.
"Charlene, you are so...what are you doing?!" Mary cried out, then laughing as Charlene pushed her back to her bed and then onto it, pulling her shorts down and pushing her legs up towards her chest to expose her pussy. "Oh, Charlene," Mary sighed when she felt her tongue in her pussy. "I love the way you eat my pussy," she said, one hand on Charlene's head as she drank up her pussy juices.
"You've got one of the tastiest pussies I've ever tasted," Charlene declared when she finally lifted her face from Mary's pussy.
"You sure know how to eat one," Mary sighed.
"Come on, come eat mine," Charlene said, pulling on Mary's hand.
"W-what?" Mary asked, her eyes opening wide. "I-I never..."
"Feel like starting?" Charlene asked, her eyes bright. "Just do what you think would feel good if it was happening to you," she explained. "That's all I do."
"Oh, Charlene, I don't know," Mary said as Charlene lay back on her bed, kicking out of her shorts and hooking her legs beneath her arms, totally exposing her pussy.
"I promise that you'll like it," Charlene said, dipping a couple of fingers into herself and then sucking on them.
"Tell me if I do it wrong," Mary said, dropping to her knees in front of Charlene's spread pussy and really looking at it, seeing a pussy other than her own for the first time.
Mary was especially impressed with Charlene's long pussy lips, her own being so small and delicate. Her own clit was a tiny button, while Charlene's was a huge, long mound. Tentatively, Mary leaned forward and barely dragged her tongue up one of Charlene's pussy lips, tasting it, then doing it again. Then she was probing Charlene's hole, tasting the pussy juices that were building up.
"This is nice," Mary breathed, looking up at Charlene watching her, her eyes wide and bright.
"Keep going," Charlene encouraged her.
"Wow, now I know why the boys always want to eat my pussy," Mary said 10 minutes later when she lifted her pussy-smeared face from Charlene's pussy. "It's really good."
"Not just boys," Charlene said as she let her legs down and sat up, leaning over to take Mary's face in her hands. "Not just boys," she repeated, leaning forward and pulling Mary's face towards her, kissing her, their tongues finding each other, tasting herself on Mary's tongue.
"Not just boys," Mary sighed when they broke the kiss.
"Better take a nap," Charlene suggested.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * **
"Feel better?" Susan asked when John arrived for dinner after she had knocked on their doors to announce it.
"Much," John replied. "Just what the doctor ordered," he said as Charlene and Mary arrived.
"What's that?" Charlene asked as she took a seat.
"My nap," John replied.
"Good one?" Charlene asked.
"Never better," John replied.
"Any plans for tomorrow?" Greg asked.
"We've done all of the best stuff within a day's drive," Charlene said. "We could drive further."
"I like it around here," Mary said. "I wouldn't mind visiting the lookouts again, stay longer."
"I agree," John said. "Driving in this country is no fun."
"Are you going to go to the solstice market tonight?" Susan asked.
"What's that?" Mary asked.
"Each solstice there's a big market," Charlene explained. "There's music, lots of drinking and dancing. It can get pretty wild. It's 99% locals."
"Do you go?" John asked.
"Usually, yes," Charlene replied. "You want to see what it's like?"
"We're going to go," Susan said. "The mission is closed tomorrow, so we thought we'd cut loose a bit."
"Sure, let's check it out," John said.
It was an easy 20-minute walk to the market after they finished dinner, the perfect way to walk off the incredible meal. There were several hundred people there when they arrived with a bandstand on one end where a band was playing some sort of rock music. Greg and Susan told them that they'd find them later and wandered off by themselves.
They bought a bottle of ktang and a bottle of orange soda each and walked around for 15-20 minutes, seeing pretty much everything. It was mostly food and drink kiosks. Everyone was in a good mood and the energy was positive. They stopped to watch a puppeteer work, along with a couple of dozen other people, and were soon laughing along with them as the pornographic puppet show went on.
Looking up, John saw Greg and Susan down the path heading towards a largish tent.
"What's down there?" John asked Charlene, pointing.
"Oh, that's where the real fun is," Charlene replied.
"I saw your parents heading that way," John said.
"Could be," Charlene replied.
"Should we join them?" Mary asked.
"Why not?" Charlene said. "If it's not your cup of tea, we can leave."
"What's it like?" Mary asked.
"I think it'll be more fun if you find out for yourself," Charlene said with a big smile.
When they got to the tent, there was one entrance for men, another for women.
"See you later," Charlene said with a smile as she went to the women's entrance with Mary.
John walked in and found himself in a ganja-smoke-filled area with about a dozen other men, all locals except for Greg who was talking with a huge black man. Most of the men were standing facing a loosely woven cloth screen that hung down in the middle of the room, separating it from the women's side.
"John!" Greg said, a big smile on his face when he saw him. "Found the fun, did you?"
"What is this place?" John asked.
"I call it denial," Greg replied, the big black man bursting into laughter.
"Da Nile a river in Egypt," he said, bursting into laughter with Greg.
"See that screen?" Greg said. "Just stick your cock through it."
"What?" John said, silently looking at the screen, now seeing that the men facing it all had their cocks sticking through the loose weave.
"Oh, my God!" Mary gasped when they entered the women's side.
There were half a dozen women, one of whom was Susan. She was on her knees by the loosely woven silk screen that hung from the ceiling, a huge black cock sticking through the screen into her mouth. Another woman was bent over, her ass pressed against the screen, her dress hiked up over her ass. There were another half a dozen cocks sticking through the screen.
"Come on," Charlene said, taking Mary by the hand.
Mary's eyes were wide as she followed Charlene over to where Susan was kneeling, cum leaking from the corners of her mouth as the cock she was sucking pumped cum.
"Hi, Mom," Charlene said, sinking to her knees next to her. "Good one?" she asked.
"Mmm," Susan moaned as she continued gulping down the cum that filled her mouth.
"Mom, I can't believe you made such a mess," Charlene said. "Anyone would think that was the first cock you ever sucked."
"I wasn't ready," Susan said, laughing as Charlene reached over and scraped some cum from her chin, then licked her finger.
"Oh, look!" Charlene said, Mary's eyes widening as she, too, recognized John's cock sticking through the screen. "Go on, mom. You'll love it."
Mary gasped when she saw her brother's cock disappear into Susan's mouth.
"And there's another one for you," Charlene said as a white cock stuck through the screen.
"But that's your father!" Mary exclaimed, the screen doing very little to obscure the other side.
"Yes," Charlene replied. "Go on, he'll love it. So will you. He's got a nice cock, really good-tasting cum."
"You know what your father's cum tastes like?" Mary asked in surprise.
"Don't you?" Charlene asked, laughing. "Mmm, and here's one for me," she said as a thick ebony cock stuck through the screen.
"Pretty good, huh?" Greg asked John as they stood with their cocks stuck through the screen.
"Yeah, great," John replied nervously when he saw that Susan was reaching for his cock. He moaned when he felt her mouth envelope him.
"You got room for a real cock here?" the big black man said, unleashing a 12" cock that he jammed through the screen.
Mary could not believe the size of the cock that Charlene was attempting to suck. She had no idea that a cock could be that big. It seemed bigger than her arm. Apparently, Charlene's mouth felt the same way, because she suddenly stood up and turned around, dropping her shorts and backing her pussy onto the cock, slowly but surely working her pussy onto it until it was all inside of her. Then she braced her hands on the floor as the cock began to fuck her.
"Oh, man," John gasped, feeling himself arrive at the breaking point, groaning as his balls exploded and cum shot from his cock as Susan expertly sucked him off until there was no more cum.
"Oh, yeah," Greg sighed as his balls let loose, cum pumping into Mary's mouth.
"Ohhh," Charlene moaned when she felt the huge cock in her pussy swell, then begin to pulse, cum shooting deep into her pussy.
Mary had just finished sucking Greg off, wiping her mouth with the back of her hand, when the cock fucking Charlene withdrew and a stream of cum ran from her pussy onto the ground.
"Oh, that was one hell of a cock," Charlene groaned as she squatted, trying to expel as much of the cum from her pussy as possible.
"I'd think it would be too painful to enjoy," Mary said.
"Maybe that tiny pussy of yours," Charlene said with a smile, "but I make it a point to practice fucking these big black cocks. My pussy is happy with a whole range of sizes."
"Shall we find your father and John?" Susan asked. "I'm sure they're ready now."
"So, what did you think of our funhouse?" Charlene asked when they met John and Greg waiting for them.
"Definitely my kind of a place," John replied. "Mary?" he asked quizzically.
"Yes, definitely fun," Mary replied, her face flushing.
"We're going to head back," Greg said, his arm around Susan's waist. "We'll see you later."
"I'll come say good-night when we get home," Charlene promised.
"Wow!" John said, letting his breath out.
"What?" Charlene asked, smiling up at him.
"Your mother," John replied.
"What about her?" Charlene asked.
"That tent," John replied.
"Nobody knows what happens inside that tent," Charlene explained. "That's why there's a screen."
"But you can see clearly who's on the other side of the screen," Mary said.
"But we pretend that we can't," Charlene explained. "That's why it works. Everyone pretends. Nobody is upset about anything. Let's go find something to drink and sit down for a bit," she suggested.
They found a kiosk and sat at an old plastic table on old plastic chairs alternately sipping ktang and warm orange soda.
"Oh, that is so awful," Mary said.
"But now you know how to get rid of the taste," Charlene said. "It worked, didn't it?"
"Yes," Mary replied, her cheeks flushing.
"Shall we go home now or maybe back to the fun tent?" Charlene suggested as the ktang disappeared.
"I think I'm ready to go home," Mary replied. "It's been a long day."
The night was clear, the Milky Way blazing away overhead as they walked back to the house.
"I'm going to go say good-night to mom and dad," Charlene said when they arrived. "I'll be right along."
"There you are," Greg said when Charlene entered their bedroom, Susan's legs up around his waist as he plunged his cock in and out of her pussy.
"I'm glad that you're still up," Charlene said, quickly shedding her clothes and taking her father's place, her tongue sliding into her mother's wet, gooey pussy, while at the same time she felt her father's hands on her hips, quickly followed by his cock filling her pussy.
"You had a good time?" Susan asked, caressing her daughter's head as she ate her pussy.
"Yes," Charlene replied, lifting her face to smile up at her mother. "Mary's really starting to relax, letting herself go a bit," she said. "She really wants to, but she's still trying to overcome her programming," she added before lowering her face back to her mother's pussy.
"And John?" Greg asked, plunging his cock deep into his daughter's pussy.
"John's a sweetheart," Charlene replied, rotating her ass as her father continued to fuck her. "He's really relaxed, pretty open to just about anything so far. He's also gorgeous," she sighed, arching her back so that she could feel her father's cock even deeper inside of her.
"Ah, yeah," Greg groaned, burying his cock deep in Charlene's pussy as he began to cum, filling her pussy as she continued eating her mother's pussy.
Charlene milked her father's cock with her pussy until she had every last drop of his cum inside herself before rolling over onto her back, cum now leaking from her spread pussy.
"I missed this," she sighed. "I'm having a great time with John and Mary, better every day, but you're my parents. I hate having to hide even though I know that there's nothing wrong."
"We know just how you feel," Susan said, leaning over to softly kiss her daughter. "Want me to clean you up?" she asked, one hand trailing down her body until her fingers were sliding through the slimy mess between her pussy lips.
"That would be nice," Charlene replied, hooking her legs beneath her arms while her mother moved around so that she could kneel in front of her spread and open pussy.
"This is what I love the most," Susan said, sinking her tongue into Charlene's cum-filled hole. "Your delicious pussy and your father's cum all at once."
Finding both Mary and John fast asleep when she got back to her room, Charlene sighed and got into bed.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, yeah," John sighed the next morning when he was awakened by a hot, wet mouth on his cock and a pussy descending to his face, long dripping pussy lips covering his as his tongue delved into the hot, steamy pussy. He had been drinking a constant flow of sweet, thick juices as she orgasmed non-stop when he could control himself no more, his cock exploding with its first cum of the day, his balls spasming as he pumped shot after shot of cum into the eagerly sucking mouth until finally he was empty, sucked dry.
"Good morning," Susan said as she got up off of him and smiled down into his astonished face. "I hope my hospitality doesn't shock you."
"It does, completely," John replied, smiling. "But I'm a big fan of shocking hospitality. I don't mean to be crude, but your pussy tastes fantastic."
"Aren't you sweet," Susan said, smiling. "I need to go get breakfast ready," she said, turning and leaving the room stark naked.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, Charlene," Mary gasped, her hips arched and her hand entangled in her long, blonde hair as her tongue in her pussy drove her crazy. She had been cumming non-stop for the past 10 minutes. "Stop, please, stop," she gasped, collapsing onto the bed when Charlene finally relented, sitting back with a Cheshire cat's grin on her pussy-juice smeared face.
"Mmm, that's the way to start the day," Charlene said as she sat back on her heels, licking her lips.
"I'd tell you again how terrible you are if I wasn't enjoying it all so much," Mary said, laughing. "I feel so wicked in some ways."
"Isn't wicked great?" Charlene asked with a grin.
"It really is, isn't it?" Mary agreed, laughing.
"What would you like to do today?" Charlene asked as she pulled on a mid-thigh skirt, no panties.
"I don't know," Mary replied as she also put on a skirt, at first hesitating, then electing to go sans panties like Charlene. "Do you always go without panties?" she asked.
"I don't own any," Charlene replied. "They'd only get in the way."
"Oh, you are too much," Mary said, laughing. "I guess we should ask John."
"No, what do you want to do today?" Charlene asked. "Do you want to sightsee, hike, have a naughty, nasty day, what?"
"Is there any way to do all of the above at the same time?" Mary asked.
"Well, there is Kambasegera," Charlene said after some thought. "But that would be a whole day's driving just to get there. It's 700km, over the border in Tanzania. It's north of Lake Malawi, north from Kyela. It's about halfway to Masoko. There are a bunch of incredible, small round lakes in that area. They range from emerald green in color to various shades of cobalt blue, depending upon the time of the year and the rains runoff. There is some incredible hiking and you always see a variety of wild animals. I've seen big cats there several times."
"Really!" Mary replied, her eyes shining. "Would you want to go there, it being so far and you've seen it before?" she asked.
"I wouldn't mind," Charlene answered. "There's a wonderful beach at Kaporo when we get to the lake, just before the border crossing into Tanzania. We could stop there for a break before heading up to Kambasegera."
"Let's see what John says," Mary said. "I'd love to see it."
When Charlene explained their proposal at breakfast, not only John, but Susan was enthusiastic about it.
"That's one of my favorite places," Susan said wistfully. "What do you think, Greg? Could the mission manage for a few days without us? Would you mind if we joined you?" she asked.
"Gosh, no!" Mary replied. "That would be really nice. You've been so good to us."
"I think we could manage that," Greg said, nodding his head. "I'd better call James and Harriet and fill them in, though. We'll be totally out of contact the whole time."
"I'll start gathering some supplies," Susan said. "There are a couple of places to stop on the way where we can get fresh food supplies and drinks."
Everyone pitched in to help get organized and within 2 hours they were on the road. The 3 hours to Karonga were familiar, but there, after shopping to stock up, they turned north along Lake Malawi to Mwenitete, then Kaporo. At Kaporo they found a 4-wheel drive track leading down to the beautiful, white-sand beach. It must have been several kilometers in length and as far as they could see, there were no people.
"Oh, I am ready for a break," Susan sighed as they got out of the Rover and stretched.
To nobody's surprise, Charlene stripped and walked into the water, followed by Susan. By the time John and Mary stripped, Greg was already in the water.
"This water feels amazing," Mary said, rubbing her hands on her body. "My skin feels so soft."
"There's something in the water that does that," Charlene said, moving over to Mary and placing her hands over her breasts. "Feels nice, doesn't it?" she asked with a grin as she massaged her breasts, pinching and pulling on her nipples.
"Charlene!" Mary hissed, her face flushing when she saw Greg and Susan watching, smiles on their faces.
"Charlene's always had a problem keeping her hands to herself," Greg said, moving over to stand next to his daughter, his arm across her shoulders, smiling at Mary whose breasts were still in Charlene's hands.
"And he's never complained," Charlene said, dropping her hands from Mary's breasts and into the water, grabbing her father's cock with both hands. "Do you?" she asked, clearly jacking him.
"Would it do any good?" Greg asked, his cock now standing straight out in front of him as Charlene released it.
"Are you uncomfortable with our relaxed familiarity?" Susan asked as Greg put an arm around Mary's shoulders.
"N-no, not uncomfortable," Mary replied slowly, the hairs on her body standing when she felt Greg's fingers softly trailing down her back until his hand was cupping her ass cheek. "It's just very different from anything I've experienced."
"We take great pleasure in the human form," Susan said, standing behind John, one hand reaching around to caress his chest, the other reaching around and down to wrap around his cock. "We haven't found any better way to honor God."
"It may be different, but I like it," John said, reaching down and behind himself to cup Susan's ass and pull her tight against his own ass. "This is my kind of religion."
"We really should get moving," Greg said, releasing Mary, giving her ass cheek one last squeeze. "It would be nice to get there before dark. It will make everything easier."
Once they crossed the border into Tanzania, the bad Malawian road along the lakeshore became the atrocious Tanzanian road. They bounced from one rut to the next before finally arriving at Kyela where they turned away from the lake, heading up towards the hills. They finally arrived at a small, cobalt-blue lake just south of Kambasegera and set up such camp as they needed, the same small tent for all of them. They spent 30 minutes foraging in the area for suitable firewood.
"Okay, we've all behaved really well today," Greg announced, breaking out a box that turned out to be a full case of ktang and handing each of them a bottle. He also set half a dozen 2-liter bottles of orange soda on the small table that they fashioned from some rocks that they scrounged, one large one almost 2' across laying across some others to form a tabletop.
"I'm dying for a smoke," Charlene said, producing a large joint which she immediately lit.
They passed the joint, sipping ktang until the joint was finished, watching the sun slowly sink towards the distant mountain peaks.
"It's been a while since I've been here," Susan said, standing up and dropping her clothes. "We've had some great memories here," she said as she stood between Greg and Charlene, a hand on each of their shoulders, the cobalt-blue lake visible behind her.
John picked up his camera, clearly aiming at Susan, Greg, and Charlene, and took several photos. Susan then turned and walked over to the lake, sinking down into the cool water. Slowly, each of them joined her, the temperature cooler than Lake Malawi and the water feeling entirely different.
"Better see to the fire and the food," Greg suggested as the sun finally disappeared behind the distant peaks, roseate-yellow rays coruscating kaleidoscopically over the landscape and changing the color and texture of everything.
"So, what do you think?" Charlene asked as she leaned back on her elbows, her gorgeous, full breasts glinting in the waning light.
"Your breasts are fantastic," John replied, taking yet more photos as Mary choked as she laughed. "The view's not so bad, either."
"Clearly you have a discerning eye," Charlene said with a smile, reaching up and pinching and pulling on her huge, pale nipples as John continued to take photos.
They got up, moving over to sit on the blankets that Susan had spread in front of the fire, keeping the view of the lake behind the fire as they sat. They continued to smoke joints and drink ktang and orange soda as they slowly cooked their dinner, which turned out to be a couple of large rabbits and some potatoes and vegetables that cooked in the embers after being wrapped in the leaves of a plant that grew abundantly all around them.
With total darkness setting in, except for the blazing star field of the Milky Way overhead, they ate their meal in contented silence, only the crackling of the fire interrupting their galactic reverie.
Mary was sitting between Greg and John with Susan on the other side of Greg and Charlene on the other side of John. She was leaning back on her elbows, watching the fire between her knees, smiling at the way it made her fiery patch of hair even redder, brighter, when she became aware of the fact that Susan had leaned over and was sucking Greg's cock in a very leisurely manner.
Fidgeting, not sure what to do, she was literally hip to hip with both Greg and John as she watched Susan slowly sucking Greg's cock, taking all of it into her mouth each time she went down on him. Hearing John's half moan, Mary turned to find Charlene with her face in John's lap, his cock filling her mouth.
Mary felt her own pussy getting wetter and wetter as she alternated watching first Susan, then Charlene as they sucked Greg and John's cocks. Both men were leaning back on their hands. She shuddered, reaching up involuntarily to cup, then squeeze her own naked breasts, feeling the hard nipples against her palms.
"I'm sorry, we're being rude," Susan said, lifting her face from Greg's cock and turning to look at Mary, a soft smile on her face.
"No, no, you're not," Mary insisted, her cheeks flushing with color as she stared at Greg's hard cock, remembering what it had been like the previous night when she had sucked him off.
"Please, share with me," Susan insisted, leaning back, her hand wrapped around the shaft of Greg's cock slowly jacking him, a bead of pre-cum forming at the slit.
"Oh! I-I couldn't," Mary stammered, blushing.
"Of course you can," Susan said, reaching up and gently pulling on Mary's arm.
Her eyes wide with excitement, Mary allowed Susan to pull her over, licking her lips as her face got closer to Greg's cock. When Susan put Mary's hand on the shaft of Greg's cock, removing her own, Mary bent over, letting the tip of her tongue delve into the slit of Greg's cock to capture the bead of pre-cum that had formed.
Greg groaned as Mary began sucking his cock, one hand lightly resting on her head. She seemed to have no difficulty in taking all 7" of his cock into her mouth and she used one hand to gently massage his balls as she sucked on him. After several minutes, she felt Susan's hand lightly on her shoulder and she sat up licking her lips, her eyes shining.
"My turn," Susan said with a smile, swing her leg across Greg's body to sit on his lap, her legs around his waist.
As they kissed, Greg's hands filling with Susan's big breasts, Mary inhaled when she saw Susan's hand snake down between their bodies to wrap around Greg's rock-hard cock, guiding it to her pussy where it disappeared up into her.
On the other side, Charlene had done the same with John, her thigh and her mother's pressed against her own as they both rocked back and forth as they fucked. Mary could feel her own pussy flooding with juices as she began to be able to hear the sloshing of the two cocks in the pussies as they continued to fuck.
"Your turn," Susan gasped, slipping off of Greg's cock which stood straight up in the air, glistening with her pussy juices.
"My turn!" Mary gasped, staring at Greg's cock.
"It's okay," Susan assured her, gently tugging on her arm. "You do want it, don't you?" she asked.
Not saying anything, Mary allowed Greg to pull her onto his lap, her legs going around his waist. She could feel his hard cock throbbing against her spread pussy. She moaned when he filled his hands with her breasts, pinching and pulling on her nipples until she gasped, then leaning forward to suck and chew on them one by one. Mary's whole body was vibrating by the time Greg reached down between them and guided the head of his cock to her dripping hole.
"Oh, God!" Mary gasped as she felt Greg's cock sliding into her pussy. She felt his hands grab her ass cheeks and pull them apart as he began sluicing his cock in and out of her hungry pussy.
John was staring in amazement as Mary's ass rose up and down, Greg's cock disappearing into her pussy each time as Charlene continued to ride his own cock. Then Susan appeared next to them, a hand on Charlene's shoulder, and Charlene dismounted, standing up to make room for her mother, who immediately lowered herself onto John's raging cock.
Mary was gasping as she rode Greg's cock, her mouth hanging open as she seemed to cum continuously. She hadn't had any cock for weeks and Greg's felt just perfect inside of her. She was aware of Susan changing places with Charlene and turned to smile at her as she watched her lower herself onto John's cock while she continued to fuck Greg.
Mary felt Greg hold her tightly to him as he lifted her and placed her on her back, never dislodging his cock from her pussy. He was holding her ankles up and apart as he knelt between her spread thighs, his cock sliding in and out of her hot, hungry pussy.
Mary gasped when she felt Charlene kneel above her head, leaning over to massage her breasts and pinch and pull on her nipples while her father continued to fuck her. Charlene knelt over her head, leaning forward and gently rubbing Mary's clit while Greg continued fucking her.
Mary's ass was bouncing as she tried to fuck Greg back as she orgasmed, Charlene unrelenting on her clit with her fingers. Then she was shocked to the core when Charlene lowered her pussy onto her mouth. Her head began to spin as she tasted the muskiness of Charlene's pussy, her lips immediately wet. Gasping, Greg's cock still jamming her pussy, Mary stuck her tongue up into Charlene's pussy and began to taste and explore.
At some point, she became aware that John was on his back next to her, Susan on top of him riding his cock. And then Charlene was gone, standing up, leaving Mary gasping for breath as she licked her lips, tasting the sweet muskiness of her pussy.
Then Greg was pulling his cock from her pussy and crawling up her body to stick it in her mouth. Mary moaned as she tasted herself on Greg's cock as it exploded in her mouth, cum gushing from his cock as she attempted to suck and gulp it down as quickly as possible.
"That was great," Greg sighed as she finished sucking him off, bending over to kiss her, softly at first, them more intensely as she warmed to the task herself, her arms going around his neck, moaning into his mouth when she felt a mouth fasten onto her still quivering pussy.
Next to her, Susan turned around in a 69 with John, inhaling his cock as he came while Charlene continued to eat Mary's pussy. Even with Greg's cock filling her mouth, Mary could see her brother's tongue in between Susan's spread pussy lips as he ate her.
Then she was laying on her back, nobody touching her, her entire body alive and trembling as she looked up at the Milky Way blazing in its glory above her. Someone handed her a joint and she inhaled deeply, feeling the smoke saturate her body, relaxing her muscles. The joint was taken from her fingers and replaced with a bottle of ktang. Mary smiled as she realized that while cum got the taste of ktang out of her mouth, so, too, did ktang get the taste of cum out of her mouth.
"Hey, Mary," John said, moving to lie next to her on his side, his big cock flopping down onto the blanket. "You good?" he asked.
"I'm great," she said with a sigh. "I really needed that."
"Which part?" John asked with a grin.
"All of it, I think," Mary replied. "John, I liked it, eating another woman's pussy."
"I don't blame you," John said. "I love it myself."
"You like being with Susan?" she asked.
"Sure," John replied. "Almost impossible to tell the difference between her and Charlene. They both taste the same, their pussies feel the same. How about you?" he asked. "Does it feel strange to fuck a guy dad's age, suck his cock, eat his cum?"
"I didn't even think about it," Mary replied. "I was just happy to have a cock in my pussy again, taste cum shooting into my mouth. I didn't really care who was attached to the other end."
"I can't say that I'm unfamiliar with that attitude," John chuckled. "In the dark, pussy is pussy."
"John!" Mary gasped. "I never realized that you were such a pig."
"You really think a blind man cares about what a woman looks like?" John asked. "Or a blind woman cares about anything but the cock?"
"Don't you find all of this a bit strange?" Mary asked after a long pause. "I mean, having sex in front of each other, everything? Fucking Charlene's parents?"
"Totally strange," John agreed, "but my kind of strange, I do have to admit."
"Mine, too," Mary replied softly with a big sigh.
"Yours, too, what?" Charlene asked as she plopped down on her knees above Mary's head. "Did you like the taste of my pussy?" she asked, leaning over and licking Mary's lips, then softly kissing her, her tongue pushing into Mary's mouth to touch hers for a moment before withdrawing as she sat up, her hands giving Mary's breasts and nipples a good squeeze.
"It was wonderful," Mary sighed, smiling up at Charlene's smiling face, her big breasts practically hanging in her face.
"Well, it sure felt like you enjoyed it," Charlene said. "You made me cum like crazy."
"They're pretty incredible," Mary said, sitting up and looking towards the lake where she could hear Greg and Susan laughing.
"I know," Charlene said.
"Ah, your mother is an evil woman," Greg said as he came racing back from the lake, his rock-hard cock bouncing in front of him.
"Your father is turning into a lightweight," Susan said when she arrived, a big smile on her face, water from the lake glistening on her big breasts in the starlight and that of the fire.
"Is that so, dad?" Charlene asked, turning onto her hands and knees, her ass up in the air, her head resting on her hands on the ground as she smiled at her father.
"Shameless wench!" Greg laughed, kneeling behind his daughter and filling her pussy from behind with his raging cock.
Mary stared in wide-eyed and open-mouthed shock as Charlene got fucked by her father.
"You don't mind, do you?" Susan asked John, a hand on his shoulder.
"Never," John assured her, pulling her down.
"Let me drive," she said, pushing him onto his back and mounting him, sliding down on his cock.
Charlene pulled Mary over, burying her face in her pussy while her father continued to fuck her. After several long minutes, Charlene pushed up, smiling at Mary, then pulling away from her father's cock.
"Go ahead, your turn," she said, pulling Mary into a sitting position as her father moved up, filling her mouth with his glistening, gooey cock.
Mary almost moaned when she tasted Charlene's pussy all over Greg's cock as it filled her mouth. She felt her own pussy flooding with juices as she sucked on it. She was gasping for breath, tears in the corners of her eyes when Greg suddenly pulled his cock from her mouth and pushed her over onto her back, lifting her legs as he slid forward, his cock finding its way into her spread pussy.
"Oh, yes!" Mary hissed as once again she felt the wonderful feeling of a cock filling her pussy.
When Charlene squatted over her face, her dripping pussy spread open just inches from her face, Mary reached up and grabbed her by the thighs, pulling her down so that she could get her tongue up into her gooey, sopping pussy.
Mary's head was spinning as she ate Charlene's pussy while Greg continued to fuck her. Next to her she was aware of Susan still riding John's cock.
"Oh, yeah, yeah," Mary heard John grunt as he came.
And then Charlene was gone. Mary blinked, looking up to see Charlene going down on John's glistening, gooey cock just before Susan knelt on either side of her head, lowering herself until her pussy, full of John's cum, was plastered onto her mouth.
A part of Mary's brain was freaking out as she ate Susan's pussy, marveling at how right John had been in the similarities, though she had never tasted Charlene's pussy full of cum the way Susan's was. The taste was wonderful, thick, syrupy pussy juice and thick tasty cum, all mixed together. Then she felt Greg's cock in her pussy swell, then begin to pulse as he came. Susan dismounted her face and Mary blinked, squeezing Greg's cock with her pussy as he drained his balls into her.
"Such a sweet pussy to fuck," he said when he finally withdrew his cock, cum following as it ran down over her rosebud and then dripped onto the blanket.
"And delicious to eat," Charlene said, backing up her words as she glued her mouth to Mary's cum-filled quim and began to feast on the cum cocktail filling her.
"This is a great way to do camping," John sighed.
"It's the only way to do camping," Charlene corrected him.
"My God!" Mary gasped when Susan finally dismounted her face.
"That was wonderful," Susan said, bending over to kiss Mary, her tongue sliding into her mouth as the kiss deepened.
"This really is nice," Mary sighed a while later as she set her bottle of ktang down.
"What do you prefer," Charlene asked, lying next to her, "the taste of ktang or the taste of cum in your mouth?"
"Charlene, I thought you were beyond such stupid questions by now," Greg said, everyone laughing. "Is there anything that tastes better than cum to you?"
"That's beside the point," Charlene protested as everyone laughed.
"I'll take the taste of cum any day over ktang," Mary said. "I mean, I hate the taste of ktang."
"And cum?" Charlene asked.
"Well, definitely at or near the top of my list," Mary admitted with a chuckle.
She didn't know how much time passed. Every once in a while she'd find a joint between her fingers and she'd suck on it, feeling it absorb into her very being, almost melting her into the blanket and the earth that it covered. Mary awoke at some point, feeling someone on top of her as she lay sleeping on her stomach. Opening her eyes, she could see John sleeping soundly next to her.
"Oh!" Mary gasped as she felt the hard cock pressing between her thighs from behind, between her pussy lips and then into her pussy.
Looking back over her shoulder, she saw Greg smiling at her as he began to slide his cock in and out of her pussy. Mary drifted off to the sensation of his cock slipping in and out of her pussy, barely registering it when he came, filling her with cum.
"Oh, my head!" Mary groaned when she awoke the next morning to the smells of breakfast cooking over the fire.
"Hello, Sleepyhead," Charlene said as Mary opened her eyes to see her sitting atop John, rocking her hips back and forth. "I've never seen anyone that asleep. Mom's already fucked dad and you didn't even move."
"I think I had too much ktang last night," Mary said, wincing as she pushed up onto her elbows. "My God!" she gasped when she put a hand between her legs and brought it out all covered with cum.
"Dad said he couldn't resist fucking you a few times during the night," Charlene said.
Mary staggered out of the tent and down to the lake's edge, slowly entering and submerging herself, ducking her head under to wash the cobwebs away.
"Believe it or not, this will help," Susan said, squatting down in front of Mary on the edge of the lake, her long pussy lips gaping open, cum dripping from them as she reached out, offering the lit joint to Mary.
"Thanks," Mary said, taking the joint and inhaling a big hit as Susan moved down into the water, squatting as she splashed water onto her pussy to clean herself.
"This place always brings the best out of Greg," Susan said, smiling at Mary. "I hope you don't mind."
"No, no," Mary replied. "I've enjoyed this, as strange as it is. I wouldn't have done it any differently if I had the chance."
"That's nice to hear," Susan said. "I know Charlene's crazy about you, and John, and so are Greg and I. We feel like you're family now."
"Well, you've certainly made us feel as welcome as possible," Mary said with a laugh.
"I'll say," John said as he splashed into the lake to stand in front of them, his glistening cock sticking out in front of him, fresh from Charlene's pussy.
"Well, you've both made it very easy for us," Susan said, moving closer to John, her tongue flicking out to lick the head of his cock.
Mary could only watch open-mouthed as Susan slowly licked and sucked on her brother's cock right in front of her eyes. She actually gasped when Susan leaned forward, taking all of John's huge 9" of cock into her mouth, her throat bulging with it.
"Mmm, such a tasty cock," Susan sighed as she released him. "I guess I'll go start getting things packed up. It's a long drive back."
"We'll help," Mary said, her eyes on her brother's huge cock.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"God, I feel like I've been hit by a train," Mary said when she finally awoke the next day, having collapsed into bed immediately upon arrival after the grueling return trip.
Getting to her feet, she saw that Charlene's bed was empty. Going to the door, she opened it, seeing across the hall the open door to John's room and Charlene's naked back and ass as she rose up and down on John's cock, which she could see glistening each time Charlene lifted up.
"Oh, good morning," Charlene said as she reversed herself on John's cock, turning her back to him and facing his feet, seeing Mary in the doorway watching. "Sleep well?" she asked, leaning back on her hands, her feet flat on the bed next to John's knees, her long pussy lips spread wide and wrapped around the shaft of John's cock, Charlene's big fat clit seeming to throb above it.
"Yes," Mary replied as John started pistoning his cock in and out of Charlene's pussy.
"Oh, that feels good," Charlene sighed, smiling at Mary. "Lick my clit for me?" she asked.
"Now, while..." Mary started to ask.
"Mmm, yes," Charlene said. "It makes me cum like crazy when someone is licking my clit while I'm fucking."
Hesitating only momentarily, Mary crawled onto the bed to lay on her stomach between her brother's spread legs, her face only inches from Charlene's pussy where John's cock was sliding smoothly in and out.
"Yes, like that," Charlene gasped when Mary tentatively stuck out her tongue and teased her clit, all too aware of her brother's cock sliding up and down as he continued to fuck her.
Mary found the musky taste of Charlene's pussy intoxicating as she continued to lick her clit, running her tongue in circles around it, then gently sucking on it. She could feel the shaft of John's cock scraping her chin as he continued to fuck Charlene while she sucked her clit.
Getting more adventurous, Mary began to lick Charlene's long, unfurled pussy lips, her own pussy flooding with juices when she'd feel her tongue make contact with her brother's cock as she sucked on a pussy lip. John groaned and Mary saw cum seeping from around the shaft of John's cock where it met Charlene's pussy.
Not for the first time, Mary tasted her brother's cum as she ran her tongue around the junction of his cock and Charlene's pussy. After a time, John's cock fell from Charlene's pussy, leaving it gaping open, cum running from her hole. Mary hesitatingly stuck her tongue into the cummy mess, then began to more enthusiastically eat Charlene's pussy, not stopping until she was glistening pink and clean.
"Oh, that was so nice," Charlene sighed, slipping onto the bed next to John, breathing hard.
"I'll say," John agreed.
"Where are your parents?" Mary asked as she licked her lips and resisted the urge that she felt to lean forward just a few inches so that she could lick the head of her brother's cock that was now dangling between his legs, still glistening with Charlene's pussy juices.
"They had to go to the mission early," Charlene replied.
"I'm starved," John said.
"Let's get cleaned up and eat something," Charlene said. "Then we can figure out what to do with the rest of the day."
"Hey, here's a note from Susan," Mary announced from the kitchen. "Mom and dad want us to call them."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Yes, I talked to James earlier," Greg said that evening as they sat down to dinner, the day having been wasted doing nothing but lazing around the swimming pole. "They're worried that you're an imposition. Nothing I could say would disabuse him of that notion. I'm sure you'll be back, soon, but for now, they want you to come home."
"I hate to leave at all," Mary said, "though I do miss mom and dad. This time here has been wonderful."
"We've loved having you," Susan said with a smile. "And I agree with Greg, you'll be back, sooner than later."
"Maybe Charlene could come visit us for a while," Mary suggested.
"Oh, that would be wonderful!" Charlene exclaimed.
"We'll talk to James and Harriet and see what we can come up with," Greg assured her.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
As much as possible, John and Mary tried to sleep on the bus the next day to Mzuzu, having had very little sleep their last night, Greg and Susan insisting that everyone sleep in their big bed, though precious little sleep had been had.
When they arrived in Mzuzu in the early evening, they bought a couple of bottles of ktang and orange soda before looking for a hotel, determined not to repeat the mistake of their last visit. It didn't take long before they found a suitable place, though once again there was only a single double bed, the manager taking them for a couple. All things considered, neither of them were bothered by it enough to try to get a different room.
"What a day!" John sighed, opening a bottle of ktang and taking a healthy swig. "God, I'm getting used to this stuff," he laughed.
"It does make you feel good, I'll say that," Mary said, taking the bottle from him and drinking from it, immediately followed by a gulp of the orange soda.
"You hungry enough to go find some food?" John asked a while later, the bottle of ktang more than half gone.
"Maybe," Mary said, chugging on the ktang and shaking her head before trying to wash the taste away with the orange soda. "I want to take a shower, though," she said, getting a bit unsteadily to her feet.
John watched as Mary dropped her clothes to the floor right there in front of him, no longer the least bit shy. Even though he had seen everything there was to see the past few days, he found himself eyeing his sister, noting the pale, freckled skin, her rock-hard ruby nipples on her large, C-cup breasts, and the vermillion slit between her legs beneath the flaming brush of fiery red hair above her pussy. All in all, she was quite a package, all 5' of her.
"Hey, how about scrubbing my back for me," Mary called from the shower a couple of minutes later.
"Uh, sure," John agreed, hesitating for a moment before deciding to strip and join his sister in the shower.
Not turning around, Mary leaned up against the shower wall, her hands on the wall, her feet planted wide apart, her long red hair plastered wetly to her pale, freckled back. Taking the soap and a washcloth, John began to wash his sister's back.
"Oh, that feels so good," Mary sighed as John washed her back, then worked his way down to her ass.
Dropping to his knees, John marveled at how firm his sister's ass felt beneath his hands as he scrubbed her, squeezing her ass cheeks. When he worked down to her legs, Mary spread them even further apart, causing John to inhale sharply as his cock began to grow in response to seeing his sister's clam-shell of a pussy spread apart, her delicate inner pussy lips slightly parting, the interior glinting pinkly at him as he worked his way down to her feet.
"How's that?" John asked, his cock now rock-hard as he finished scrubbing her back side.
"Great," Mary sighed. "Feels incredible. Do the other side?" she asked, slowly turning around and facing him, her eyes widening a bit when she saw his huge, 9" cock standing out in front of him.
"Uh, are you sure?" John asked, his eyes level with her pussy as he looked up at her, her hard, ruby nipples pointing at him.
"Mmm, I'm sure," Mary replied, closing her eyes and sighing when she felt the washcloth on her chest, over her breasts and her super-sensitive nipples.
John's cock was throbbing in front of him as he washed his sister, working down her stomach to her legs. As he began to wash her leg, Mary lifted it and set it on John's shoulder. The washcloth fell from his hands as he washed her leg, his hands sliding all the way up until the back of his hand rubbed against her pussy which was split open.
Moving to the other leg, John began to wash it, once again his hand rubbing against Mary's pussy when he got to the top of her leg.
"How's that?" John asked weakly, staring at Mary's open pussy right in front of him.
"Almost perfect," Mary sighed, reaching down and placing a hand on his head, pulling him forward until his mouth was covering her pussy. "Oh, God!" she gasped, her pussy spasming as she immediately came when she felt his mouth on her pussy, his tongue slipping into her wetness.
John could not believe how delicious his sister's pussy was as he explored with his tongue, tracing her delicate inner lips, then softly sucking on them before plunging his tongue deep into her so that he could drink up the tangy juices that flowed from her. She began to vibrate when he sucked on her clit, her knees shaking so that she had trouble standing up, she was cumming so hard.
"God, that feels so good," Mary sighed, looking down to meet her brother's eyes, seeing his tongue stuck between her spread pussy lips. "Now it's my turn," she said, lifting her leg from her brother's shoulder to stand on her own two feet.
John's cock was throbbing in time to his heartbeat as he stood up facing his sister, his cock almost touching her stomach. He placed his hands on the wall as Mary turned him around and then he felt the washcloth on his back, moving down to his ass, then his legs.
"Now turn around," Mary instructed when she had finished with his back side.
Nervously, John turned around, his rock-hard cock sticking out in front of him. Mary began to wash his chest, leaning against him, her rock-hard nipples pressing into his stomach until she leaned back to wash his stomach, working her way down towards his legs, avoiding his cock.
John almost groaned when he felt Mary's hands on first one leg, then the other, the back of her hand rubbing against his balls when she'd get to the top of his thighs. Looking down, John's knees almost gave way as Mary cupped his balls with one hand, the other wrapping around the shaft of his cock.
"God, it is so big!" she gasped as she massaged his balls and gently stroked his cock as she washed him.
"Jesus, Mary!" John gasped as she wrapped both hands around the shaft of his cock and blatantly began to jack him. "You're going to make me cum."
"That would get rid of the taste of the ktang," Mary said, smiling up at him as her small hands worked his huge cock.
"Oh, man!" John gasped as he watched her open her mouth, her tongue extending to probe into the slit of his cock before she locked her lips around the head of his cock.
"God, it's so big!" Mary gasped after trying to take more of it into her mouth but being frustrated by the size when it hit the back of her throat.
"Mary!" John gasped, feeling himself losing control.
"Mmmph!" Mary gargled as her brother's cock exploded in her mouth, hot thick cum gushing onto her tongue and filling her mouth.
John watched as Mary tried to suck him off, gulping as she swallowed his cum, cum running from the corners of her mouth down her chin to drop onto her chest and breasts.
"Oh!" Mary finally gasped as she gulped, trying to swallow the mouthful of cum that filled her mouth.
"My God, Mary!" John said, watching wide-eyed as she continued to suck on his cock, not stopping until every drop of cum had been extracted.
"No wonder Charlene and Susan liked sucking on your cock," Mary finally said as she looked up at him, licking her lips as she continued to jack his cock with both hands. "This is totally crazy, isn't it, more than anything so far?"
"Off the scale of crazy," John agreed, watching in amazement as Mary continued to stab the pointed tip of her tongue into the slit of his cock, looking for more drops of cum. "Are you drunk?"
"Only enough to have the courage to do what I really wanted to do anyway," Mary replied, smiling up at him. "I was so jealous of Charlene and Susan."
"But...but Greg!" John said as Mary wrapped her lips around the head of his cock and sucking.
"Mmm, Greg," Mary said. "He's really nice, but his cock is nothing compared to yours."
"Maybe we should get some food," John suggested.
"Well, I've certainly had my appetizer," Mary said with a laugh as she got to her feet, not relinquishing her grip on his cock.
"Everything looks different," John commented as they wandered about Mzuzu.
"It's us who are different," Mary observed. "I feel like I'm a completely different person since the last time I was here."
"Yeah," John agreed as they found a place to order some food.
"Are you trying to get me drunk again?" Mary asked with a sly grin as she slurped on the bottle of ktang that they ordered.
"Do I need to?" John asked.
"I don't think so," Mary replied quietly. "Does that make me a terrible person?"
"Why terrible?" John asked.
"Well, I can't remember reading anywhere in the Bible where it's okay to suck my brother's cock or to have him eat my pussy," Mary replied.
"I think there'd be a whole lot more religion going around if there were," John replied with a smile.
"I'm not sorry," Mary declared. "Are you?"
"No," John replied after a long pause. "If you had asked me that before we went to Chipita, I might have had a different answer."
"Yeah, me, too," Mary agreed. "I can honestly say that I had never even thought...had you?"
"I can't say that the thought never crossed my mind," John admitted.
"Really!?" Mary gasped.
"Well, you are a hottie, you know," John said, smiling at his sister. "All of my friends have let me know in one way or the other that they wouldn't mind."
"Your friends wouldn't mind?" Mary said, her cheeks flushing.
"I wouldn't worry about it," John assured her. "We're a long way from Kansas now, Dorothy."
"Yeah," Mary agreed, sighing. "I think that that's part of it. We're in the middle of Africa. I mean, who cares? I saw the fantastic love Charlene had with Greg and Susan, and with us, and it just made me think, realize that maybe all of the rules that we've had crammed down our throats aren't necessarily right."
"There's a lot to be said for that," John agreed.
"We should go back," Mary said. "We have to catch an early bus."
Back in their room, Mary found John asleep in his underwear on one side of the bed, his back to the middle when she came out of the bathroom. Wearing only her panties, Mary slipped into bed.
John awoke in the middle of the night to the sensation of warm moistness on his cock. It took him only a few seconds to realize that Mary was sucking on his cock. She was kneeling next to him and he ran a hand up her inner thigh to her pantied pussy.
"I'm not drunk this time," she said before returning to his cock.
It took very little encouragement to get Mary to put her leg over his head, pulling her panties down in the process so that he was able to lift his face to slide his tongue into her hot, wet pussy. Once again John was treated to the tangy flavor of his sister's hot pussy while she sucked his cock. Time passed and he felt his balls going into overload.
Groaning into her pussy, John's balls spasmed and hot, thick cum shot into Mary's eagerly sucking mouth. John noticed an immediate flow of fresh pussy juice as he came and he happily slurped up Mary's cum while she sucked his from his cock.
"That was nice," Mary sighed as she snuggled up next to him after finishing sucking him off.
"That was definitely nice," John agreed, licking his lips, still tasting her tangy pussy on his mouth.
Once more in the night, John awoke to the sensation of Mary sucking his cock, plastering her pussy on his mouth as soon as she realized that he was awake. She was just finishing sucking him off when his wristwatch went off to awaken them for the final bus ride home.
"Home is going to seem so boring, I think," Mary said as the bus jounced along, her hand resting on her brother's thigh.
"I'm sure that we'll make the best of it, won't we?" John replied with a grin.
"I really liked last night," Mary said softly, resting her head on his shoulder, her hands holding his arm. "It was even better not drunk."
"I liked it no matter what," John said.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"There they are, James," Harriet said, jumping up and down when she saw John and Mary getting off the bus.
"Mom, dad!" Mary said, hugging each of them.
"You look good," James said as he shook John's hand. "Traveling obviously suits you."
"We had a great time," John replied as he hugged his mother. "The Nances are the best people. We felt totally at home with them. They treated us like family."
"Greg said pretty much the same thing," James said as they got into their car. "They were sorry that you left."
"But you'll be able to invite Charlene to come visit," Harriet said.
"John's the best traveling companion," Mary added. "I always felt totally safe."
"I'm glad to hear that," Greg said.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"James, we really do need to be more careful, especially now that the children are back," Harriet said as they got into bed. "I don't know how we'd explain things if they found out," she said as she sat on top of him.
"I'm sure we'll manage if and when we have to," James said, sighing when he felt Harriet's hand wrap around the shaft of his cock and guide it to her hot pussy.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Good morning!" Mary said when she entered the kitchen, Chabwera just turning from the table where Harriet was sitting, her hand covering her mouth.
"G-good morning," Harriet managed to stammer as she struggled to swallow the load of cum that Chabwera had just filled her mouth with. "Did you sleep well?"
"Great," Mary replied, sitting down. "It was nice to be in my own bed again."
"Well, it's nice to have you back," Harriet replied, cinching her robe when she realized that it was gaping open.
"Where's dad?" Mary asked.
"He's setting up the classroom," Harriet replied. "I need to go meet him. What are the two of you going to do today?"
"I don't know," Mary replied.
"Well, have fun," Harriet replied as she got to her feet.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"John, I just saw something strange," Mary said a few minutes later as she sat on the edge of his bed watching him dress after his shower, unconsciously licking her lips as she stared at his big cock.
"Yeah? What's that?" John asked as he pulled on his shorts and a t-shirt.
"I was in the kitchen," Mary explained. "When I entered, Chabwera was just turning away from mom. She was sitting at the table, but not facing the table, if you know what I mean. Her chair was turned about 90° from the table."
"And that's strange?" John asked.
"Well, what was strange was the fact that her robe was hanging open," Mary said. "I mean, I could see everything. There's no way Chabwera couldn't see, too."
"I still don't see what's so strange about it," John said. "So her robe was open? Did she realize it?"
"Yes," Mary replied slowly. "When I sat down, she realized it and closed it."
"I wouldn't worry about it," John said.
"I can't relax here," Mary said. "I'm worried about mom or dad catching us. Or Chabwera or Teleza. They're always around and you never know when they're going to show up."
"There's nothing to catch, is there?" John asked, smiling at his sister.
"Well, you know what I mean," Mary said, blushing slightly. "I got used to just doing whatever I want, whenever I want."
"I'm sure you'll figure it out," John said. "Why don't we go down to the lake today, have a swim."
"That sounds like a good idea," Mary agreed.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"James, Mary almost caught me with Chabwera's cock in my mouth this morning," Harriet said to James during a break in the classroom.
"Almost?" James asked.
"She walked into the kitchen just as Chabwera finished...Blessing me," Harriet explained.
"Did you have his cock in your mouth?" James asked, feeling his own cock stir at the thought and the picture it brought to his mind.
"No," Harriet replied, blushing slightly, "but I did have a mouthful of his cum. I managed to swallow it, but my robe was open. I'm sure she noticed that."
"Well, I wouldn't worry about it," James said. "If she didn't see anything, why would she even think that you might be sucking Chabwera's cock?"
"I didn't listen to myself about needing to be more careful," Harriet sighed.
"Luckily, they almost never come to the classroom," James said.
"Was Teleza here?" Harriet asked.
"Yes," James replied, smiling. "She actually told me that she liked the taste of my cock when it's just been in you."
"Well, it does taste even better that way," Harriet said, a twinkle in her eyes as the children took their seats after their break ended.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I miss Chipita already," Mary sighed as she and John arrived at the lake on their bicycles. "Having Charlene around really adds a lot of flavor to life."
"I'll say," John agreed, "in more ways than one."
"You miss her?" Mary asked as they surveyed the lakefront beach, seeing only a few people and those distant.
"Sure, and Susan," John replied. "Don't you?"
"Yes, definitely," Mary agreed. "And Greg."
"Let's go swimming," John suggested, stripping down to his birthday suit. "You coming?" he asked, turning and running towards the lake, diving in when he got to the edge.
Mary didn't hesitate after quickly glancing up and down the shore to check for other people, stripping and running naked into the lake, laughing as she threw herself into her brother's arms, her rock-hard ruby nipples pressing into his chest.
"Mmm, this is what I like," Mary sighed, reaching down between them to wrap a hand around John's rapidly growing cock. "I wanted to suck it so bad last night and then when I woke up this morning," Mary sighed as she slowly jacked her brother's huge cock.
"Well, I wouldn't have complained or done anything to discourage you," John sighed as he felt his sister's small hand on his cock. "The past week has been sexual heaven for me and I've sort of gotten used to it."
"But you've always had girls around you like flies," Mary said, jumping up so that she could wrap her legs around her brother's waist, one hand on the back of his neck while the other pulled his cock up between them.
"But I've never had sex on call before," John said, gasping when he felt Mary rubbing her naked pussy on the shaft of his cock, both hands around his neck now.
"Other than one weekend with Jason, neither have I until this past week," Mary said, grinding her pussy on the shaft of her brother's cock.
"And you liked it," John said, his cock so hard he felt it would break.
"Yeah, it was pretty great," Mary agreed, smiling at the look of suffering on his face as she continued to rub her pussy up and down on the shaft of his cock. "I never knew who would want me or for what. How would you like to be my sex on call?" she asked, reaching down between their bodies to wrap her hand around the shaft of his impossibly hard, 9" cock.
"What do you...Mary! Are you sure about this?" John asked as he felt her guide the head of his cock to the entrance to her pussy.
"Yes," Mary replied with a sigh as she felt the head of his cock ensconced in her pussy. "Wouldn't you like to be my sex toy?" she asked, releasing him and laying back on the surface of the lake, her legs around his waist, her arms out to the sides, the head of his cock stuck in her pussy.
Looking down, John could see through the clear water of the lake his cock sticking into his sister's pussy, her delicate pussy lips spread wide, the button of her clit just rubbing on the shaft of his cock.
"Slowly, slowly," Mary gasped when her brother gripped her by the waist and began to work his cock into her. "I've never had anything near that size in me before."
Slowly but surely, John worked his cock into his sister's tight pussy, Mary helping with her feet on the small of his back, pulling herself onto him until finally he was pressed up against her, all 9" of his rock-hard cock throbbing deep inside of her pussy.
"No wonder Charlene and Susan loved your cock so much," Mary gasped. "It's great to suck, but this! Oh, God, yes," she said, trying to squeeze him with her pussy muscles as he slowly began to fuck her, holding her by the waist as he slowly worked his cock in and out of her, seeing her tiny, delicate pussy lips clinging to the shaft of his cock as he'd pull back, until finally he felt her pussy get really wet and open to him.
John took his time, gently fucking his sister as they stood in the waist-deep water of the lake near the shore. Mary was aphonic as John relentlessly slid his cock in and out of her tight pussy, relishing the sensation of a pussy that gripped him so tightly.
"I'm going to cum," John finally announced to a gasping Mary.
"Yes, do it, cum in me," she gasped, feeling him swell even larger inside of her. "Oh, wow," she moaned when she felt his cock pulsing deep inside of her pussy as John pumped cum, emptying his balls into her.
"God, what a fuck!" Mary said when John finally finished cumming in her and slid her off of his cock to stand on her own feet once again.
"I'll say," John agreed, staring at her, almost a foot and a half shorter, childlike next to him. "You have one hell of a tight pussy."
"I should hope so," Mary replied with a laugh. "I've never had anything near that size in me before."
"Did it hurt?" John asked.
"Only in a good way," Mary replied. "Let's go sit down," she suggested, turning to go back to the shore.
"Mary, I..." John started to say.
"You're not finished yet," Mary said, pulling him down to the sand and straddling his chest, her rock-hard ruby nipples dripping water onto him.
"What did you have in mind?" John asked, then smiled when he saw Mary scoot up his body to plant her pussy right on his mouth.
"I cannot believe how you make me cum," Mary said a while later after she had fallen over onto her side, her whole body still quivering from the many orgasms that she had had.
"I can't get over how tasty your pussy is," John said as he licked his lips.
"Well, you give me access to your cock, you can have access to my pussy," Mary said, laughing. "Did you hear that? How crazy are we?"
"Pretty fucking crazy," John replied.
"I'll say," Mary said with a laugh, rolling over so that she could grab his cock, "with emphasis on the fucking. But I don't care," she said as she opened her mouth and began to suck on his cock.
"Wow, what has gotten into you?" John asked, gasping after his sister had sucked him off completely.
"Well, facetiously, you," Mary replied as she swallowed, trying to clear her mouth of his cum. "But I think it was Charlene. There was such an innocent purity in the way she lived. Freedom. There was no shame. The only thing that mattered was feeling good and not making anyone else feel bad in the process. I guess it's helped me to do some things that I've always wanted to do deep down inside, but was afraid to even think about because of the degree to which I had accepted the programming we had gotten growing up."
"School, university really helped," Mary continued, darting her tongue into the slit of her brother's cock to see if any cum had seeped through. "We weren't living at home, nobody to tell us yes or no on a per-event basis. I loved being able to just stay out all night if I felt like it, or having sex in the middle of the living room in the middle of the afternoon. But now..."
"Yeah, this is way over the line," John said. "Now we're into a totally different world, different rules, or lack thereof, I should say."
"We cannot let mom or dad find out," Mary said emphatically. "They'd die. I'd die, with shame for them, not for me."
"Well, I'm sure not going to tell them," John said.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"It is nice to have your children home?" Teleza asked as she served tea to James and Harriet.
"Yes, very," Harriet replied.
"Chabwera told me about Mary almost catching you receiving a Blessing," Teleza said.
"Yes," Harriet replied, blanching and then flushing.
"You would not want her to see this?" Teleza asked.
"I don't think it would be a good idea," Harriet replied. "It would be an uncomfortable conversation, for both of us."
"I understand," Teleza said. "Nobody wants to cause a problem. You enjoy the Blessing?"
"It is an honor," Harriet replied, flushing.
"You do not enjoy the Blessing?" Teleza asked.
"I do enjoy the Blessing," Harriet replied after a pause.
"As do I," James added. "It's a wonderful way of sharing, strengthening the bonds of friendship and community."
"Yes, that's right," Teleza said, nodding her head in agreement. "And there is no problem between you because of the Blessing?"
"No, none," James replied.
"Chabwera likes to watch me receive the Blessing," Teleza said.
"I am the same," James said.
"We have a suggestion for you," Teleza said after a long pause. "It will help you to continue strengthening the bonds of the Ngoni and also to meet and know other people, not necessarily Ngoni, so that you can spread your message."
"We'd love to hear your suggestion," James said, leaning forward.
"We think that as long as you are seen to keep to yourselves, not with the people except for your classroom, that people will be hesitant to listen to your message of Christ," Teleza explained. "If they saw you as more a part of the community, not just peripheral to it, they'd see your message as coming from one of the community, not an outsider."
"That makes sense," Harriet said. "We'd hoped to get our foot in the door with the school and see how we could grow from there."
"And already there is talk about your school," Teleza said, "after just a few weeks. The children like their classes and look forward to their lessons."
"That's wonderful to hear, Teleza," Harriet said, a big smile on her face.
"How would you have us improve the perception of being a part of the community, not outsiders?" James asked.
"Well, we Ngoni would help," Teleza replied. "If you were to visit a different family each evening, get to know the people in their homes, we think that would help. The Ngoni would always make it a point to invite one or two other couples to make the evening more social, non-Ngoni friends. Eventually, we have no doubt that all of the people that you meet in this way will also want the honor of having you as guests in their homes. After you have visited a family several times, you will have the opportunity to explain your message of Christ as they get to know and trust you."
"That's an excellent idea, Teleza," James said. "But wouldn't it be an imposition on these people to have us as guests?"
"Honoring guests is never an imposition," Teleza said. "Besides, you'd probably only visit any given family a few times a year, especially as your circle of contacts grows. People will hear about you and in a short time, everyone will know why you are here. Then it's just a matter of observing the forms."
"I think it sounds like a wonderful idea," Harriet said. "I think we should at least try and see how it goes. What a great way to get to meet new people in a relaxed, social setting."
"Do you think you could arrange things to get us started?" James asked Teleza.
"It's not a problem," Teleza said, waving her hand. "Would you be more comfortable the first time meeting a couple of new families at our house? After that, you can decide how you want to do things."
"I think that's a good idea," Harriet said. "When would we start?"
"I'm sure I can arrange something for tomorrow," Teleza replied. "Is 8:00 convenient for you? Will it give you enough time to comfortably have dinner with your family?"
"Oh, we're usually long finished eating by 8:00," James replied. "That should work just fine."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Hi mom, dad," Mary said as she and John arrived.
"How was your day?" Harriet asked as she got up and hugged and kissed each of them.
"Nice," John replied as he shook his father's hand. "Totally relaxing."
"We spent the day by the lake, just lazing around and swimming," Mary explained. "It's something we learned in Chipita. They spend as much time as possible in nature, just enjoying it, hanging out."
"Do you think it would be possible for us to acquire one of those 3-wheeled motorbikes that we see around town?" John asked.
"Why would you want one?" Harriet asked.
"We want to explore the area more," Mary explained. "Charlene said that they sometimes drive for 2-3 days to get to a nice place to see."
"You want to go driving around in the bush on a scooter for 2-3 days?" Harriet asked, her eyes wide.
"Not necessarily," John said. "But it would be nice to have the ability to take some gear with us for camping. We're really limited on the bicycles."
"I suppose it would be okay," James said. "But you'd have to promise to be careful."
"Of course," John said. "There's no way I'd ever do anything that would risk Mary. It's just a powered bicycle. We're not in a hurry. You see more when you go slow. Besides, the roads are terrible, so you can't go fast."
"As long as you promise," Harriet said.
"We promise," Mary said, reaching over to put a reassuring hand over her mother's. "If we're going to be here, we might as well see as much as we can and learn as much about it as possible."
"Well, I can't fault your attitude," James said. "Once we get things running and get some staff to help, we want to explore a bit, too. But right now it's just about impossible to get away for more than a weekend."
"We'll look around town tomorrow, talk to some people and see what we can learn," John said. "I'm sure someone will be able to point us in the right direction."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"God, I was just dying to come fuck you," Mary said the next morning on their way into town to look for a motorcycle with a sidecar.
"We can't take the chance," John said, "not if anyone's in the house."
"Let's find a ktang shop," Mary suggested. "I'll bet if we sit and drink ktang and eat some food, someone will want to talk to us."
Mary's instinct was spot on, for within 10 minutes of sitting down, a young man approximately their own age with a big smile on his face approached their table.
"You like ktang?" he asked.
"Yes," John replied. "It's good stuff," he said, taking a swig from the bottle, then offering it to the young man, whose eyes opened in surprise before reaching to accept the bottle.
"Thank you," he said after taking a swallow and handing the bottle back. "You are the new mission family, right?" he asked.
"Yes, that's right," Mary replied. "Please, sit with us," she said, indicating an empty chair.
"My name is Kafele," he said as he sat. "That means 'worth dying for' in Ngoni."
"I'm John, this is Mary," John replied.
They engaged in the usual talk of strangers meeting, learning about where each had come from and what their plans were.
"I know someone with a motorcycle like you describe who might be interested in selling his," Kafele said when he heard about their quest. "He just finished fixing it and putting new filters and tires. Now he has no money to live so he needs to sell it."
"How much do these motorcycles sell for?" John asked.
"Can be as much as $150," Kafele replied.
"We'd be interested in seeing it," John said. "Can you help us?"
"Come, we go see if he is home," Kafele said, getting to his feet. "He lives just a few minutes from here."
Putting the unfinished bottle of ktang in his back pocket, John followed Kafele, Mary in between them as he led them through the narrow alleyways and warrens of Nkopola. It was all new to them, as they hadn't really strayed from the main thoroughfares. In just a few minutes they arrived at one of the ubiquitous tin-roofed dwelling places.
"Chewba, Chewba, you home?" Kafele called out.
"Kafele," a man said as he exited the dwelling. "What is this?" he asked as he eyed John and Mary.
"You want to sell your motorcycle?" Kafele asked. "They looking for one."
"Good motorcycle," Chewba said. "Expensive."
"I told them how much to pay already," Kafele said, Chewba's face falling in dismay as a big payday slipped from his grasp. "They from the new mission family. They live here. You treat them right, hear?"
"Yeah, yeah," Chewba said, nodding his head. "Come, look first."
The motorcycle he led them to was black, dented here and there, but the seat was unbroken and the tires were obviously new.
"Any problems that need to be taken care of?" John asked as he examined it, noting that there was no rust and that the sidecar seemed to be very firmly attached to the main frame.
"No, no, I just fixed everything," Chewba said. "No oil leaks. New brakes. If you have a problem, come to me. I will fix it. No problem."
"How much do you want for it?" John asked.
"First we talk, then we see about money," Chewba said. "You drink ktang?" he asked, a surprised look on his face when he noticed the bottle in John's back pocket.
"Yeah, good stuff," John said, a smile on his face.
"Come, we drink ktang, talk, then we see," Chewba said, turning to lead them into his home.
There was enough light coming in through the gaps in the walls and the open door for them to see, the light dusk-like.
"Sit, sit," Chewba said, indicating pillows on the floor around a low table, one already occupied by an older woman, another by a younger girl. "My mother, my sister," he explained as he sat down between them.
John brought out his bottle of ktang and offered it to Chewba who took a big gulp on it before handing it to Kafele who then handed it back to John. After taking a swig, John offered the bottle towards Chewba's mother who smiled and took the bottle, taking a small swallow from it before handing it to her daughter.
"Thank you," the girl said, smiling at the surprise on their faces as she handed the near-empty bottle to Mary who finished it off.
Chewba produced another bottle and it was passed around and around as they conversed. At one point a bowl of dried fruits and nuts was produced.
"Whew, I'm feeling it," Mary said as she passed the bottle along.
"Me, too," John said. "I think that's the idea."
"You ever have sex with a black man?" Chewba asked out of the blue.
"N-no," Mary stammered in reply.
"Why not?" Chewba asked.
"Well, I've never had the opportunity, I guess," Mary replied.
"You ever have sex with a black woman?" Chewba asked John.
"No, not yet," John replied.
"Not yet!" Chewba exclaimed, laughing. "You hoping to?"
"Of course," John replied, at which Chewba's mother and sister started laughing.
"And are you hoping to have the opportunity to have sex with a black man?" Chewba asked Mary softly.
"Well, I, uh, I, well, maybe, yes," Mary stammered, blushing.
"So, you want the scooter?" Chewba asked.
"If the price is right and it runs okay, yes," John replied.
"It runs okay," Chewba said, waving his hand. "No worry."
"And the price?" John asked.
"$100," Chewba said, eliciting a gasp from Kafele. "Plus, you will have sex with me and you will have sex with my sister."
"We what?" John asked, his eyes wide in astonishment.
"You don't want to have sex with my sister?" Chewba asked, pulling the girl forward. She appeared to be a few years younger, lithe with smaller breasts. Her eyes were dancing with excitement. "She is very beautiful, very skilled."
"She is very beautiful," John said, having only now thoroughly appraised the girl. "What would the price be without the sex?"
"There is no price without the sex," Chewba replied, "because I'm certain that the sex will be priceless."
"Maybe we can find a motorcycle somewhere else," John suggested.
"Maybe," Chewba conceded. "Maybe."
"John," Mary said, taking his elbow and shaking it to get his attention.
"Don't worry, I'm not going to accept that kind of a deal," John assured her, patting her hand.
"It's okay," Mary replied. "Take the deal."
"What?!" John exclaimed, staring at her.
"Just think of the story we'll have to tell Charlene," Mary said, laughing.
"You're serious?" John asked, looking from his sister to Chewba, then to Chewba's sister, then back to Mary.
"Yes!" Mary replied. "It's so outrageously nasty, I just can't resist. Do you mind?"
"No, no," John replied. "I'm just totally blown away."
"Well, speaking of blowing away..." Mary said with a nervous grin.
"We agree to your deal," John said after he turned back to Chewba.
"Ah, good, good," Chewba said, nodding as he moved over next to Mary. "You are curious about black cock?" he asked, unzipping his pants and pulling his cock out.
"Yes," Mary replied, reaching to wrap her hand around the ebony shaft. "It's such a beautiful color."
"You are not afraid?" he asked.
"No," Mary replied as she jacked his cock which rapidly grew to its full size, just a bit less than John's.
"You will show me your body?" Chewba asked.
In answer, Mary pulled her t-shirt off over her head to release her naked breasts which she cupped in her hands, her fingers finding her rock-hard, ruby nipples.
"Do you like them?" she asked as she pulled on her nipples.
"They are very beautiful," Chewba replied, reaching up to replace her hands with his own. "And so soft," he said as he massaged her breasts.
"Undress!" Chewba snapped at his sister who immediately complied, pulling her simple shift off over her head to show that she was naked underneath, her dark nipples hard berries on the tips of her smaller breasts. "You like?" he asked John.
"Yes, very much," John replied, smiling as the young girl came up to him and took his hands, placing them on her breasts.
"And the rest?" Chewba said to Mary, who pulled her shorts off as he pulled his clothes off.
John looked down when he felt the air on his cock to see that Chewba's sister had extracted it from his shorts and was massaging it with both hands.
"I never knew that white cocks were so big," she said as it quickly grew to its full size. "You're bigger than Chewba."
Looking over at Chewba, John's eyes widened when he saw that Mary had leaned over and was running her pink tongue around the ebony head of Chewba's cock which she had both hands wrapped around. Glancing up and seeing John watching her, Mary smiled, the tip of her tongue stuck in the slit of Chewba's cock, then let her lips slip down to close around the head of Chewba's cock.
John groaned at the same time, looking down to see his cock disappearing into the mouth of Chewba's sister. He was amazed that she never stopped until it had entirely disappeared into her mouth. Clearly, sucking big cocks wasn't new to her.
Looking over at Mary, John saw that his sister was bobbing up and down on Chewba's ebony rod, fucking him with her mouth while Chewba's sister did the same to him, their mother still sitting and watching, a smile on her face.
"You do that good," Chewba said, a hand on Mary's fiery red hair as she continued to suck his cock.
"I like it," Mary said, looking up as she gasped for breath.
"Let me see yours," Chewba said.
John looked over as Mary sat back and hooked her elbows behind her knees, drawing them up to her chest and spreading her pussy open.
"So white, so pink!" Chewba's sister said as she, too, stared at Mary's spread pussy.
"Looks like a little girl's," Chewba commented. "I don't think it's big enough for this," he said, stroking his 9" of ebony cock in his hand. "I don't want to hurt you."
"It won't hurt," Mary assured him, using the fingers of one hand to spread her delicate little pussy lips apart to reveal the glistening wetness of her hole.
Everyone watched as Chewba placed the head of his ebony cock at the entrance to Mary's pussy. John realized that he was holding his breath as he watched inch by inch, Chewba's cock disappearing into Mary's pussy until finally he was pressed up against her, his entire cock buried deep in her pussy.
"Feels good, tight," Chewba grunted as she began to fuck Mary.
"Me, too," Chewba's sister said, tugging on John as she lay back and spread her legs to reveal a dark ebony pussy, long from top to bottom, whose deep vermillion interior was glistening invitingly as she spread her pussy lips open for him.
John could hear Chewba's cock sloshing in and out of Mary's pussy as he began to feed his into Chewba's sister, surprised at how easily he was able to slide in. Now the only sounds were those of cocks plunging in and out of wet pussies.
"Oh, God!" John heard Mary gasp, and looking over saw that white cum was seeping from around the shaft of Chewba's ebony cock as he came inside of Mary's pussy.
The sight of ebony cock, white cum, pale skin, and pink pussy were too much for John and his own balls exploded, cum splashing into Chewba's sister's as her talented pussy milked his cock. When he finished cumming, he looked over just as Chewba was withdrawing his cock from Mary's pussy, which now gaped open as cum ran from her hole.
To his surprise, Chewba's sister squirmed out from beneath him and crawled over to Mary, smiling at her as she sank her tongue into her cum-filled pussy and began to slurp up the cum cocktail that flowed from her, the whole while John's cum was running from her own pussy and down her inner thighs.
"My God, that was amazing," Mary breathed when Chewba's sister finally stopped eating her pussy and sat up licking her lips, a smile on her face.
"I never tasted a white pussy before," she told Mary. "It's different but good. I like it."
"Well, you certainly made me feel better," Mary replied as she finally let her legs down. "Both of you."
"I like fucking your pussy," Chewba said.
"It felt good," Mary said.
"You want to fuck again?" Chewba asked, a big smile on his face.
"Maybe some other time," Mary replied, smiling, her eyes noticing her brother's cock glistening with Chewba's sister's pussy juices.
"Maybe you let Kafele fuck you next time," Chewba suggested. "I have other friends, too. They would enjoy fucking you."
"That's very nice of you to say," Mary replied, blushing as images of ebony-skinned men fucking her, one after the other, ran through her mind.
"You come any time," Chewba assured her. "Always okay. Always ready for good fucking."
"Then I'm sure I will come again," Mary replied with a smile.
"And you," Chewba said, looking up at John after once again staring at his cock. "Maybe next time you fuck momma. She likes cock. Many girls here would like to fuck a big white cock like yours."
"That sounds like a good idea," John replied, grinning at Mary. "I'm sure we'll visit you again. This is a fun house."
"Always good time," Chewba said.
"Well, we'd better get going," John said. "Can you follow us on the motorcycle? I can pay you at the house and then I'll give you a ride back."
"Okay, okay," Chewba agreed, smiling as he looked for his pants.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"That wasn't exactly the motorcycle buying experience that I had expected," John said later that night after dinner to Mary as they talked in his room, the first chance they had had to talk privately.
"No kidding," Mary said with a laugh. "But what a great adventure. I've been dying to talk with you about it."
"You liked it all, didn't you?" John asked.
"Yes," Mary replied with a big smile. "I've never felt so nasty in my life and it turned me on. My pussy has been so wet ever since. I mean, his cock was so black. The way it looked moving in and out of my pussy. Mmm, the way it felt and tasted. Was she also good?"
"Yeah," John replied, shocked by Mary's total brazenness. "Definitely not her first time."
"Mom and dad will be gone for at least a couple of hours," Mary said.
"What's your point?" John asked.
"Chabwera and Teleza have also gone for the day," Mary replied, smiling at him."
"I see," John said, a grin growing on his face.
"I'll show you some more," Mary said, pulling her t-shirt up over her head to reveal her freckled breasts, her dark, ruby nipples rock hard.
"You are amazing," John said with a laugh an hour or so later. "It's like someone let the genie out of the bottle."
"That's what it feels like, too," Mary replied as she withdrew her fingers from her pussy covered in her brother's cum and stuck them into her mouth to suck on.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Hello," Teleza said when James and Harriet arrived at their house. "Thank you for honoring us with a visit."
"It is our pleasure," James said as they entered.
"James and Harriet, please meet our friends, Mbemi and Rtari," Chabwera said when they entered, introducing a younger couple, Mbemi a rail-thin man, and Rtari, as round as she was tall.
They turned out to be a delightful couple with great senses of humor. Mbemi was an officer in the local bank while Rtari was a schoolteacher. The next hour passed pleasantly as they got to know one another, nibbling on some dried fruits and nuts and sipping the inevitable ktang around the center table in the outside courtyard.
"Shall we make a Ceremony of Friendship?" Teleza asked.
"Ceremony of Friendship?" Harriet asked, blinking. "Well, yes, of course."
"I think you will enjoy it," Teleza said with a big smile. "It starts with everyone taking their clothes off."
"Oh!" Harriet exclaimed, her eyes wide.
"Do you object?" Chabwera asked.
"N-no," Harriet replied, her cheeks flushing with a bit of color. "I just wasn't expecting..."
Harriet exchanged looks with James before she began to undress. Teleza and Chabwera covered the table with several large carpets, much like the previous time they had been there.
"Come, we will start the ceremony," Mbemi said shyly, offering a hand to Harriet who took it after a momentary hesitation.
Harriet felt her face flush with color as she felt her pussy juices running down her inner thighs as she realized that she was excited about whatever it was that was about to happen. Mbemi helped her up onto the table onto her back. As everyone gathered around, he lifted her legs onto his shoulders as he knelt facing her, his long, thin cock actually resting on the fiery patch of hair above her open pussy.
"I offer Friendship," Mbemi said.
"Ahhhh," Harriet sighed when she felt Mbemi's cock sliding into her pussy.
James' cock was standing out in front of him rock hard as he watched Mbemi fucking his wife. You could almost make out the ebony shaft of Mbemi's cock through the nearly translucent petals of Harriet's pussy lips as it gripped the shaft of his cock while moving in and out of her pussy. James looked away from Mbemi's cock sliding in and out of Harriet's pussy to look up at her face and realized that she was looking at him. He smiled a crooked smile and saw her cheeks flush just before his eyes moved back down to watch Mbemi's ebony cock pumping in and out of her.
"It is time for the Blessing," Mbemi gasped, pulling his cock from Harriet's pussy and letting her legs down as he scrambled up her body to lay the head of his cock on her outstretched tongue as she pushed up onto her elbows.
James felt his own cock lurch when he saw the first thick stream of cum shoot from the end of Mbemi's cock onto Harriet's extended tongue and into her mouth. After several more shots, Harriet closed her lips on Mbemi's cock and James saw her throat bob as she swallowed, followed by the outline of Mbemi's cock as Harriet took every bit of it into her mouth, milking it with her throat and mouth to extract every drop of cum possible.
"Uh, thank you," Harriet croaked when Mbemi withdrew his cock from her mouth, scraping some cum that had escaped and dribbled down her chin into her mouth, "for your Blessing."
"You are a pleasure to Bless," Mbemi said, climbing down off the table to receive an enthusiastic hug and kiss from his wife.
"I offer Friendship," Chabwera said as he climbed up onto the table, smiling when he saw the look on Harriet's face go from surprise to a smile, her eyes brightening.
"And I welcome your Friendship," Harriet said as Chabwera lifted her legs onto his shoulders and filled her pussy with his cock.
Harriet turned to see James' eyes glued to where Chabwera's cock was sliding in and out of her pussy, smiling when his gaze traveled up to her face, his eyes glazed as he licked his lips, then smiled wanly at her, glancing down at his own cock which was bobbing in time to his heartbeat.
Harriet was licking her lips when Chabwera finally pulled his cock from her pussy to crawl up to her face, actually moaning when she felt his cock resting on her tongue and cum splashing into her mouth before she locked her lips on him and finished sucking him off.
"Thank you for your Blessing," Harriet said, a thickly cum-covered tongue licking her lips after Chabwera withdrew his cock from her mouth.
"It is always a pleasure to Bless you," Chabwera replied, climbing down from the table, then turning to offer Harriet a hand.
Harriet smiled at James, still trying to clear her mouth of Chabwera's cum as Rtari shyly took James' hand and drew him to the table.
"I offer Friendship," Rtari said.
James tried not to think about how hugely fat Rtari was with her monstrous breasts hanging down onto her fat belly. He was totally unprepared for the moist furnace of her pussy when she lowered herself down onto him, her pussy spasming on his cock, squeezing it. It was an exquisite feeling. And then she began to fuck him. James had never known that a woman could have such control over her pussy muscles while she was fucking. Try as he might, it wasn't long before he realized that he was going to lose control.
Rtari must have felt it, too, because faster than he'd have thought that she could move, like a huge, ebony blur she dismounted him and spun around, inhaling his cock just as his balls exploded. It was almost painful, he came so hard as Rtari sucked him off, seeming to have no trouble taking all 9" of his cock into her mouth.
Looking over at Harriet after Rtari had dismounted him and climbed down off the table into her husband's arms, James smiled when he saw the smile on her face as she licked her lips, her rock-hard ruby nipples pointing at him as Teleza approached the table.
"I offer Friendship," Teleza said as she climbed up onto the table.
James' eyes were riveted to Teleza's long, meaty pussy lips hanging down and pouting open as she grabbed his still-hard cock and guided it between them, lowering herself onto his cock, her hot, steamy pussy enveloping him as her pussy muscles massaged while she began to ride up and down on his cock. Because he had just cum, James was able to last longer and he found himself with his eyes riveted to his big white cock appearing and disappearing as Teleza rode him, her huge, fat clit rubbing the shaft of his cock as she fucked him.
Just as James realized that he was about to lose it, Teleza dismounted him and turned to inhale his cock as he exploded, slurping his cum and gulping it down. Because her ass was pointing towards his face, he could see her long, thick, meaty pussy lips hanging down and gaping open, the deep vermillion interior glistening. When he glanced at Harriet, her mouth was hanging open and her eyes were glazed.
"Now we are all Friends," Chabwera declared when Teleza finished sucking James off and climbed down off of the table.
James joined Harriet, his cock still semi-hard as it dangled in front of him.
"Not quite what we were expecting," Harriet said sardonically as she hugged him, his cock pressing against her stomach while her nipples pressed into his.
"Now that we are Friends, there is never a need to hesitate to offer to share Friendship," Teleza said as she came up to them, her large breasts hanging down, her huge, thick nipples hard, "or to accept or reject the sharing."
"What exactly does that mean, Teleza?" James asked.
"Well, if Mbemi and Rtari were visiting you or you were visiting them, because you are now Friends, either of you can offer to share Friendship," Teleza explained, "as can Chabwera and I, though we have that privilege already because we are Ngoni."
James and Harriet finally said their good-byes about an hour later, everyone dressing. They did not, however, get away without first promising to visit Mbemi and Rtari at some time and extending an invitation to visit whenever they cared to.
"James, are we doing the right thing?" Harriet asked as they slowly walked home, feeling the ktang that they had imbibed.
"How's that?" James asked.
"I mean, I understand how the Ngoni initiation ceremony had great significance," she replied. "And then before we could totally digest everything, we were sharing blessings with Chabwera and Teleza once or twice a day. Now we're meeting new people, becoming Friends. It's all just so counter to everything that I've ever been taught."
"I completely agree," James said.
"Does any of it bother you?" Harriet asked.
"Truth be told, no," James replied. "Are you bothered by any of it?" he asked.
"I'm not sure," Harriet replied deliberately.
"Well, is there anything that's happened that you wouldn't have done if it weren't in the context of trying to fit in better with these societies?" he asked.
"Are you serious?" Harriet asked.
"Yes," James replied, very serious. "Assume that I object to nothing and bless and encourage you," he said. "Assume further," he said, falling into a familiar lecturer's posture, something acquired and honed over the years teaching, "that all of the fitting-in social customs are just so much bullshit cover for the basic reality of things."
"Which is?" Harriet asked.
"That these people are into sex and that marriage isn't a limitation to a varietal experience," James replied. "They share sex the way we shake hands, though they invent a ritual and create a custom to make it seem less base than it is."
"More and more, that's what it seems like," Harriet replied, nodding in agreement.
"So, assuming all of that, is there anything that you wouldn't have done?" James asked.
"That's a terrible thing to ask," Harriet parried.
"Well, let me ask it another way," James said as they arrived at their house. "Is there anything that's happened that you regret, that you wish you hadn't done, no matter how you want to look at it?"
Harriet felt her cheeks flush hot as she looked up at her husband and his wry smile.
"No," she replied, almost in a whisper.
"And does anything that I've done bother you?" he asked.
"No!" Harriet replied. "It never crossed my mind. I knew that it wasn't about me."
"Exactly," James said. "And truth be told, seeing you with a big black cock in your mouth or in your pussy turns me on," he added as they entered the house.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"We're lucky that mom and dad or Chabwera and Teleza are always here," John said with a big sigh, having dumped two big loads of cum into his sister, the first one into her mouth, the last one into her incredibly delicious and tight pussy.
"How can you say that?" Mary asked, sitting up, a slight sheen of sweat covering her breasts and her rock-hard, ruby nipples.
"Because if they weren't, we'd never get out of bed," John replied, laughing.
"Probably," Mary agreed, a big smile on her face. "Maybe we can get them to all have a vacation at the same time, that way we can see if we'd like doing nothing but fucking and sucking all day and night."
"Works for me," John said.
"Oh, shit!" Mary gasped when they heard the kitchen door slam shut. "They're home!" she said, grabbing her panties and t-shirt and sprinting for her room.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Well, good morning!" Harriet said the next morning when both John and Mary showed up early for breakfast. "You're up early."
"I slept great," Mary said.
"People always sleep best in their own beds," Harriet commented.
"What are you two up to today?" James asked.
"Actually, we thought about exploring, heading down to Lake Malombe," John replied.
"Why there?" Harriet asked. "And where is it?"
"There because it's supposed to be a major place to see birds," Mary said. "It's famous for the birds. People come from all over the world to see them."
"It's probably a couple of hours south of here to Mangochi, though it's only 24km," John said. "I heard about a bird-watching place near Mpinganjila, another 7km, a small Sena tribe settlement at most an hour from there on the west side of the lake. There's a beach where we can camp. I'm sure we can get there in 2-3 hours."
"How long would you be gone?" Harriet asked.
"I don't know, a night or two," John replied, shrugging. "I guess it depends upon how nice it is. I'll take my tripod and a big lens and hope for some good opportunities. With the sidecar, we can easily take the camera gear, the tent, and some personal gear," he explained.
"Are you sure that it's safe?" Harriet asked.
"I do have to say that I've yet to hear about any violence, especially towards a foreigner," James said. "This is truly a pastoral land with over 80% of the people involved in agriculture in one way or the other."
"Everyone we've met has been friendly," Mary said. "I've never felt unsafe, not for a minute."
"I've never experienced friendliness like I have here," James said, smiling at Harriet who blushed slightly, something not lost on Mary.
"Just do us a favor and try to call once or twice a day," James suggested. "Why don't you stop in the market and get mobile phones? You each really should have one."
"That's a good idea," John agreed. "As soon as we get them and get them set up, we'll call you so that you'll have the numbers."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I can't believe how easy that was," Mary said as they finally got on the road towards Mangochi, new mobile phones in their gear.
"I had no idea it would be that easy," John agreed.
"Should we stop for some ktang?" Mary asked.
"Not while I'm driving this thing," John replied. "It's not as easy as it looks. Once we get there, we'll find some supplies. We can check out the possibilities on the way."
"That really wasn't so bad, was it?" Mary asked when they arrived at the beach that was just south of Mpinganjila, south of the Nasenga River. "It's really amazing when everything else is just high cliffs."
"I'm surprised there aren't more people here," John said, observing only a few tents, the beach being only about 75m long with dense foliage blocking each end.
"Let's get the tent set up and then go back to that kiosk we saw back in Mpinganjila for some food and stuff," John suggested.
"You like ktang?" the older woman who ran the kiosk asked with a big smile when they found the food supplies they wanted, along with half a dozen bottles of ktang.
"Yes, it's good stuff," John replied.
"Ktang keeps your cock hard long time," she said, cackling at the surprised expressions on John and Mary's face.
"Maybe we should buy some more," Mary suggested, at which the old woman burst into laughter, John and Mary joining in, "though I'm sure this will be enough for tonight," she said, winking at the old woman as they left.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"How come you didn't bring all of that when we went up to Chipita?" Mary asked as she watched her brother assemble his camera equipment after they had put the tent up.
"I didn't want to take the chance of something happening to it," John replied as he grabbed the first of his EOS 6D Mark II camera bodies and then mounted a CN-E30-300mm T2.95-3.7 L SP lens. "Now that I know more about things, I'm not as concerned. Now I'm ready to really start taking some photos," he said as he attached the camera with its lens to one of his Gitzo GK1555T-82TQDUS carbon fiber tripods. The other EOS 6D Mark II he mounted with a CN-E14.5-60mm T2.6 L SP lens.
"Well, now we have the perfect excuse to go back, don't we?" Mary asked.
"Let's hike up that trail over there," John suggested. "I think it leads up to the top of that cliff," he said, putting the other lens and tripod into the tent and covering it with some of their gear before closing the tent.
The cliff was only about 100' above the lake, but it afforded a nice overview of the immediate area. They could see their tent pitched close to the water instead of up against the brush the way the other tents were pitched. The color of the water was a very deep blue, approaching black.
Setting up the tripod, John surveyed the coast and saw that it was mostly vertical cliffs with just an occasional patch of beach. There were lots of marshy areas that were going to be prime areas for finding birds.
"Can I look?" Mary asked.
"Sure," John said, lowering the tripod so that the camera was at her eye level. "This is your zoom," he explained, showing her.
While Mary was looking through the big lens, John adjusted the settings on the other camera. Using Mary as his model, John began running off shots, adjusting his settings until he got it set up the way he wanted.
"What are you doing?" Mary asked when she noticed that he was taking pictures of her.
"Just getting the settings right," John explained.
"Is it so difficult?" Mary asked.
"It doesn't have to be," John replied, "but I shoot something called HDR, High Dynamic Range photos. I take 7 shots in about a second. Each of them has a different exposure value. When I combine them all together again, I get some great results."
"Hey, not so close to the edge," John warned when Mary stood near the edge facing him, raising her arms above her head and wide apart.
"I won't," Mary said as John pressed the shutter.
"You need to stand really still for this type of a shot," John explained. "Try it again," he said, pressing the shutter. "Nice.
"How's this?" Mary asked, pulling her t-shirt off over her head, her naked breasts bouncing free, her ruby nipples knurling into knots.
"Great!" John said, pressing the shutter as Mary changed positions. "Oh, yeah, that's great," John said as Mary cupped her breasts in her hands, her thumbs and forefingers capturing her hard nipples. "Beautiful," John said as Mary turned to the side, offering her profile, her gorgeous breasts sticking out.
"This is fun," Mary said, spreading her legs and lifting her hands to her hair, lifting it as John knelt in front of her, shooting upwards.
"Lick your lips," John instructed, the camera only 6" from Mary's face as he pressed the shutter.
"How about licking these lips?" Mary asked, reaching down and pulling the crotch of her shorts to the side, exposing her glistening pussy.
"Damn, Mary," John gasped, leaning in close with the camera to photograph his sister's pussy.
"Oh, this is great," Mary sighed, pushing her shorts to the ground and stepping out of them to stand naked in front of her brother, her back to the lake.
John knelt in front of his sister, shooting up at her. Mary lifted her right foot and placed it on his left shoulder, splitting her pussy wide open as he continued to shoot photos.
"God, Mary," John said, laying his camera down and grabbing her by the ass cheeks, pulling her towards him as he glued his mouth to her sopping pussy, his tongue sliding between her delicate pussy lips, tasting her thick, viscous, tangy pussy juices, then rubbing over her clit, causing her to shudder as she had an orgasm, bathing his tongue in her juices.
"I needed that," Mary panted, pushing her brother's face away from her pussy and him onto his back before reaching for his shorts and ripping them down his legs to free his raging cock. "But now I need this," she said, swinging a leg over his body and positioning the head of his cock at the entrance to her pussy, her delicate pussy lips draped over the head as John struggled to ride the shutter button on the camera, groaning as his sister's hot, tight pussy slowly but surely slid down onto his cock until she was sitting on him, his cock buried in her pussy.
Mary began to have a leisurely fuck, riding up and down on her brother's big cock while he took the occasional photo. When he warned her after a while that he was about to cum, Mary dismounted, crouching between his legs, both hands wrapped around the glistening, slippery shaft of his cock while she bathed the head with her tongue, probing into the slit before taking it into her mouth as John attempted to hold the camera steady.
And then cum was gushing into Mary's mouth as she pumped his cock with both hands, her tongue all over the head of him as her mouth filled with cum that she gulped down as quickly as she could until finally the flow slowed, then stopped, Mary sucking hard on him, chasing into the slit of his cock with her sharp tongue looking for any last bits of cum before finally sitting up on her knees as she licked her lips and continued to swallow, a Cheshire cat's grin on her face.
"Mmm, that was good," she sighed as she watched her brother's cock still twitching.
"That was incredible," John said as he pushed up into a sitting position.
"I can't wait to see those pictures," Mary said, a sparkle in her eyes.
"They're so hot, they might melt the memory card," John said, laughing. "Fuck, that was good."
"Who would have thought that the best sex would be with my own brother?" Mary sighed.
"Let's go back to the tent and get a fire going," John suggested. "We're going to be hungry before you know it."
"I'm already hungry," Mary said. "That appetizer isn't going to hold me long," she added, leaning over to slowly drag her tongue across the head of his cock once more.
They pulled their clothes on and made their way back down to their tent. There was plenty of scrub brush around so that they soon had a good fire going.
"Let's take a swim while the fire burns down," Mary suggested, already stripping and moving to the water's edge, just 10' away. "It's cold," she said after testing the water with a foot.
"So I see," John said, a grin on his face as he stared at her hard, ruby nipples screwed into knots on her breasts.
Taking a deep breath, Mary plunged in, jumping up out of the water with a shout. John joined her, but it proved too cold to enjoy for very long and then exited the water. Mary wrapped her arms around her brother, laying her head on his chest as she sought the warmth of his body, her breasts with their hard nipples pressing into his stomach.
"The lake is very deep, therefore it is cold," they heard a deep, mellifluous voice say, startling them.
"That would explain it," John said, turning, his arm around Mary's shoulders to see a young man approximately their own age standing 10' away, a big smile on his face as his eyes slowly checked Mary out.
"I am Mboni," he introduced himself. "You bought some supplies from my mother. She asked me to make sure that you were okay. I didn't mean to interrupt."
"I'm John, this is Mary," John introduced.
"If I am bothering you," Mboni began to say.
"No, no," John said. "We're just waiting to dry off."
"I will join you so that we are all the same," Mboni said, suddenly dropping his clothes and running to the lake and diving in, emerging a minute later shaking his head.
"Your English is very good," Mary said, resisting the urge to cover herself with her hands, yet unable to fully tear her eyes from Mboni's ebony cock. While not nearly as long as John's, it was very thick and very black. She also noticed that his eyes were on her.
"I go to the St. John Baptist University," Mboni explained. "It's just over there," he said, pointing. "I brought you some things for your dinner," he said, turning to pick up a bag. "My mother said you didn't buy any vegetables to go with your ktang and the other food."
"That's really nice of you," John said. "Why don't you join us for dinner, tell us about this area."
It seemed perfectly natural for the three of them to sit on the blanket in front of the tent by the fire naked, talking.
"There are some very good places very close by to photograph birds," Mboni said when he learned why they were there. "Places only local people would know about. I will be happy to show you tomorrow."
"Hey, I forgot," John said, jumping to his feet and into the tent, emerging with several bottles of ktang. "This will warm us up," he said, opening a bottle and taking a big swig from it before offering it to Mary.
"Terrible!" Mary said, coughing after taking a big swig. "I'm getting to like the taste."
"Ktang makes life," Mboni said as he accepted the bottle from Mary.
"Your mother had an interesting opinion of what it was good for," Mary said as he handed the bottle back to her.
"Yes, my mother swears that ktang keeps the cock nice and hard," Mboni said, wrapping his hand around the shaft of his own ebony cock.
"Does it?" Mary asked, wide-eyed as she watched him slowly stroking himself.
"Maybe," Mboni replied. "I've been drinking ktang since I was a boy and I've never had a problem. Does my cock interest you?" he asked with a wide smile.
"It is such a beautiful color," Mary replied.
"Let me show you," Mboni said when he saw John get up to smooth the coals and start to put some food to cook.
Mary thought the contrast between John and Mboni was fascinating, John being a foot taller and so pale white next to Mboni's ebony skin. She felt herself get wet when she saw them squatting side by side, their cocks hanging down towards the ground in front of them easily visible, being backlit by the fire.
"It will take about 30 minutes to cook properly," Mboni announced.
"I think I'll set up a camera and take some pictures," John said, getting to his feet.
When Mboni moved to sit back down, he sat closer so that he and Mary were hip to hip, shoulder to shoulder. She felt her pussy getting even wetter when she felt the smooth warmth of his ebony skin against her own pale, freckled skin.
John returned with the CN-E14.5-60mm T2.6 L SP lens mounted on one of the camera bodies and everything on one of the Gitzo tripods, setting it down on the other side of Mboni, fairly close. After looking through the viewfinder and making a few adjustments, he pressed the shutter button and moved back to sit on the other side of Mary.
"What's that red light?" Mary asked.
"It just shows that it's powered and working," John replied. "Nothing to worry about. The best thing to do is just forget that it's even there. That way we'll get the best pictures."
"More ktang, please," Mary said, turning to smile up at her brother.
"Better take it easy," John said, handing her a new bottle. "You haven't eaten."
"I just needed another swallow," Mary said, taking one and shaking her head as she swallowed.
"You really like the flavor?" Mboni asked when she handed him the bottle.
"Not really," Mary replied.
"It's a strong taste that's very difficult to get out of your mouth," Mboni said as he took a swallow from the bottle.
"Oh, I know the secret to getting the taste out of my mouth," Mary assured him, turning to smile at him.
"You do?" Mboni asked.
"Yes," Mary replied, reaching over to replace his hand with hers on his cock which had become mostly hard as he had stroked himself.
"Ahhh," Mboni sighed when Mary leaned over and ran her tongue around the head of his ebony cock before taking it into her mouth. "You do not mind?" he asked, looking at John who was watching as Mary sucked his ebony cock.
"No, she's a big girl," John replied, smiling when Mboni hung his head back as Mary's nose pressed up against his belly, his entire cock in her mouth.
"That's nice," Mary said, gasping for breath as she sat up, jacking Mboni's now rock-hard cock with her hand.
"It is very nice," Mboni sighed.
"I want to feel it inside of me," Mary said, turning and sitting on Mboni's lap, her hand down between them to find his cock and guide it to the entrance to her pussy. "Oh, yes," she hissed as she felt Mboni's thick cock slide up into her tight pussy, grateful that she had just recently fucked John so that her pussy was a bit loosened up, as Mboni's cock was very thick.
Mary smiled at John as she began to ride Mboni's ebony cock, raising and lowering her ass as she fucked him. Even in the waning light, the contrast between his ebony cock and Mary's pale freckled skin was stunning, just like it had been with Chewba.
"I am going to cum," Mboni announced almost fifteen minutes later, by now comfortable enough to have filled his hands with Mary's hard-nippled breasts as she fucked him.
Mary immediately dismounted Mboni's cock, kneeling next to him, her ass and pussy pointing at John, the camera right in front of her as she bent over and sucked Mboni's glistening, ebony cock into her mouth. John was staring at Mary's pussy gaping open from the fucking it had just received, her delicate pussy lips flushed with color.
Without giving it a thought, John knelt behind his sister and filled her pussy with his cock just as he heard Mboni groan and Mary choke as Mboni came in her mouth. Though not as tight as it had been an hour or so ago, Mary's pussy still felt magnificent as John fucked her while she continued sucking Mboni off.
"This is great," Mary gasped, still gulping down Mboni's cum, arching her back as her brother fucked her doggie.
Mboni was wide-eyed as he watched Mary continue to lick and suck on his cock, stabbing her tongue into the slit as she sought yet more cum while her brother continued to fuck her. Then John's cock exploded deep in her pussy, pumping cum. He could feel her pussy milking him as he emptied his balls into her. When he finally finished cumming, he pulled his cock from her pussy, seeing how it gaped open, cum flowing from her hole.
"I sure hope that food is ready," Mary gasped as she rolled onto her back, her feet flat on the ground and well apart, her pussy spread open to reveal the glistening pinkness inside while John's cum continued to leak from her.
Mboni struggled to his knees and checked the food, pronouncing it ready. The three of them gorged themselves, the food tasting all the better for being cooked over an open fire on the lake shore.
"That was really good," John said when he had finished eating, leaning back on his elbows. "Those vegetables really made it, Mboni."
"I agree," Mary said. "They were every bit as delicious as your gorgeous cock."
"Maybe you'd like some dessert?" Mboni asked, laughing as he stroked himself.
"How did you guess?" Mary asked, laughing as she rolled over and engulfed his cock once again in her mouth.
The rest of the night was a blur of sex with John and Mboni continually filling Mary's mouth and pussy with their cocks.
"God, I need to clean up," Mary said when she awoke the next morning, looking down at herself, her pussy and inner thighs covered with dried cum.
"Are you still interested in photographing birds?" Mboni asked as they all joined Mary in the water to wash.
"Definitely," John replied. "That's why we're here."
They exited the water and dried themselves in the sun before dressing, then Mboni led them to several secret places that he knew of, shocking them when they saw the profusion of birds; egrets, herons, ibis, kingfishers, flamingos, and more. John was in photography heaven as he took picture after picture using his big 600mm lens.
"Mboni, that was great," John told him after several hours of shooting pictures. "I would never have gotten so many good shots if it weren't for you."
"It was my pleasure," Mboni assured him. "Will you stay for another night?"
"Actually, I think we have plenty of time so that we could go back home today," John replied. "Our parents will be worried, even though we've called them."
"Your parents?" Mboni asked, the surprise obvious on his face. "You are brother and sister?"
"Yes, didn't you know?" John replied.
"No, I didn't," Mboni said, shaking his head. "And you, you..."
"I think have sex is the word you're looking for," Mary filled in, a big smile on her face. "Does that bother you?"
"No, no," Mboni replied, shaking his head. "This is very common here. I just didn't realize that white people..."
"Well, as a rule, they don't," Mary said. "But we're a bit different."
"Yes, you are," Mboni agreed.
"But if you are interested, I'd like you to fuck me again before we go," Mary said. "Both of you. I just love having two cocks at the same time."
John was laughing when he saw the shocked look on Mboni's face, but they all hurried back to their campsite where Mary was quickly given her wish, Mboni's cock in her pussy and John's in her mouth. They traded places a few times before they came, both of the men finishing in Mary's eagerly sucking mouth as she gulped down their cum.
"Maybe you'll come visit us in Nkopola one day," John suggested.
"Yes, that would be nice," Mary agreed. "We could do this again."
"I'd like that," Mboni replied.
They packed up their gear and loaded the scooter and sidecar, waving as they drove away, leaving Mboni shaking his head at the craziness of white people.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I can barely walk," Harriet complained as they staggered home after meeting a new couple at Chabwera and Teleza's home, the third evening in a row.
"He did seem to be taking his time," James said with a chuckle. "And I don't blame him. That pussy of yours, sometimes I never want to stop, it feels so good."
"Well, this pussy of mine has never had such a variety of experiences like it has lately," Harriet said.
"The Lord works in mysterious ways, it would seem," James said.
"You're not complaining, are you?" Harriet asked.
"Not at all," James replied. "These people seem to use sex the way we use prayer; a way of getting closer to God. Anything that brings me closer to God, I'm all for it."
"You never say anything about what it's like to fuck these other women," Harriet observed.
"It's great," James replied. "You know how much I love to fuck. They've all had very talented pussies, almost as talented as yours."
"Hah!" Harriet snorted.
"I'll compare as soon as we get home," James said with a laugh, "unless you'll let me do it right here, against that wall."
"You wouldn't dare!" Harriet said, laughing.
"I definitely would," James assured her. "It's all I can think about right now, eating your pussy and then fucking you."
"My, my, what has gotten into you?" Harriet asked.
"Seeing you with those big, black cocks," James answered. "It is unbelievably erotic. Turns me on to no end."
"So you say," Harriet said.
"Look, if anything about any of this bothers you, we can stop it right now," James said. "I mean it. We can take more traditional measures to get to know these people, win their trust. But if you like this way of doing things..."
"I feel terrible saying it, but this is a lot more fun than those traditional measures," Harriet replied after a moment.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Mom! Dad!" Mary exclaimed when they came in the kitchen door.
"Mary!" Harriet said, hugging her towel-clad daughter. "What's this?" she asked, indicating the towels that they were both wearing in lieu of clothes.
"We couldn't wait for a shower when we got home," Mary explained.
"How was it?" James asked, hugging his daughter.
"Fantastic!" Mary replied, her eyes glowing. "I've never seen so many birds before."
"No problems?" Harriet asked.
"No, it was a piece of cake," John replied. "Found the place easy enough. I'm looking forward to going back again. But we got up before dawn this morning to get sunrise shots of the bird flocks coming awake."
"You must be beat," Harriet observed.
"I can't wait for a bed with a pillow," John admitted.
"Me, too," Mary agreed.
"Well, I look forward to seeing the pictures when you have them ready," James said.
"Meeting more prospective converts again?" John asked.
"Yes," Harriet replied, her cheeks coloring slightly.
"You've become such social butterflies," Mary said with a smile.
"It is different," James said. "But it's also fun. We're enjoying it."
"Well, I'm off to bed," John said, getting to his feet and making sure his towel was firmly secured around his waist.
"Me, too," Mary said.
"Well, we'll talk tomorrow," Harriet said.
"Night," Mary said, kissing each of them on the cheek.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * **
"James, hello," Steve Bishop's voice greeted him when he answered the phone after John and Mary had gone to bed. "Is Harriet with you?"
"Hi, Steve," James responded. "Yes, she is. Why?" he asked, motioning Harriet over so that she could listen with him.
"I've been having meetings with each of the missions," Steve explained. "We've had discussions about how to better integrate our operations. But in order to do this, we'd each need to know more about each other's situations and we only really have perfunctory knowledge right now. None of us really knows anything about the nuts and bolts of everyday life in anyone else's mission."
"Well, for us that's certainly true," James said. "We're getting on our feet nicely, but we haven't really had time to think about anything but Nkopola."
"And quite rightly," Steve replied. "What little we've heard about Nkopola since your arrival is nothing short of spectacular. We're all very pleased that we found you and Harriet."
"That's nice to hear," James said, enjoying the smile on Harriet's face when she heard this.
"We've tentatively come up with an idea and I wanted to run it by the two of you," Steve said.
"Go on, we're listening," James replied.
"We propose that every two months one person from each mission should go to another mission for a one- or two-week period," Steve explained. "That way within a year or two, we should all have a good idea of exactly what each mission is doing, what challenges it faces, what help the rest of us can offer."
"Well, that certainly makes sense," James replied.
"If we do it this way, no one mission will be shorthanded," Steve continued. "Each mission would still have a couple leading it."
"Well, I know I'd hate to lose Harriet even for a day," James said, "but I guess we'd manage. One or two weeks, you say?"
"Yes," Steve replied. "We're all still undecided on that particular point. I'm hoping you'd have some input for us."
"Well, putting my personal feelings aside, even with what little we know about Nkopola already, I can't imagine anyone getting a total grasp of the situation in just a week," James said.
"I'm of the same mind," Steve responded. "Rhumpi is too complex, for example. It would take a week just to get oriented, much less grasp the totality of the challenges that we face."
"And we don't really know enough about Nkopola ourselves yet," James said. "We're starting to make inroads with the general populace, but that's slow, slogging work, family by family."
"Here, we're in between two totally different geographical and tribal areas, the Vwaza Wildlife Reserve and Nyika National Park," Steve said. "This could easily be two missions for the challenges with which we are confronted. Would you and Harriet be willing to try this if we can all agree?"
"Of course," James replied after seeing Harriet nod her head. "In our minds, it's all one big mission anyway. It's a small planet after all."
"That it is," Steve replied with a chuckle. "I understand that you and Harriet are now Ngoni; is that correct?"
James froze, his eyes seeking out and locking with Harriet's now wide eyes.
"Y-yes, that is correct," James replied slowly, an empty feeling in the pit of his stomach.
"I want to congratulate you on that," Steve said. "It's a serious accomplishment. It took some of us years before we became Ngoni."
"You became Ngoni?" James asked slowly, a feeling of shock coursing through his body.
"We are all Ngoni," Steve replied. "Some of us are also Chewa, Tumbuka, Yao, Tonga, and Longwe."
"I'm floored," James said honestly. "We've been concerned..."
"I totally understand," Steve interrupted. "I think that was true for all of us. But I imagine that you, like us, came to realize that getting close to God and helping others to find God, hopefully through Christ, is what our mission is all about."
"That's almost exactly what we've discussed," James replied, breathing a sigh of relief as he felt Harriet sag against him.
"The Catholics have their communion," Steve said. "I'll take Malawian ways any day."
"We said pretty much the same thing not an hour ago," James said, laughing now.
"If you think that becoming Ngoni challenged you, wait until you get the opportunity to become Tumbuka," Steve said with a laugh. "I won't say any more other than to say that that will prove the most challenging thing that you will ever undergo in your lives. Tell me, did you enjoy the Ngoni ceremony of acceptance? Was there anything about it that was uncomfortable for either of you?"
"Well, other than wondering about reconciling what we had been taught with what was happening, I'd have to say no," James replied. "It is one of the most memorable experiences of our lives."
"As well it should be," Steve said. "Tell me about your community outreach," he encouraged.
"Well, we have to give Chabwera and Teleza the credit there," James replied. "Each evening they invite us and a different couple to their home for a social evening."
"Friendship ceremony?" Steve asked.
"Uh, yes," James replied.
"How do you like the Friendship ceremony?" Steve asked.
"Well, we just got back from one," James replied, temporizing. "We were discussing just that."
"Great way to create bonds of trust with people," Steve said. "Do you enjoy it?"
"We're almost ashamed to say that we do," James replied, glancing at Harriet and seeing her cheeks flush.
"Nothing to be ashamed of at all," Steve assured him. "We always look forward to them."
"This is all so new to us," James said. "We're still struggling with the differences in mores with the West."
"Of course you are," Steve replied. "There's a lot of brainwashing to fight through. But if your hearts are in the right places, you'll be fine and better people and Christians for it."
"You have no idea how good it is to hear you say that," James said, breathing a sigh of relief. "I feel twinges of guilt because I enjoy..."
"Watching Harriet?" Steve finished for him with a laugh. "I don't know which one of us likes watching the other more, me or Sara," Steve said.
"I have to admit that it's almost disconcerting to hear you speaking like this, so relaxed about it all," James said. "It's almost as though you're talking about getting a drink of water, you're so casual."
"That's because we totally accept it and thoroughly enjoy it," Steve replied. "For us, it's become that getting a drink of water. It's just part of the life and life is to be celebrated, enjoyed, reveled in. Suffering is for fools and those living in darkness. We feel as though we are living in the light more than we ever felt possible this side of passing over."
"Now, for us it was far easier," Steve continued. "We're both the children of missionaries. I was raised here. Even though I was exposed to the West's indoctrination and interpretations, I'm about as Malawian as they come."
"We're worried about the children," James said. "We don't know what we'd do if they found out."
"You'd be surprised by your children," Steve said. "Greg and Susan can't stop raving about what wonderful people they are. Apparently, Charlene was disconsolate when they left. Give them their wings, let them see and learn Malawi. They'll end up shocking you, I'd imagine."
"Is Bruce aware that you and Sara..." James asked.
"He is," Steve replied. "Bruce was born here, though we sent him back to the States for his education. There was no strangeness when he learned about it. If anything, it's made our family bond that much stronger. He has often attended Friendship ceremonies with us. He has deep friendships with all of the tribes. His best friends are tribal."
"Really!" James gasped. "He-he's seen you and Sara in Friendship ceremonies?" he asked, feeling Harriet trembling against his arm and shoulder.
"Many times," Steve repeated.
"I don't recall ever being so blown away," James said after a pause. "Not in my life. You've got to realize how new all of this is to us. We're still struggling with right/wrong issues, though neither of us is inclined to not go along with local customs. We do enjoy it," he said, sliding a hand up the inside of Harriet's leg, all the way up until his fingers encountered her sopping, panty-less pussy.
"Harriet, you're listening in?" Steve asked.
"Y-yes," Harriet replied, suppressing a moan as James began to rub between her pussy lips.
"How do you feel about all of this?" Steve asked.
"I'd agree with what James said," Harriet replied, biting her lip when she felt a couple of James' fingers slip up into her pussy.
"How do you feel about the rotation idea for the missions?" Steve asked.
"I like it," Harriet replied, squeezing her thighs together and shuddering as an orgasm wracked her body as James withdrew his fingers from her pussy and stuck them in his mouth to suck on. "I don't see a downside to it."
"I'm glad to hear you say that," Steve said. "Oh, Bruce would kill me if I forgot. He heard how much John and Mary enjoyed Chipita, so he wants to invite them to visit so that he and Masozi can show them the Nyika National Park and the Vwaza Marsh Wildlife Refuge. Masozi is a Ranger and I doubt that there are two people in Malawi that know more about either of those places than the two of them. They'd certainly see all sorts of wildlife and birds."
"I'm sure they're going to jump at the chance," James said. "They just got back from a short camping trip to Lake Malombe to photograph the birds."
"If they liked Lake Malombe, they're going to love Nyika and Vwaza," Steve said. "Anyway, put it to them, see what you come up with. They're going to want at least a week, I'd think. Two weeks would probably be ideal. Both places are incredible. I love being able to get away. I never miss a chance to go camping in either of them."
"We'll tell them in the morning at breakfast," James promised.
"Then I'll say good-night," Steve said. "Enjoy your evening."
"Good-night, Steve," James and Harriet said at the same time.
"They let their son watch," Harriet breathed, her cheeks flushed.
"It's a lot to take in," James agreed, "but like he said, it's not new to them; it's a natural part of life that they feel absolutely no shame about."
"Do you think that we'll ever become like that?" Harriet asked.
"Only if we're lucky," James replied with a grin, taking her by the hand. "Let's go work on it," he said, leading her giggling up the stairs to their bedroom where he pushed her onto the bed, diving between her legs to fasten his mouth on her sopping pussy, eating her to several orgasms before getting to his knees and filling her pussy with his cock.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Hell, yes!" John erupted when the offer to visit Rhumpi was explained the next morning at breakfast. "How about it?" he asked, turning to Mary.
"You couldn't pay me to miss it," Mary insisted. "We can go?" she asked, looking pleadingly at her parents.
"I don't see why not," James replied. "It wasn't a casual offer. He went to some lengths to sell the idea."
"That's because you made us come back from Chipita too soon," Mary admonished, waving a finger at him. "We were having a great time and we weren't in the way."
"We know," Harriet said. "But we didn't want to take undue advantage so soon after arriving. Now we know better. In fact, there's an idea being floated about having each of the missions rotate one person every couple of months to another mission for a week or two so that we all have a working familiarity with each of the missions."
"That's a great idea," John said. "Makes a lot of sense."
"When can we go visit the Bishops?" Mary asked.
"I'll talk with Steve tonight after we get back," James promised. "We need to get to the school now."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Enjoy your dinner," Teleza said as she and Chabwera prepared to leave after serving the dinner.
"Thank you, Teleza," Harriet said, smiling at the ebony woman. "We'll see you in a couple of hours."
"Chabwera," James said, getting to his feet and accompanying them outside, "would it be inappropriate to bring a camera to these meetings?"
"I understand," Chabwera said, smiling. "They are memories to be preserved and then savored again at another time. Nobody will be bothered by a camera," he assured him.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Harriet, have you seen the camera?" James asked after dinner that evening.
He had talked to Steve Bishop and everything was agreed for John and Mary to go visit the next day. They were in their rooms, gathering what they wanted to take for an extended visit, having extracted a promise from their parents that they'd trust them to come back when they were ready.
"I thought it was on that hall table," Harriet said as she joined him in their bedroom to dress for their visit to Chabwera and Teleza's.
"You okay?" James asked as she stepped out of her clothes and cupped her naked breasts, pinching her own hard nipples.
"I'm just a little worried about the children," Harriet replied, tugging on her nipples until she gasped, then released them, smiling sheepishly at John.
"Looking forward to this evening?" he asked as he pulled on a pair of trousers and a short-sleeved shirt.
"Actually, yes," Harriet replied, then laughed as she reached for a skirt and fastened it around her waist, no panties, then pulled a t-shirt on over her naked breasts, her hard, ruby nipples poking obviously through the material.
"Ah, there it is," James said, picking up the camera from the hall table as they left.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"God, I couldn't wait for them to leave," Mary said as she burst into John's room, stripping her clothes until she arrived in front of him stark naked. "Well!" she said, stamping her foot and reaching for his pants.
"You get it out of your system?" John asked half an hour later after Mary had tried to fuck him to death before gulping down the load that he finally deposited in her hungry mouth.
"For now," she replied, licking her lips as she swallowed the last of her brother's cum.
"I need to finish packing," John said, getting to his feet, his huge cock dangling in front of him, still glistening from Mary's tender ministrations.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I want to see the pictures," Harriet said as they entered the kitchen after returning home.
"Upstairs," James said, taking her hand. "I'll copy them to the computer," he said, sitting down at the computer and extracting the memory card from the camera.
"You want me to do that?" Harriet asked, knowing that James' computer skills were questionable.
"Even I can copy files," James said as he opened an Explorer window.
"Those must be pictures that John and Mary took," Harriet said when she saw the files listed by date in Detail mode.
"There," James said, opening a new folder and copying the photos from that evening to it, then returned the memory card to the camera.
"Oh, my God!" Harriet gasped when she saw the first photo open on the screen, she and James with Btema and Kgari, she side by side with Kgari, all of them naked.
Slowly James clicked through the photos, Harriet standing between him and Btema, a hand wrapped around each of their hard cocks.
"Don't you want to see the videos?" James asked after clicking through the jpeg files as Harriet pulled him onto his back, then planted her sopping pussy on his mouth, leaning over to extract his cock which she sucked into her mouth.
"That is the most pornographic thing I've ever seen," Harriet gasped as she mounted James several orgasms later, her pussy clamping down on his cock as she rocked her hips back and forth.
"Watching you is the hottest thing I've ever seen," James grunted as he thrust his hips up to meet her, loving the sensations her pussy always created as it milked his cock.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"They always fuck like crazy when they get home," Mary practically whispered to her brother as she sat on his lap facing him, her legs wrapped around his waist, all 9" of his rock-hard cock buried in her pussy.
"We had to get it from somewhere," John said, lifting her and flipping her onto her back, his cock still filling her tight pussy.
"My God!" Mary said, laughing quietly when she heard the muffled bellows of pleasure coming from their parents' room.
"You're not allowed to make noise like that," John said, pulling his cock from her pussy and pulling her up into a sitting position, filling her wide-open mouth with his glistening cock.
"Mmm," Mary gurgled as her brother's cock exploded, cum gushing onto her tongue as he began to empty his balls in her mouth, finally closing her lips on him as her mouth filled with his hot, thick cum, gulping down the first mouthful before turning her attention to thoroughly sucking him off.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"God, I'm horny enough," Mary complained to John the next morning as they gathered their things, hearing their parents' once again having fun through the thin walls.
"Well, if they're busy," John observed, "I could help you with your problem a bit. Just bend over."
"Oh!" Mary said, stamping her foot in exasperation when she heard her parents' voices as they opened the door to their room to go downstairs for breakfast.
"All packed?" John asked when John and Mary descended for breakfast, bags in hand.
"Yes," Mary replied, her eyes darting from her father to her mother and back again.
"I hate it that you'll be gone for so long," Harriet said, cinching her housecoat more firmly.
"Look at it this way," John said as he sat down for breakfast. "You've got a lot on your plates. Not having to worry about taking care of us will give you more time, for each other, for example," he said, seeing out of the corner of his eye Mary's eyes bugging out as she tried not to burst into laughter.
"It's not that we worry about taking care of you," Harriet responded, a bit more color in her cheeks, "it's just that we're so used to you always being here. We know that it's getting closer to that flying from the nest time, but it's hard to break old habits."
"Thanks, mom," Mary said, leaning over to hug her mother. "But we'll be fine."
The bus ride to Mzuzu was familiar, but there they changed buses for the final 50km to Rhumpi, where Steve, Sara, and Bruce were all waiting for them when the bus arrived. There were handshakes and hugs all around and then they piled into the Bishop's Range Rover for the short ride to their home, right next to the junction of the Rhumpi River which flowed down from the Nyika Plateau from the north and the Lunyina River which flows across and then down from the Nyika Plateau, coming more from the northeast.
"What a magical setting," Mary said after standing silently and watching and listening to the two rivers merging.
"It's best at sunset from the other side," Bruce said. "The colors that dance on the spray can be pretty amazing and you also get the mountains in the background."
"I can't wait to see it all," Mary said.
"Does it flow year round?" John asked.
"Never stops," Bruce assured him. "During the rainy season, the craziest of the crazy float the river with inner tubes."
"Are you one of the craziest of the crazy?" Mary asked, smiling at him.
"When I tube the river, I'd have to say yes," Bruce replied with a big smile.
The house was a sprawling ranch type with a large, open kitchen just inside the front door from which everything else radiated. There was a large living area directly in front of the kitchen which had a counter/breakfast bar to differentiate the space and also to provide a quick and easy place to eat. The living area was a horseshoe of three large sofas with a large, hand-carved, low, wood coffee table in the middle. The open part of the 'U' faced a wall of glass which faced the Rhumpi River just above where it joined the Lunyina. Both rivers were surrounded by fields of tobacco, corn, and tomato, while the rivers themselves were overgrown along their banks with huge stands of mango, papaya, and banana trees.
On either side of the living area were two bedrooms, each facing the river with a broad, screened porch that ran the width of the house, connecting everything. Steve and Sara had their bedroom to the left, while Bruce's was to the right.
"If you'd be more comfortable with side-by-side bedrooms, it's not a problem for Bruce to move over to our side of the house," Sara assured them. "But truth be told, we usually throw our mattresses out on the porch to sleep."
"It's not a problem," Mary replied. "I'll take the bedroom next to yours so that the boys can be together," she said, everyone laughing.
"So, what do you know of that you want to see?" Steve asked after they had dropped their things in their rooms and then gathered in the living area, bowls of fresh fruit on the low table.
"I want to see everything," Mary replied. "It's all new and I just can't get enough. John's the photographer."
"Well, we've got birds like crazy, not to mention serious wildlife, including elephants, water buffalo, and hippopotamus," Bruce said. "Even leopards and lions if you're lucky. It depends upon how hard you want to work," he added. "There can be a lot of hard hiking to get to the best stuff."
"You know how to find the best stuff?" John asked.
"Pretty much, though Masozi and Penjani know it better," Bruce replied. "They're both Rangers. They've taught me most of what I know."
"I want to see what nobody else sees," John said.
"This is going to be fun," Bruce said with a smile. "The Vwaza Marsh Wildlife Reserve is lowland, very wet and humid. But the birds are there, plus hippos in Lake Kazuni. There are very few roads. Up at Nyika National Park is where we can see the bigger wildlife, even cats. It's much less humid, easier going. We can access more of it by car."
"How about it, you up for getting tired and dirty?" John asked Mary with a grin.
"I suppose I could carry you," Bruce said, his eyes twinkling.
"When I get tired, I'll remind you of that," Mary retorted. "We've at least got to try. But do you want to do this? Sounds to me like you've done it a lot."
"I never get tired of it," Bruce replied. "I'll probably end up officially joining the Rangers one day myself."
"Well, show them around here for the first day or two," Sara suggested. "Tomorrow's Thursday, market day. You'll want to see that."
"We loved the market in Chipita," Mary said.
"This is similar, but bigger," Steve said.
"I'm sure you're hungry," Sara said. "You should take them down to the river for the sunset while I get some food ready."
"That sounds good to me," John said.
"Come on, then," Bruce said, getting to his feet.
Bruce led them through a banana- and papaya-planted field to where the Rhumpi River snaked by on its way to meet the Lunyina River.
"There are hundreds of little places," Bruce explained. "I've got my favorite, gives a good western view for the sunset and still open enough for some sun."
"I like this place," Mary said when they stopped after a minute of walking. "Those trees are nice. You don't have to be in the sun."
"Are you swimmers?" Bruce asked.
"Sure, but we don't have..." John replied.
"We don't either," Bruce said with a laugh. "Is that okay?" he asked, looking towards Mary.
"I don't mind," Mary said. "I prefer it, actually," she said, pulling her t-shirt off over her head, her hard, ruby-tipped nipples standing out on her full, freckled C-cup breasts.
Before either Bruce or John could react, Mary had stepped out of her shorts and sank into the water of the slowly flowing river.
"It feels good," she sighed, turning to look at them. "Aren't you coming in?" she asked, standing with a smile on her face, the water dripping from her hard nipples as they undressed.
"This is really different from the lake," John said as he sat down and lay back, feeling the water flowing across his body.
"The lake was a lot colder," Mary said, sitting next to him, their hips touching, leaning back on her hands as the droplets of water on her freckled breasts sparkled in the waning sunlight.
"Lake Malawi is really deep," Bruce explained, squatting down next to them.
"Lake Malombe was cold, too," Mary said, her eyes lingering on Bruce's cock as it dangled between his legs as he squatted next to her, the head almost touching the water.
"Same story, though not quite as deep," Bruce said, sitting down in the river. "The Shire River drains it, runs down by Liwonde National Park. That's a great place to see," he added.
"This really is a great place to watch the sunset," Mary said, facing west, seeing the mountains rising up behind the town, the sky turning first a soft orange, then a deeper red, until finally there was a purple and magenta sky fading to deep blue and violet and the only sounds were some insects chirping and the sound of the river softly gurgling as it trickled over and past them.
"Dinner's probably ready," Bruce said when the first stars became visible, getting to his feet. "Shall we?" he asked, offering Mary a hand.
"Thank you," she said, feeling her face flush as she reacted to his cock coming within six inches of it as she got to her feet. Not as big as John's, it looked nice to her. Her cheeks were flaming as she pulled her clothes on because of the thought that ran through her head; how long was it going to take before she got to suck and fuck Bruce's cock.
"How was it?" Steve asked when they returned, the table set and overflowing with food.
"Perfect," Mary sighed. "What a perfect way to end the day."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Sara, you can cook," John sighed after finishing his third full plate of food.
"Sara's cooking is half the reason we're so successful here," Steve said.
"How do you like Malawi so far?" Sara asked.
"I like it a lot," John replied. "I've never been anywhere where everyone is pleasant, friendly like they are here."
"The people are so relaxed about basic things in life that people in the West are so uptight about," Mary said. "They seem much happier, even though they're much poorer and live much more difficult and simple lives."
"Friendship and tribal affiliations are the foundations and bedrock of Malawi," Steve said. "They're all from somewhere else. They've fought wars against each other. Then Livingstone came, introduced them to Christ, who they accepted along with anything else they happened to believe in. They're an agrarian people, 80% attached to the land in some fashion. That makes for good people, people who know what's real and what's not, what's important and what's not."
"Someone is always offering to help," John said.
"Does the relaxed nudity bother you?" Sara asked.
"I have to plead the fifth on this one," John said with a laugh.
"Why?" Bruce asked.
"John got in trouble in school one year for circulating a petition calling for all students to only wear shorts and shoes, no shirts," Mary replied with a laugh.
"It seemed like a good idea at the time," John said, smiling ruefully.
"Do you still feel that way?" Sara asked, a twinkle in her eyes.
"I thought it was strange at first," Mary said, rescuing John whose face was flushed. "It didn't bother me, but it was strange. To visit someone in their home and people were in every stage of dress or undress. And the beach. It was a bit weird at first with John, but now it's no big deal. It's sort of liberating in a way."
"The Malawian people don't even understand the concept of being ashamed or embarrassed by the human body," Sara said. "Or its functions. To them the body is the temporary temple of the soul, to be used to get as close to God as possible before moving on to the next stage."
"I guess it's contagious," Mary said. "The Nances were unlike any people I've ever met. I learned a lot from them, especially Charlene."
"Charlene has a Malawian soul," Bruce declared. "We've known each other since we were kids. I think of her like a sister."
"Give it time," Steve said. "You've only been here a couple of months."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Want to join us for some ktang?" John asked, sticking his head into Mary's room from the porch after they had all pitched in to help clean up the dinner mess.
"Yeah!" Mary replied with a big smile. "I could use some," she said, following her brother down the porch to where he and Bruce had both pulled their mattresses out onto the porch.
"So, you like ktang?" Bruce asked as he produced a bottle.
"We've learned to like it," John said, taking the bottle and gulping down a big swig. "Tastes like shit, but it sure is effective."
"You'll learn to love the taste," Bruce assured him as he passed the bottle to Mary.
"Oh, that tastes so awful, it's good," Mary said after taking a big swallow.
Down the porch they heard Steve and Sara laughing as they pulled their mattress out onto the porch.
"Do you really usually sleep out here?" Mary asked, sitting cross-legged, her t-shirt hiked up around her hips.
"If there's a breeze, it's going to be out here," Bruce explained. "It's more like sleeping outdoors without having to worry about animals and insects."
The bottle continued to pass from one to the next as they sat in companionable silence, listening to the night sounds and the soft susurrations of the river as it continued its timeless, unabated flow.
Down at the other end of the porch, they heard some laughter. Looking, Mary could make out Steve on top of Sara, her legs up on his shoulders as he fucked her.
"You don't worry about privacy?" Mary asked.
"There's always inside if you want privacy," Bruce said with a shrug. "I'll be right back," he said, getting to his feet and disappearing into his room.
"How are you doing?" John asked Mary, seeing how she was looking without looking down the porch to where Steve and Sara were fucking.
"Good," Mary replied. "The ktang really helped."
"What about?" John asked, flicking his head in Bruce's direction.
"No bad feelings," Mary replied sotto voce. "He's deep, though. There's more to him than meets the eye. Is it going to bother you if I..."
"You mean when you?" John asked, laughing.
"Here we are," Bruce said as he reappeared, sitting down and dropping another bottle of ktang between them, as well as a finely carved wood box.
"Weed!" John said when the smell hit him as Bruce opened the box.
"You like?" Bruce asked as he began to roll a spliff.
"Yeah," John replied. "I hadn't smoked it in a long time until we visited Charlene. Drug testing in the sports programs at school."
"It goes well with ktang," Mary said, taking a slug off the bottle before handing it to John.
"Doesn't everything?" Bruce asked with a laugh. "Here you go," he said when he finished rolling the spliff, offering it to John.
"Mmm, tasty," John said after lighting it and taking a big hit, then another before passing it to Mary.
"That's just what I need, a nice smoke," Sara said as she approached, wearing only an abbreviated sarong-type of wrap that tied on one hip and barely came down to her upper thighs, really just a token of material so that she wasn't entirely nude. Her B-cup breasts were bare with small, pale pink nipples. "Mind if I join you?" she asked as she sank down to sit cross-legged next to Bruce, facing John and Mary.
"Of course not," Mary replied automatically, knowing that John was just as able to see Sara's spread, glistening pussy as she was.
"A smoke is perfect right now," she said, accepting the spliff from Mary. "Do your parents smoke or know that you do?" Sara asked after taking a big hit.
"Not that I know," Mary replied. "If they do smoke, they're really good at hiding it."
"How do you think they'd react to finding out that you smoke?" Sara asked, taking another hit and then offering it to John.
"Probably the usual, then total acceptance with a warning to be careful," Mary replied, at which John burst out laughing.
"That's perfect, Mary," he said, "though I'd bet they'd really like it if they don't already."
"Why do you say that?" Sara asked, reaching forward for the bottle of ktang.
"I just think deep down inside, they're fun people," John said. "They control it, trying to set a good example for us, but it's hard to miss."
"I've seen mom after a bit too much wine," Mary said. "She's pretty funny."
The bottle of ktang circled, as did the spliff. Another spliff was rolled and Mary found herself drifting off. At one point she sort of woke up, thought she saw Bruce with his face between his mother's legs, then passed out again, not waking up until the sun came streaming in in the morning, Bruce and John sprawled on the mattresses nearby, Sara nowhere to be seen.
Staggering to her feet, Mary decided to make her way down to the river to soak her head. Just as she was opening the screen door to the porch, she heard Bruce's voice.
"Want some company?" he asked.
"Sure," Mary replied. "I'm going down to the river."
"I figured that," Bruce replied, getting to his feet. "Head hurt?" he asked as they made the 2-minute walk to the river.
"No, but it's a bit foggy," Mary admitted.
"This will definitely make you feel better," Bruce said, dropping his shorts when they arrived at his spot and sinking into the cool river water.
"We definitely have nothing like this in Nkopola," Mary said, arching her back and stretching with her arms over her head after stripping, not noticing the way Bruce's eyes carefully examined her as he licked his lips.
"I can't imagine living anywhere else," Bruce said as Mary sat in the river next to him, leaning back on her elbows, the tips of her hard, ruby nipples just breaking the surface of the running water.
"I told you this would be where they were," Sara's voice said as she appeared not a minute later, followed by John. "This is the best place to start the day and I don't do it often enough anymore," she said, untying the small sarong-type thing that was tied around her waist and walking into the river.
Mary found it impossible not to notice Sara's long, pale, almost translucent, pink pussy lips when she bent over to splash water onto her face before sitting down, the pale nipples on her breasts knurling into knots as the river's cool water slid over them. She had to bring her hand to her face when she saw the looks on Sara's and Bruce's faces when John stripped, his huge cock dangling in front of him as he walked into the river and sat down between herself and Sara.
"Tonight's our weekly Thursday market," Sara informed them. "People come from all over the area with agricultural and textile goods. It's a very colorful market and a great place to eat some truly local food."
"We went to the Chipita market," Mary said. "Is it like that?"
"Yes, only bigger and more textiles," Bruce replied. "The further north you go from here, the more totally agricultural it gets."
"What are your plans today?" Sara asked. "I have to go soon and help Steve at the mission."
"I thought I'd take them to Bolero so that they could see how the whole valley lays out, then up the escarpment to see it from that point of view," Bruce replied.
"Can we watch the sunset from the river again?" Mary asked.
"Definitely," Bruce replied.
"Then we'll meet the three of you at the house after sunset and go to the market together," Sara said as she stood up.
When John turned his head to look at her, directly in front of him only a foot away were Sara's long pussy lips hanging down and gaping slightly open, droplets of water dripping from them into the river. Mary saw this and her eyes immediately moved to her brother's cock, which was predictably growing, rapidly.
Either Sara didn't notice or she chose not to show that she noticed as she walked out of the river, bending over to pick up her wisp of material, once more giving everyone a good eyeful of spreading pussy and rosebud before she walked off down the trail towards the house.
"Uh, don't worry about that," Bruce said, his eyes on John's now full-sized cock. "She has that effect on most people. I'm not immune, either," he said, kneeling up to show that his cock, too, was half hard.
"Your mother is remarkably relaxed about herself," Mary observed, her eyes on Bruce's cock on her right, then flicking to John's on her left.
"Mom and dad are totally Malawian in their attitudes towards the body and sex," Bruce explained. "They never hid it from me. I've seen them having sex since as long as I have memories."
"Yet the sight of your mother's pussy turned you on?" Mary asked.
"Damn, Mary, only a dead man wouldn't be turned on by a pussy like that," John exploded.
"I've heard that said about her, too," Bruce said, a big smile on his face. "I've even heard men say that they can die now after a Friendship ceremony."
"Friendship ceremony?" Mary asked.
"You don't know what that is?" Bruce asked, his eyes wide in surprise.
"We've heard our parents mention it, but not really," John replied.
"I think the best way to explain a Friendship ceremony is to take you to one," Bruce said slowly. "Mom and dad have one or two a week, so it won't be long. Telling you would really ruin it in a way."
"Now my curiosity is really piqued," Mary said.
"Ready for some sightseeing?" Bruce asked.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I preferred the view from Bolero looking back east towards Rhumpi," John replied in answer to Steve's question as they walked into town for the market that evening. "It just felt more impressive with that rift declivity right in the middle of the valley floor. I think I got some great shots of it."
"I agree," Mary said. "The escarpment view is greater, but the view from Bolero is more awe-inspiring. I'm glad I got to see them both."
"Do you like spicy food?" Sara asked.
"I do," John replied.
"A bit, but not too much," Mary answered.
"This is one of our favorite places to eat," Sara said, stopping in front of one of the ubiquitous food stalls in the market, "but it's a bit on the spicy side."
"Let's give it a try," John said. "We can always drink more beer if it's too spicy."
The meal was served in a big bowl, a lamb stew with potatoes, carrots, onions, garlic, and several other vegetables and spices that were unfamiliar. One thing was certain, though, it was mind-blowingly delicious. Two 16oz beers each later and a couple of bottles of ktang between them and they were all sated and feeling no pain.
"That's the best not-home-cooked meal I've had yet," John said as they resumed a leisurely stroll through the market after eating.
"You can find that kind of cooking from here south to the border," Bruce explained. "This is where the great central plain starts. North of here the food's not quite as exciting. Mozambique is the spiciest food in the region with Zambia being the most moderate. Northern Malawi cooking is influenced by Zambia to a large degree, and northern Malawi starts right here at the escarpment we were on today."
"You really know this place, don't you?" John asked.
"I try to," Bruce replied. "I can't even explain it, but sometimes I feel like I'm going to just explode. I get these overwhelming feelings of joy, or love, for and about Malawi. I always hated having to go back to the States for school."
"Wow, I think that's great," Mary said, nodding inside as she remembered her words to her brother about hidden depths. "I'm still in the totally blown away phase."
"Me, too," Bruce said.
"Hey, didn't they have a tent like that in Chipita?" Mary asked, indicating the larger tent set back from the road.
"Looks like it, doesn't it?" John agreed.
"You know that tent?" Bruce asked.
"Well, does it have a sort of see-thru wall running down the middle, men on one side, women on the other?" John asked.
"You went in?" Steve asked.
"With Greg," John replied, nodding.
"And you?" Sara asked, smiling at Mary's suddenly flushed cheeks.
"Charlene took me in," Mary almost croaked, feeling as though her face was flaming.
"Not Susan?" Sara asked.
"She was already there," Mary said.
"What did you think of it?" Sara asked.
"I was amazed," Mary replied. "I'd never imagined anything like that."
"Did you enjoy it?" Sara asked. "Would you want to see it again?"
"Oh! I-I-I..." Mary stammered.
"I'd be happy to go with you," Sara said, taking her arm. "It's the best part of the market, after all."
"How did you like it?" Steve asked John.
"Pretty strange, but pretty cool at the same time," John replied. "I don't get the wall in the middle, though. I mean, you can see perfectly everything on the other side. Why bother with the wall?"
"So that people can pretend," Sara replied. "The partition is all about plausible deniability. No harm, no foul."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"There are a lot more people here," John observed, seeing more than a dozen facing the partition and another dozen or so milling around, drinking beer and ktang, smoking spliffs.
"Let's get some drinks," Bruce suggested, leading the way to the bar in the corner and acquiring three beers and a bottle of ktang.
"Most people come here after doing their shopping and eating," Steve explained. "It's easy to be here for 2-3 hours, having a drink, talking with people that you know, taking trips to the wall."
"I don't think Nkopola has anything like this," John said.
"I guarantee you that it does," Steve said. "If there's a market, this tent is there."
"Well, I'm sure going to find out," John said, hitting the ktang and then washing it down with the beer.
"Do you prefer to spectate or also join in?" Steve asked.
"I don't mind joining in," John admitted with a grin.
"Come on," Steve said, heading for the partition. "Better spread out," he suggested. "Three white cocks all at once are going to cause a stir."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, my!" Mary gasped when she and Sara entered the ladies side, only it wasn't just ladies. There were at least half a dozen men, a few of whom were on their knees at the partition sucking the cocks that were sticking through.
"The Tumbuka tribe is the predominant tribe in this area," Sara explain in a soft voice as they wandered over to the bar in the corner and got a bottle of ktang and a couple of beers. "In their culture, sex is the only thing that matters, no matter whether it's heterosexual or homosexual. There is absolutely no stigma attached to it one way or the other. In their culture, if it feels good and both parties agree, it's all good."
"Wow," Mary said, gulping from the ktang. "I've never seen..." she started to say, then her voice trailed off and her mouth dropped open.
Turning to follow where Mary's eyes were pointed, Sara saw a man on his knees holding a cum-spurting cock in both hands, directing the flow onto his extended tongue. He then closed his lips on it and sucked it down into his throat.
"I'd say that you have now," Sara said with a chuckle. "Does that bother you?" she asked.
"N-no, it doesn't bother me," Mary said. "It's just so strange to see."
"Would you like to?" Sara asked, indicating the wall with her eyes.
"Oh! Well, I, I..." Mary stammered, feeling her face flush.
"I plan on it," Sara said. "There's nothing that says that you have to. You're welcome to sit and watch, enjoy the show."
"You do this?" Mary asked.
"Every week," Sara replied with a laugh. "I can remember many a time with Susan and Charlene, sucking cocks until our jaws just couldn't do it anymore. Do you enjoy sucking cocks?" Sara asked. "There are women who don't."
"No, I do like it," Mary admitted, blushing.
"Ah, here's our chance," Sara said when there was a stir and the people were rushing towards the partition. "That must be the boys. Their white cocks will be popular. Now we can have our choice of the rest," she said, moving towards the partition.
Mary followed, butterflies in her stomach, feeling her pussy getting wet as she thought about what she was about to do. Sara stopped and dropped to her knees in front of a nice-looking ebony cock that was throbbing through the partition. Turning her head to smile at Mary as she wrapped a hand around the shaft, Mary watched as Sara extended her tongue beneath the cock, letting it slide onto her tongue and into her mouth before she wrapped her lips around the shaft and pushed forward, burying her face against the partition as she took the entire cock into her mouth.
There were two dark cocks sticking through the partition next to Sara and Mary decided on the shorter, thicker one, mostly because of the big bubble of pre-cum that she saw forming, ready to drip from the slit. She barely managed to drop to her knees and extend her tongue when it dripped. Mary followed it, jamming the sharp tip of her tongue into the slit of the ebony cock before wrapping her mouth around the head and tasting it.
Mary felt her pussy almost flowing as her excitement mounted as she sucked the ebony cock that was sticking through the partition. On either side of her, other people were doing the same, men as well as women. Looking up, her mouth filled with thick, ebony cock, Mary could easily see the middle-aged man attached to the other end of the cock.
A minute or so later, Mary heard a groan and a gurgle. Glancing to her right as she continued to suck the cock in her mouth, she saw Sara run a thickly cum-coated tongue around the head of the cock that was still spurting cum into her mouth. Shuddering, Mary felt herself cum and then the cock in her mouth began pumping hot, thick cum. She was moaning in her throat as she sucked and gulped cum, sucking it off until there was no more cum to be had before finally sitting back on her heels, gasping for breath as she continued to swallow, clearing her mouth of cum.
"The first one's always the best, I think," Sara said, licking her lips as she smiled at Mary. "Did you enjoy that? Was it good?"
"Yes," Mary replied, smiling.
"Shall we get something to drink before the next one," Sara asked, reaching out and scraping a bit of cum that had escaped from the corner of Mary's mouth onto her finger before bringing it to her own mouth to softly suck on, "or are you feeling wicked?"
"I think I'm feeling wicked," Mary replied, giggling, her face flushing.
"You're going to do fine in Malawi," Sara said, smiling as they both turned towards the partition where other ebony cocks were waiting to be serviced.
Mary had sucked off another ebony cock and was on her third when she felt lips nibbling at her ear from behind and a hand sliding down to cup her naked ass beneath her skirt.
"I see that you're enjoying yourself," Bruce whispered in her ear.
"B-B-Bruce!" Mary sputtered, keeping hold of the cock she had been sucking.
"Are you here to watch us or join us?" Sara asked, turning from the cock that she had been sucking, also her third.
"Both," Bruce replied, to which Sara laughed, turning back to continue sucking. "Come on, don't be shy," he said, giving Mary's ass a squeeze, his fingers sliding to the side just enough for him to graze her delicate, dripping pussy lips with the tips of his fingers.
Moaning as she came from the contact with his fingers on her pussy, Mary took the ebony cock back into her mouth and continued sucking on it. Bruce was gently sliding his fingers up and down between her pussy lips, just barely touching them as she continued to suck. She heard Sara slurping cum as the cock she had been sucking came, almost immediately followed by the cock she was sucking also letting loose, cum streaming into her mouth as she continued to suck the cock off, Bruce's fingers continuing their teasing journey up and down between her pussy lips.
Sara finished sucking off the cock she had been working on and turned to watch as Mary finished, smiling at her son as he watched from right behind Mary's ear.
"That was pretty hot," Bruce breathed when Mary finished and sat back gasping for breath.
Mary's eyes were glazed as she turned to look at Bruce just as he brought the fingers that had been teasing her pussy to his mouth and softly sucked on them.
"Really delicious," he said, then surprised her by leaning forward and kissing her, his tongue pushing between her lips into her mouth which was still thickly coated with the cum from the cock that she had just finished sucking.
"Wow, that was a surprise," Mary breathed when he broke the increasingly deep kiss a minute or so later.
"Hopefully a good one," Bruce said, smiling at her.
"Definitely yes," Mary replied, blushing.
"Ready for a break?" Sara asked. "I'm thirsty for something that isn't cum."
"That sounds good to me, too," Mary agreed, laughing.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Man, that was totally crazy," John said, laughing with Steve after his cock had been sucked for the second time.
"I told you they were going to go crazy for white cock," Steve told him, "especially that monster of yours. Damn!"
"I wonder if the girls are waiting for us," John mused, taking a gulp from the ktang and then washing it down with beer.
"That might be where Bruce is," Steve said. "We can check."
"I thought maybe you were going to spend the night in there," Sara said when Steve and John appeared.
"Been waiting long?" Steve asked, putting his arm around Sara's shoulders and kissing her.
"No, not really," Sara replied.
"Have fun?" Steve asked.
"You know how I love markets," Sara replied.
Mary was dying to talk with John but saw no opportunity as they slowly walked back to the house. When they got there, the others pulled their mattresses out onto the screened porch.
"Would you like some help with the mattress?" Sara asked as she and Steve dropped theirs.
"Sure, thanks," Mary replied, helping to drag it out and lay it down right next to theirs.
"You can sleep anywhere you like," Sara told her. "You don't have to sleep on this mattress. You're welcome to join us if you want to be warmer, or Bruce and John."
"Thanks," Mary said.
"I want to give you a gift, if you'll let me," Sara said, beaming a smile.
"What is it?" Mary asked.
"Come with me," Sara said, going into her bedroom, Mary trailing after.
Going over to a cardboard box, Sara picked it up and emptied it onto a chair.
"Oh! They're so beautiful," Mary said, reaching out to feel one of the many half-sarong-like wraps that Sara had been wearing the day before. A few of them were almost knee length.
"Which type would you like?" Sara asked, holding up an example of each. "Here, try them on," she suggested.
Mary quickly shrugged out of her skirt and pulled her t-shirt off over her head to stand naked in front of Sara. After sucking cocks side by side with her for an hour, she didn't feel the least bit shy or embarrassed. Taking the longer example, Mary tied it around her waist and then looked at herself in the mirror. She then tried one of the shorter ones, a soft green one, actually blushing when she saw how exposed it could leave her, yet also turned on by how sexy it looked, and felt.
"I think I like this style the best," Mary said. "Do you think it's too much."
"I guess that depends upon you," Sara replied. "If it bothers you that it exposes too much, then it's too much. This isn't something that you'd wear to town or anything, it's for around the house, your own private space. It's just enough so that you don't feel totally naked."
"What will they think?" Mary asked, obviously asking about the men.
"They'll think how incredibly delicious you look, I'd imagine," Sara replied, smiling.
"That's what Bruce said," Mary said.
"Did he?" Sara asked.
"Yes, in the tent tonight," Mary replied.
"Nothing happened in the tent tonight," Sara admonished softly. "The tent is another dimension that doesn't really exist. That's the beauty of it. Since it doesn't exist, nothing could possibly happen and nobody need ever feel uncomfortable or awkward."
"I see," Mary breathed, her eyes wide.
"Usually nobody will ever mention anything about the tent other than that they visited, if that," Sara said.
"Join us for a smoke?" Bruce said, sticking his head in the room. "Wow, nice!" he said when he saw Mary.
"Thanks," Mary replied, blushing.
"That sounds like a good idea," Sara said, pulling her t-shirt off and exchanging her skirt for the same wisp of material that she had given to Mary, only hers was a very light blue. "I'll be along. Let me check on Steve," she said.
After tossing her clothes into her room, Mary made her way down the porch a bit nervously to where John and Bruce were sprawled on their mattresses. John's eyes widened when he saw what she was wearing, but otherwise said nothing, for which she was grateful. Sitting with her back to the wall between them but almost facing Bruce, Mary quickly realized that there was no way to sit without being exposed unless she really exaggerated, which didn't make much sense in light of choosing to wear something so revealing. She tried not to think about it, but she knew that to one degree or another, Bruce had a good view of her pussy.
She shouldn't care, after all, she told herself. Not after the tent. But Sara said the tent never happened, she reminded herself. And most of all, she wanted him to see her, she realized as she accepted the bottle of ktang that he passed her, leaning back, one leg bent Indian fashion, the other foot flat on the mattress so that she could rest her elbow on her knee. She could feel the faint hint of a breeze in her spread pussy.
Passing the ktang to John, Mary accepted the spliff from Bruce that he had just rolled, smiling inside when she saw his eyes dart down to look at her pussy. She could feel her juices running down over her rosebud.
"Have you decided on any plans yet?" Sara asked when she arrived, sinking down between Bruce and John, but closer to John, her thigh almost touching his.
"We're going to do the Vwaza Marsh Wildlife Reserve first," Bruce replied. "Probably camp at Lake Kazuni for a few nights."
"That place is right out of Hollywood, it's so surreal," Sara said with a sigh. "I envy you. I wish I could get away and join you."
"It sounds magical," Mary said.
"Anyone who can get there deserves the rewards of all of the hard work it takes," Sara said. "That's why it's so special. There's no easy way to get there, so it remains natural and unspoiled. When are you going to go?"
"That depends," Bruce replied. "They don't know what a Friendship ceremony is."
"Really!" Sara exclaimed. "Don't your parents..."
"Well, they've mentioned it, but that's all," Mary said. "Not what it is or anything."
"I thought that if you were having one, they could attend," Bruce continued.
"Of course," Sara said. "Other than participating in one, attending one is the best way to learn about it. We're having one tomorrow night, in fact."
"That's perfect," Bruce said. "We can head to the Vwaza the day after that."
They finished the bottle of ktang and the spliff, just enjoying the night sounds. Sara lay back, one leg bent at the knee, her pussy with its long lips totally exposed. John relaxed onto his side, propped up on his elbow, Sara's bent leg resting against his chest.
Mary realized that she had slumped down the wall onto her elbows, her feet flat on the mattress shoulder-width apart. Bruce had rolled onto his stomach and was staring at her open pussy just a foot away from his face. Mary felt her pussy get wet and moved her feet further apart, wanly smiling at Bruce when his eyes opened in surprise and he glanced up at her.
Bruce glanced over at John and saw that he wasn't paying any attention. Slowly he inched himself forward. Mary reacted by moving her feet even further apart, her pussy spreading open now. She glanced over at John and saw that his attention was on Sara's pussy. When she could feel Bruce's breath on her pussy, he looked up at her.
Mary responded to Bruce's look by lifting her feet and bringing her knees to her chest, making the invitation clear. She was holding her breath, her mouth hanging open as she watched him slowly drag his tongue up between her spread pussy lips and then over her hypersensitive clit. John looked up when he heard his sister's soft moan when Bruce slid his tongue into her, drinking her flowing juices.
"Ahh," Sara said softly as she pushed up onto her elbows and saw what was taking place. "Does that bother you?" she asked.
"No," John replied, shaking his head as he watched Bruce eat Mary's pussy. "It's pretty hot, actually."
"Maybe you'd like to do the same?" Sara suggested as she sat up, one hand between her legs, the other sliding over John's thigh to feel his hard cock, sticking her fingers from between her legs into his mouth when he gasped in surprise.
"Mmm, yes," John said when he tasted Sara's pussy juices on the fingers she stuck into his mouth.
"Why don't you take these off," Sara suggested, tugging at his shorts. "Oh, my, that's much better," she said when she saw his fully hard cock.
Before John knew what was happening, Sara was laying on top of him, his cock in her mouth, while right in front of him her long pussy lips were gaping open. He could see the glistening pinkness of her pussy, the juices drooling from her hole, running down to drip from her fat clit onto his extended tongue as he stuck it into her, sucking on her long pussy lips, drinking her musky juices as she sucked his cock.
John was peripherally aware that Sara was taking his whole cock into her mouth, but he was so lost in eating her pussy that it almost went unnoticed. Like Charlene, Sara's pussy was made to be eaten. He loved sucking on her long pussy lips, sucking on her clit and being rewarded with another cascade of thick musky juices.
"Oh, yes," Mary sighed as Bruce crawled up her body, lifting her legs up onto his shoulders as he lowered his face to kiss her, his cock finding and sliding into her hot, tight pussy.
Sara lifted up enough that John could look down and see Bruce's cock sliding in and out of Mary's pussy. Then she moved down until she was kneeling, straddling his hips. John could see her long pussy lips hanging down, gaping apart. He thought that he was going to lose control as he watched Sara reach down beneath herself and guide the head of his cock between those long, gaping pussy lips, rubbing it back and forth a few times before placing it at the entrance to her pussy.
"Oh, man!" John gasped when he felt Sara's pussy suck his cock in as she lowered herself. He had never felt anything like it, not even Susan as Sara began to fuck him. Her pussy was like a hot, wet, living entity, gripping his cock tightly, seeming to suck it as she lifted each time.
"Here it comes," John heard Bruce gasp.
Pushing up onto his elbows as Sara continued to fuck herself on his cock, John peered past her to see Mary lowering her legs and struggling to sit up. Before she could capture Bruce's cock in her mouth, one stream of cum splashed across her nose and cheek. Mary was gulping down Bruce's cum when she glanced over to see Sara riding up and down on John's cock, John peering around her to watch as she finished sucking Bruce off.
John groaned, then leaned back on his elbows, his head thrown back as he began to pump cum into Sara's hydraulic pussy as she milked him. It was an exquisite experience and he found himself gasping at the energy it took to keep cumming so hard. When he finally finished cumming, he collapsed onto his back, breathing hard, feeling Sara's pussy continue to squeeze his cock.
"Oh, wow!" Mary gasped from her kneeling position, scraping the cum that Bruce had splashed across her face into her mouth as he turned and leaned over as his mother rose up off of John's cock, cum streaming from her gaping pussy.
John groaned when he felt his cock disappear into a mouth and down a throat, not yet realizing that it was Bruce. Mary stared in awe as Bruce expertly finished sucking John off, then raised his attention to his mother's gaping pussy as she lay back on top of John. She could see Sara's long pussy lips stretching as Bruce tugged on them, sucking on them as he slurped up the cum cocktail that filled her.
Mary moved closer, kneeling beside them, watching as Bruce continued to eat his mother's pussy, not lifting his face until it was all glistening pink and clean. John opened his eyes to see Mary and smiled at her.
"Oh, shit!" he gasped when he felt his cock once again vacuumed into Bruce's mouth, this time realizing who it was.
"That was, was..." Mary started to say.
"Really nice," Bruce finished, kneeling between the spread legs of both John and his mother.
"I'll say," Mary agreed. "You sure know how to eat pussy, I'll give you that."
"It's a passion of mine," Bruce replied, laughing.
"But you also suck cock," Mary said.
"Another passion of mine," Bruce replied.
"Well, I can say that I never expected the evening to end up like this," Sara said, rolling off of John, "but I'm sure glad it did. My pussy appreciated both your tongue and your cock."
"This is sort of awkward," John said as he sat up.
"There's no need," Sara said. "You enjoyed it? It made you feel better? There's never awkwardness or guilt associated with that."
"But, but incest," Mary said.
"A bogeyman necessarily created to deal with consanguinity problems in the past," Sara replied. "In this day and age, contraception is easy, so those reasons sort of fall by the wayside when it comes to consenting adults."
"It's good to hear you say it like that," Mary said, sighing. "I, we...well, we've been..."
"There's no need to feel any guilt whatsoever," Sara assured her. "You're adults, capable of making decisions about your lives. Frankly, I don't blame either of you. You're beautiful..."
"And incredibly delicious," Bruce added with a smile, "not to mention really tight."
"And John," Sara continued, shaking her head. "Your cock is better than your tongue, though not by much. What a gift!"
"And you're what, bisexual?" Mary asked Bruce.
"I suppose that's as good a word as any," Bruce agreed. "I'm Tumbuka Malawian. Their chief god is Chiuta, which means Great Bow of Heaven. They don't really differentiate; it's all just sex, a way of communing with the creator. Tumbuka are just as comfortable with either sex."
"This country just keeps getting stranger and stranger," John said with a sigh. "And I keep liking it more and more. What does that say about me?"
"That there's hope for you," Sara said with a laugh as she got to her feet. "I'm going to get some sleep. Thank you," she said, leaning over and licking John's lips before kissing him.
"I should be thanking you," John said.
"You can do that by never hesitating to do it again," Sara said, smiling as she turned and walked down the porch to where Steve was asleep on their mattress.
"I hope I haven't been out of line," John said when Sara had gone. "I mean, she is your mother."
"Not at all," Bruce assured him. "When it comes to sex, Malawians are free, married or not, to do what they want with whomever they want. It's only sex. Did it bother you that Mary and I..."
"No," John said. "She may be my sister, but I love watching her have sex."
"Maybe I should go down to my mattress to be safe tonight," Mary suggested coyly.
"That safety would only be relative," Bruce said. "Saying no is allowed. Just because Malawians are very free and easy about sex doesn't mean that they are compelled to accept any advance that is made. They're still free to pick and choose, it's just that there's no stigma at all in doing so."
"Well, I was safe enough last night," Mary said.
Mary drifted off as John and Bruce smoked and talked. She was not the least bit displeased that Bruce woke her twice during the night to fuck her, cumming in her mouth each time. Morning found her on her knees with Bruce fucking her from behind, John propped up on his elbows watching, his cock hard and throbbing in time to his pulse.
When Bruce pulled his cock from Mary's pussy and spun her around, feeding his cock into her mouth, John had had enough. Staring at his sister's pussy gaping open in front of him was the straw that broke the camel's back. Getting to his knees, he heard Mary gurgling on the cum that was gushing into her mouth as she gulped it down. Bruce grinned at him when he saw John get behind Mary and feed his cock into her pussy.
Mary moaned around Bruce's spurting cock when she felt her brother's cock filling her pussy. John was so worked up from listening to Mary fucking during the night and now watching her, that he felt himself getting to the point of losing control rather quickly. Mary had just finished sucking Bruce off when John began to fill her pussy with his own cum.
"Wonderful!" Sara said, having walked up just as John began to cum.
Mary knelt with her chest and face pressed into the mattress as John finished filling her pussy. She was gasping when he finally pulled his cock from her. She moaned when Bruce immediately replaced John's cock with his own mouth, sucking on her pussy, drinking up the cum cocktail that filled her.
"You're so lucky to have each other," Sara said as she watched her son eating Mary's pussy.
"Don't I know it," John said, watching as Bruce finished eating Mary's pussy. "Oh, man!" he gasped when Bruce turned and inhaled his cock, taking all of it into his mouth and sucking on him, milking him with his mouth and throat before sitting back, his cock now glistening, cleaned of the cum cocktail that had coated it.
"What are you going to do today?" Sara asked when they had finished and were all sitting, leaning back on their hands.
"We'll get everything together for Vwaza tomorrow," Bruce replied.
"Don't forget that there's a Friendship ceremony tonight," Sara reminded him.
"We won't," Bruce assured her.
The three of them went down to the river to bathe, then spent the day carefully gathering and packing what they would take with them the next day when they went to the Vwaza Marsh Wildlife & Game Reserve. Because of the topography, there were few roads inside the Reserve's periphery, so everything that they wanted to take with them, they would have to carry, food included.
While much of Vwaza is located on low-lying flat ground, the eastern side of the park is hilly and covers an area of 1,000 km2. The Reserve is characterized by the Mopane and Miombo woodlands and marshy wetlands which attract a significant number of birds. Notable birdlife includes openbill storks, the rare, white-winged starling, trumpeter hornbill, Carp's black tit, Hueglin's robin, several warblers, and Goliath herons. Typically, there are large herds of elephants, Cape buffaloes, and a large variety of antelope, including greater kudu, Lichtenstein's hartebeest, roan, eland, and impala. There are also lions, leopards, crocodiles, and warthogs, as well as a hippopotamus pod in Lake Kazuni in the southeast part of the Reserve where the entrance is located. The only road ends at the entrance.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Is there anything that you can tell us about this Friendship ceremony?" Mary asked after they had once again bathed at the river.
"No details, but this is not a regular Friendship ceremony," Bruce replied. "This is a Tumbuka Friendship ceremony," Bruce explained. "There are minor differences in how each of the tribes conducts their Friendship ceremony, but the Tumbuka ceremony is the most different.
"John, you're welcome to bring your camera," Steve said as they got ready to go. "I made it a point to ask, as I thought you'd enjoy recording this."
"That's great, Steve," John said. "Thanks," heading for his camera bag and returning with his CN-E14.5-60mm T2.6 L SP lens mounted on one of the Mark II bodies.
It was only a 10-minute drive across the river to a group of homes built around a circular common area. In the center of the common area was a raised, tiled dais approximately eight feet long and three feet wide, on top of which was piled carpets, on which was placed bowls and dishes of a variety of hors d'oeuvres. There was a bar set up to the side.
There were perhaps a dozen people present and John and Mary enjoyed meeting everyone and talking with them, always pleased by how welcoming and encouraging everyone was about their being in Malawi and especially at the Friendship ceremony. They were also pleased to see that they both drank ktang, chased by beer, and seemed to enjoy it. They seemed most excited to find out that this would be their first Friendship ceremony.
John had been taking pictures while they socialized. After about an hour, nothing being said, the hors d'oeuvres were cleared away.
"You'll want to be taking pictures now," Bruce said, moving up next to John and Mary.
Steve and Sara were standing by the table with two of the couples, both of which seemed to be in their 30s. To John and Mary's surprise, they all undressed, then deliberately posed for John to take pictures of them all together. Mary was impressed to see that one of the men had a cock larger than John's, while the other wasn't quite as long, but was much thicker. One of the women was short with large breasts, while the other was lanky with smaller breasts, though her pussy lips could be seen hanging down.
Sara moved over to the table and sat on the edge, leaning back on her hands as she brought her feet up onto the edge of the table, as wide as the table would allow, totally opening and exposing her pussy, her long pussy lips petaling open to show the glistening pink interior.
"I offer Friendship," the man with the larger cock said, moving to stand in front of Sara.
"I accept Friendship," Sara replied, smiling as the man began to slide the head of his cock up and down between her spread pussy lips.
Everyone gathered close to watch as he fed his cock into Sara's pussy, eagerly making room for John and his camera. The man's cock quickly picked up a sheen from Sara's pussy as he fucked her. Laying back on the pile of carpets, the man's wife climbed up onto the table and planted her pussy on Sara's mouth, facing her husband who continued to fuck her.
John was only six inches from where Sara's pussy was being filled when the man began to cum. He could see and got pictures of the cum seeping from around the ebony shaft of the cock as it continued to pump cum into Sara's pussy. Because his focus was on what he was seeing through the camera, John was surprised when Steve leaned into view when the man pulled his cock from Sara's pussy, now oozing cum as it glistened wetly.
John could hear Mary's intake of breath when Steve took the man's cock into his mouth, sucking on it, slowly but surely taking it into his mouth and throat until his nose was pressing up against the man's belly. Slowly pulling back, his cheeks hollow as he sucked, Steve let the man's cock fall from his mouth, then lowered his face to glue his mouth to Sara's cum-filled pussy.
Mary could feel her pussy getting wet as she watched Sara getting fucked, then seeing Steve suck the man's cock before eating Sara's cum-filled pussy.
"We are Friends," the man said when Steve finished eating Sara's pussy and stood up, licking his lips.
"We are Friends," Sara agreed, a smile on her face.
"We are Friends," the woman said, having climbed down off of the table.
"We are Friends," Sara replied.
"I offer Friendship," the other man with the fat cock said, standing forward to take his place in front of Sara's still-spread pussy.
"I accept Friendship," Sara replied, licking her lips as she looked down to watch him feed his fat, ebony cock into her pussy.
"We are Friends," the man said when he had finished fucking Sara, filling her with cum, and was then sucked clean by Steve before Steve once again ate Sara's creampied pussy.
"We are Friends," Sara agreed.
"We are Friends," the woman said, having climbed down off the table and Sara's talented tongue.
"We are Friends," Sara agreed.
There was much murmuring and offers of congratulations as Sara climbed down off the table.
"That's a Friendship ceremony?" Mary asked, staring wide-eyed at Bruce.
"Half of it anyway," Bruce replied with a smile. "How do you like it so far?"
"Got, it's so hot!" Mary breathed. "Fucking like that, in front of everyone. God! And your father! I almost came watching him."
"You're going to love the rest, then," Bruce said as Steve climbed up onto the pile of carpets and lay back, his ass hanging over the edge of the table, his feet up and spread as wide as the table would allow, his balls hanging down towards his rosebud, his hard cock pointing at the sky. The short woman with the big breasts leaned over Steve's face.
"I offer Friendship," she said.
"I accept Friendship," Steve replied.
"I offer Friendship," her husband, the man with the large cock said.
"I accept Friendship," Steve replied.
The woman climbed up onto the table and knelt over Steve's head, facing his feet. John was right behind her with his camera as she lowered her pussy onto Steve's extended tongue, then bent over to take his cock into her mouth. After a minute or so, her husband moved close to the table and pressed his cock against Steve's rosebud.
Mary was holding and squeezing Bruce's hand as she watched wide-eyed as slowly but surely the man's entire cock disappeared into Steve's ass. While Steve continued to eat the man's wife's pussy, the man slowly but surely began to fuck his ass, driving every inch of his big ebony cock into Steve's ass.
After several minutes the woman moved off of Steve's face and moved down to mount his cock while her husband continued to fuck him in the ass. Minutes passed and then Steve groaned, arching his hips as he came in the woman's pussy. When she had milked him dry, she moved back up his body and planted her now cum-filled pussy on Steve's mouth. At the same time, the man pulled his cock from Steve's ass and moved around to the other end of the table, placing his cock in the crack of his wife's ass while Steve continued to eat her cum-filled pussy.
Mary had followed him and was standing behind where John was kneeling with his camera when the man began to cum, thick hot cum splashing into the crack of his wife's ass, then running down onto her pussy and then into Steve's mouth as he continued to eat her pussy.
"We are Friends," the woman said after she climbed down off of the table.
"We are Friends," Steve replied.
"We are Friends," the man said.
"We are Friends," Steve replied.
"Wow!" Mary whispered, trembling next to Bruce as she gripped his hand in both of hers.
"You like?" Bruce asked.
"I've never seen anything like it before," Mary replied.
"But did you like it?" Bruce asked.
"Yes," Mary replied.
The other couple now took their turn, the woman on top of Steve in a 69, her husband slowly filling Steve's ass with his thick ebony cock. Mary found that her pussy was wetter and wetter, as were her inner thighs, as she watched. Seeing Steve's tongue sliding up and down between her long, dark pussy lips caused her knees to tremble. Once again, Steve filled the woman's pussy with cum and she moved to plant her pussy on his mouth, while the man had pulled his cock from his ass and moved around to spray his cum into the crack of his wife's ass while Steve continued to eat her pussy.
"We are Friends," the woman said after she had climbed down off the table.
"We are Friends," Steve said.
"We are Friends," the man said.
"We are Friends," Steve replied.
Mary had never been hornier as she endured the next hour of socializing. When everyone finally dressed and they drove back to the house, she was ready to explode.
"Would you do the Friendship ceremony with me?" Mary asked when they arrived at the house.
"Of course," Steve replied with a smile. "Since you're single. If you were married, it would have to include your husband. And since we're married, it has to include both of us."
"Oh!" Mary replied, blushing. "Both of you sounds great," she replied shyly.
"So you liked the Friendship ceremony?" Sara asked when they had grabbed a few bottles of ktang and beers and moved out onto the porch, relaxing on the mattresses.
"I've never been so horny," Mary replied. "I can't explain it."
"Oh, we totally understand," Sara said. "We've done several thousand Friendship ceremonies and I still get totally excited and turned on."
"It's called the First Time Syndrome," Steve explained.
"The First Time Syndrome?" Mary asked.
"Sex is usually the best the first time with someone," Sara explained. "Every cock tastes different and feels different, each man's cum tastes different, every pussy tastes different. That first time is the best because you have no idea what to expect and are always pleasantly surprised."
"What exactly does the Friendship ceremony do, other than get you laid?" John asked, smiling to take the sting out of his words.
"It's sort of like getting married, but not," Steve explained. "One way to describe it would be official fuck buddies. You never need to be shy about offering or accepting or rejecting sex with Friends."
"Then I definitely want to do the Friendship ceremony with you," Mary said.
"I offer Friendship," Steve said after taking a big swig on the bottle of ktang.
"I accept Friendship," Mary replied.
The next thing Mary knew, she was on top of Steve in a 69, his cock filling her mouth and his tongue drinking up her sopping pussy. After a few minutes, Steve rearranged things so that she was sitting on him, his cock deep in her pussy, his hands filled with her breasts, pinching and pulling on her hard nipples as she fucked him.
Mary didn't know how much time passed before she felt Steve's cock pulsing in her pussy and knew that he was cumming. She squeezed him with her pussy, trying to milk his cock until he finally slipped from her pussy. Before she knew it, she was on top of Sara, looking at her spread pussy with those long pussy lips. Moaning when she felt Sara's tongue in her own pussy, Mary leaned down and dragged her tongue down between Sara's spread pussy lips, tasting her, then plunging her tongue deep into her and drinking the juices that were liberally flowing.
Mary was lost in a delirium of lust as she feasted on Sara's flowing pussy, constantly cumming as Sara sucked on her clit and drove her to orgasm after orgasm. When Mary felt a pair of hands on her ass, squeezing her ass cheeks and spreading them apart, she moaned into Sara's pussy.
Mary started to panic when she felt the head of a cock pressing against her rosebud. She had had anal sex several times before, but not in a long time. Her whole body was shaking with orgasm as she felt the head of the cock press into her ass. Her whole body was trembling when she felt a body pressing up against her from behind, the cock totally buried in her ass.
John was watching wide-eyed, his camera taking shot after shot as Mary did her Friendship ceremony. His own cock was hard as a rock watching her, but he almost came when he saw Steve pressing his cock into his sister's ass. He could make out Sara's tongue beneath Steve's cock sliding in and out of Mary's ass as she continued to eat her pussy. He had no idea how much time passed, but suddenly Steve pulled his cock from Mary's ass and began spurting cum into the crack of her ass which ran down over and through her pussy lips onto Sara's questing tongue.
"Oh, my god!" Mary gasped when she finally fell over onto her side, orgasms continuing to wrack her body.
"We are Friends," Steve said, short of breath.
"We are Friends," Mary gasped in return.
"We are Friends," Sara said.
"We are Friends," Mary replied.
"Wow, that was pretty hot," John said, staring at his sister.
"It was great," Mary sighed.
"Sleep well," Sara said as she and Steve got to their feet.
"I think I'll go sleep on my mattress," Mary said. "I really need to sleep."
John and Bruce helped Mary pull her mattress out onto the porch, laying it next to Steve and Sara's before going back to their end of the porch.
"You guys are really cool," Bruce said after a minute, passing the spliff he had toked on to John. "Mary's liquid sex."
"No shit!" John agreed, taking a big hit on the spliff. "She has been continuously blowing my mind day by day lately."
"Were you bothered by anything at the Friendship ceremony tonight?" Bruce asked.
"No," John replied after a long, pregnant pause. "I was really surprised, though. Steve, your dad, and you, just don't strike me as gay."
"That's because we're not gay," Bruce replied. "We're neither hetero or gay or anything, we're just sexual beings. We don't discriminate. We like it all. Now, neither of us would consider taking up life with a man as a partner; we both love women and pussy too much. But for sex, any port in a storm."
"I'm sure I'll get used to it," John said.
"Tell me, if it were dark or you were blindfolded," Bruce posited, "and someone was sucking your cock but you couldn't see who it was, would it matter?"
"Probably not," John conceded.
"Do you do anal?" Bruce asked suddenly.
"I've fucked women in the ass, if that's what you're asking," John replied.
"Okay, then, same situation, you can't see," Bruce said. "Would you know the difference between a man and a woman if you were fucking someone in the ass?"
"Probably not," John agreed. "What's your point?"
"My point is that your attitude is not rational," Bruce replied. "It's based upon a programmed prejudice."
"Can't disagree with that," John said, passing the spliff back to Bruce after taking a big hit.
"I can better understand having an issue with sucking a cock," Bruce said. "It seems to me that there are as many women who love sucking a cock as there are those that wouldn't dream of doing it."
"I've been lucky, I guess," John said with a chuckle. "I've only ever known women who were addicted to sucking cock."
"Are you willing to try an experiment?" Bruce asked.
"I guess it depends upon the experiment," John replied cautiously.
"Let me suck your cock," Bruce said. "Close your eyes, picture whoever you want. Forget your programming and just go with it."
"Are you serious?" John asked. "You want to suck my cock?"
"Sure," Bruce replied. "Just try it once. Close your eyes. You don't have to do anything except supply the cock. I'll stop at any point if you want."
John was all too conscious of how hard his cock was and had been ever since he had watched Mary doing the Friendship ceremony with Steve and Sara. He had looked forward to sharing her with Bruce for the night again, but she was at the other end of the porch.
"What the hell," John said suddenly. "It won't kill me, I suppose."
"And you might just like it," Bruce said.
Looking down the porch, John pushed his shorts off and leaned back on his elbows, his rock-hard cock standing straight up in the air. He realized that he was holding his breath when Bruce reached out and wrapped a hand around the shaft of his cock.
"Man, you really do have a great cock," Bruce said as he slowly jacked John.
"Oh, man," John gasped when Bruce leaned over and stuck the tip of his tongue into the slit of his cock, then glued his lips to the head as he sucked on him. "Holy shit!" John croaked when he felt Bruce's tongue on the underside of his cock, all the way to his balls as he felt his nose pressing against his belly as his cock throbbed in his throat.
John closed his eyes, trying to picture Sara, then Mary as Bruce sucked his cock. Between his own imagination and Bruce's incredibly talented mouth, John felt his balls boiling and then they were exploding, cum gushing from his cock into Bruce's mouth. John groaned, arching his hips as his balls painfully contracted as they pumped cum.
"Jesus Christ!" John gasped when Bruce finally sat back, gulping as he licked his lips after sucking John completely dry. "That's the best blowjob I've ever had!"
"You've got a great cock," Bruce said. "You cum forever."
"I cannot believe it," John said, panting as he lay back.
"Now how do you feel about it?" Bruce asked with a chuckle.
"Jesus Christ!" was all John could say.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Have fun," Sara said as they pulled away the next morning in the Range Rover.
"I thought we'd head down to Lake Kazuni first," Bruce explained as he drove. "That's the entrance to the Reserve. From there, the only roads are little more than dirt trails. There are hippos in Lake Kazuni and I know a great place on the north side of the lake near to where it drains that we can camp. You'll get great pictures of the hippos and also birds at sunrise and sunset."
After a couple of hours, they stopped on an escarpment overlooking Lake Kazuni next to a wash that drained into the lake where there were several small islands near to shore. They set up camp, a single tent, then John grabbed his camera bag and tripods.
"Hippos kill more people every year than any other animal except man," Bruce explained as he led them down to the lake's shore. "They're big, up to 2 tons, but they are also extremely fast for short bursts. And they are very territorial. If they feel that their territory is being encroached upon, they will become vicious in a flash. That's when they're the most dangerous. The biggest danger is on the water. Here on the shore, it's not quite as dangerous, but we need to pay attention."
"Are those hippos?" Mary asked, pointing at some grey lumps in the water.
"They are," Bruce replied. "We've got a couple of hours until sunset when the birds will all arrive. I'm going to go up to the campsite and keep watch. If you hear me blow this whistle, don't even think, just get your ass up here as fast as you can. Understand?"
"Yeah, I got it," John said as he set up his cameras.
"John, I'm sorry, but this is boring to me," Mary said after 10 minutes, during which time John had his eye glued to one of his cameras. "You can see fine with your lenses, but I can't really see anything. I'm going to go up to the camp."
"Okay," John said turning to smile sheepishly at her. "Sorry about that. It is amazing through the camera, though. You'll love the pictures I'm getting."
"Want some help?" Mary asked as she approached the tent.
"Sure," Bruce replied, smiling. "I'm just getting dinner ready so that we don't have to do it when it's dark. Now we'll just need to build a fire and cook it."
"Are you always so practical?" Mary asked.
"I probably spend a third of my time camping," Bruce replied. "If you don't learn some tricks, it can be pretty depressing to deal with the results. It's second nature by now."
"We've only been here a few months," Mary said, "but already it's had a major effect on us. It's pretty head spinning at times."
"Like last night?" Bruce asked with a grin.
"Like last night," Mary agreed, laughing. "If you had told me before I came to Malawi that I'd be having sex with the parents of a guy that I had just met, in front of him, no less, I'd have laughed at you."
"And how do you feel about everything that's happened?" Bruce asked. "Any regrets?"
"When I think like a westerner, which I am, I worry a bit that I'm not bothered by what's happened," Mary replied. "I know that I could not live like this back there, but here it seems to be the way life works and I like it. It makes me shiver when I think about the freedom I have that I could never have back there."
"For instance?" Bruce asked.
"Well, feeling like I can go anywhere, any time, and be safe," Mary replied. "That's really important as a woman."
"Anything else?" Bruce asked, a big smile on his face.
"I always liked sex," Mary said, flashing him a smile. "But I never watched anyone else having sex or had sex in front of anyone before or with more than one person or with a woman or with my brother."
"And how do you like that?" Bruce asked.
"The sex is so much better," Mary replied with a sigh.
"Anything you particularly like?" Bruce asked.
"Being watched," Mary admitted after a moment.
"Well, I certainly like watching you," Bruce told her. "You were born for sex."
"Is that a compliment?" Mary asked with a laugh, moving to stand in front of him.
"Definitely a compliment," Bruce assured her, sighing when she cupped his cock and balls.
"Would you like to watch me suck your cock?" Mary asked, an impish sparkle in her eyes as she jacked him through his shorts.
"Always," Bruce replied, reaching down to release his shorts which slid to the ground, his cock standing out in front of him.
"This is something else I like," Mary said, on her knees, Bruce's cock in her fist as her tongue flicked out to taste the head. "I can do this and nobody would be the least bit bothered by it if they happened to walk up."
Even though Bruce's cock wasn't as large as John's, or Steve's for that matter, Mary still couldn't get it all into her mouth as she sucked on him. He ran his fingers into her hair, holding her head and gently fucking her mouth. Suddenly cum was gushing into her mouth and she moaned out loud as she hollowed her cheeks sucking on his cock, trying to get every bit of cum from him that she could.
"I think I could watch you do that regularly," Bruce said as he helped Mary to her feet. "How about sitting on my face now, let me repay the favor?" he suggested after bending over and kissing her long and deep. "Let me know if you see the hippos rushing towards the shore," he reminded her as he led her over to the carpets that had been laid out in front of the tent overlooking the lake.
"How will I know if they're rushing towards the shore?" Mary asked as she slipped out of her shorts and pulled her t-shirt off.
"You'll see white foam as they churn the water," Bruce replied as he lay back, guiding Mary onto his face and driving his tongue up into her sopping pussy.
Many orgasms later, Mary lifted her pussy away from Bruce's incredibly talented tongue.
"The sun's setting," she said. "The colors are changing and the birds are flying in."
"Beautiful, isn't it?" Bruce asked, positioning Mary on her hands and knees facing the lake, kneeling behind her.
"Oh, this is the way to watch a sunset," Mary sighed when she felt Bruce's cock filling her pussy.
The only sounds were the flocks of birds circling and calling out as they settled onto the lake, along with the sound of Bruce's cock sluicing in and out of Mary's pussy as they fucked in silence. Out of the corner of his eye, Bruce saw that John was making his way up the escarpment.
"I thought I'd get better sunset shots up here," John said as he arrived, stopping next to where Bruce was fucking Mary. "Looks like I'm right."
Bruce laughed as he continued to slide his cock in and out of Mary's sopping pussy while John quickly changed lenses on one of his cameras, mounting his CN-E14.5-60mm lens.
"Having fun, Sis?" John asked as he knelt down in front of her, pointing his camera in her face.
"Let me suck your cock while Bruce fucks me," Mary said after sticking her tongue out as John snapped a few shots.
John wasted no time in stripping and kneeling in front of his sister while Bruce laughed, still sluicing his cock in and out of her pussy.
"It doesn't get any better than this, does it?" Bruce asked with a sigh as he watched John's cock disappearing into his sister's mouth.
"Not really," John agreed, snapping photos, holding the camera down low, close enough for the lens to bang into his cock as Mary sucked on him.
"Are you going to be a porno photographer now?" Mary asked, gasping as she looked into the camera right next to her face and stuck the tip of her tongue into the slit of her brother's cock.
"Seems like a good idea to me," John replied, grunting when the head of his cock disappeared back into Mary's mouth.
"Come get some shots of this, then," Bruce encouraged.
"Hold that thought," John said, pulling his cock from Mary's mouth and moving around behind her.
"Beautiful, isn't it?" Bruce asked, using both hands to spread Mary's ass cheeks as far apart as possible, giving John a clear view of his cock in her pussy.
"Very," John agreed, snapping photos as Bruce slowly slid his cock in and out of Mary's pussy, then pulled it out entirely, holding it just outside of her gaping hole before slowly sliding it back into her.
"How about it, you up for this?" Bruce asked, sliding his cock from Mary's pussy and rubbing her rosebud with it.
"Oh!" Mary gasped. "Just go slow," she said, lowering her face and chest to the ground as Bruce continued to spread her ass cheeks wide open.
John's eyes were wide behind the camera and his cock was throbbing as he watched Bruce press the head of his cock against Mary's rosebud. She moaned out loud when the head suddenly slid into her ass. Slowly but surely, Bruce worked his entire cock into her ass.
"You okay?" Bruce asked as he began to slowly fuck her ass.
"Yes," Mary gasped. "It feels good, I just haven't done it much."
John thought he would cum as he watched his sister getting fucked in the ass through his camera as he ran off shots as fast as he could. The sun was setting and the sky was ablaze in a fantastic kaleidoscope of reds, oranges, yellows, and even greens as Bruce continued fucking Mary in the ass.
Finally, Bruce pulled his cock from Mary's ass which gaped obscenely. Holding his cock in his hand, a stream of cum flew, splashing onto and into Mary's gaping ass. Mary groaned when she felt Bruce push the head of his cock into her pussy as he finished cumming. When he finally finished and pulled his cock from her pussy, John was leaning in so close that he was almost touching them with his lens as he took pictures, Mary's ass and pussy gaping open, cum running from her pussy and dripping from her clit while Bruce's cock bobbed just an inch away, a long drip of cum depending from the tip of his cock.
"God, what an incredible ass!" Bruce sighed as he looked down at his handiwork.
"Oh, that felt so good!" Mary said, feeling the cool air on her ass and pussy. "I've never cum so hard."
"You want some more?" Bruce asked. "It looks like John is about to explode."
"Oh! I don't know," Mary said, looking back. "His cock is so big."
"Just think of how good his cock feels in your pussy," Bruce told her. "It'll be the same in your ass. Show me how to use that camera," he said to John.
Mary didn't say anything or move, just knelt there with her ass up in the air, cum still dripping from her pussy, with her chest and face pressed to the ground as John quickly explained how to use the camera to Bruce before kneeling behind her, his cock pointing at her ass and cum-dripping pussy.
"You sure about this?" John asked, his rock-hard cock in his hand.
"Yes, just go slow," Mary said, her legs trembling in her excitement.
"Better get you wet first," Bruce said, surprising John when he leaned over and took the head of his cock into his mouth.
John groaned, releasing his cock as Bruce leaned forward, slowly taking every inch of his cock into his mouth before backing off and sucking on the head, running his tongue all around it, slathering saliva all over it before leaning back, licking his lips.
"Go ahead," he croaked, gulping as he raised the camera to his face.
Mary moaned when she felt her brother's cock pressing into her ass. Bruce had loosened her up, and even though John's cock stretched her ass more than Bruce's, it took relatively little effort to bury all 9" of it deep in her ass.
"Man, that is fucking hot!" Bruce said as he leaned in close with the camera, taking pictures.
"I cannot believe how big your cock is," Mary gasped as John pumped his cock in and out of her ass.
"You ass is even tighter than your pussy," John told his sister. "It feels great."
"I can't stop cumming," Mary said, laughing. "God, this is incredible!"
Bruce could see Mary's inner thighs glistening with her pussy juices as they flowed down her legs, John's cock stretching her tiny ass obscenely as he continued to fuck her.
"I'm going to cum," John announced after a while, his face red.
"In her pussy," Bruce said, leaning close as he snapped photos.
"God!" Mary gasped when she felt her brother's cock withdraw from her ass, feeling the cool air and then a splash as cum shot from his cock.
"Yeah, yeah!" Bruce encouraged as John stuffed the head of his cock in Mary's pussy as he continued to cum. "That is hot!" he said when John finally pulled his dripping cock from Mary's pussy, cum running down her pussy lips to drip onto the ground.
"Oh, god!" Mary groaned, rolling over onto her back. "I have never felt so fucked in my life."
"We're just getting started," Bruce said, handing the camera to John and then lifting Mary's legs onto his shoulders as he leaned down and ran his tongue into her cum-filled pussy.
Mary was crying out as Bruce ate her cum-filled pussy, cumming non-stop as his talented tongue teased her as he cleaned her, John leaning as close as possible taking pictures.
"Definitely the best sunset I've ever seen," John said, causing both Bruce and Mary to burst into laughter.
"I want to clean up," Mary said, struggling to sit up. "Do we have to go down to the lake?"
"No, and that's not safe anyway with the hippos so close," Bruce replied. "There's a small stream close by, which is one of the reasons I like camping here."
The three of them made their way to the stream, taking their time as they relaxed and got cleaned up.
"We should do something about dinner," Bruce said as they made their way back to the campsite. "We're going to need the energy."
"Why?" Mary asked.
"Because I'm sure that John and I are going to fuck you all night long," Bruce replied, a big smile on his face. "Unless you object, that is."
"So, what are we having for dinner?" Mary asked, her cheeks flaming but her eyes seeking out both of their cocks.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"We should go if you want to get good shots of the birds with the sunrise," Bruce said many hours later.
"I'm not moving," Mary said, sprawled on her back, dried and fresh cum on her face, breasts, pussy, ass, and thighs.
"Yeah, let's do it," John said, laughing as he looked at his sister.
He and Bruce had indeed fucked Mary all night long, one or two cocks always filling her mouth, pussy, and ass. Mary's whole body had trembled in non-stop orgasm the first time she had had two cocks at once, riding John's in her pussy while Bruce fucked her ass at the same time. Even now, mini-orgasms continued to roil her body as she re-lived it in her mind.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"How are you doing?" Bruce asked when he returned an hour or so later.
"Great," Mary replied. "Tired. I soaked in the stream."
"Last night was great," Bruce told her. "You're an incredible fuck."
"The best night of my life," Mary replied with a sigh. "One more thing that falls into the I'd-never-imagine-I'd-ever-do-that category," she said, laughing. "The best part is that I can't wait to do it again, even though my ass and pussy are a bit sore."
"Please feel free to use me in whatever way you like, whenever you like," Bruce said.
"That's only fair," Mary replied. "That's what you're doing with me."
"Do you object?" Bruce asked.
"No, not if it's a two-way street," Mary replied with a smile.
"I think I'll go soak in the stream," Bruce said.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"You two are amazing!" John said with a laugh when he returned to find them in a 69.
"I can't get enough of her," Bruce admitted.
"Go get cleaned up and join us," Mary said to her brother.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"So, are we just going to fuck our lives away?" John asked a few hours later as they all soaked in the stream.
"Unless you can come up with something better," Bruce replied, "I'm perfectly content to fuck my life away. Is there anything in life that you enjoy more?"
"No," Mary replied in a very definite tone. "But thank God that I have other interests, otherwise I would just fuck my life away."
"I can honestly say that I never expected to hear those words from your mouth," John said with a laugh.
"Disappointed?" Mary asked, a big smile on her face.
"Whatever the opposite of that is," John replied. "It's nice not to have this problem all by myself. We can be a mutual support group and take solace in each other."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Wow, I must have really needed that nap," Mary said when she awoke several hours later as sunset approached.
"We all did," John said, stretching and yawning as he, too, awoke.
"Looks like you're ready for action," Bruce said, indicating John's rock-hard cock.
"I always want to cum when I wake up," John explained. "I've always been like that."
"Mary, do you know how to use the camera?" Bruce asked.
"Not really," Mary replied. "Why?"
"I want you to take pictures," Bruce replied.
"Of what?" Mary asked.
"I'm going to suck John's cock," Bruce replied, laughing at the startled looks on their faces. "I want the sunset behind us."
"You're going to suck John's cock?" Mary asked, staring at him. "Really?"
"Sure, why not?" Bruce replied.
"John?" Mary asked, looking at her brother.
"Well, I don't mind," John said, blushing. "He sucked my cock last night at the house."
"Really!" Mary exclaimed, her mouth hanging open in disbelief.
"Yeah," John said. "Bruce wanted me to just try it, see what it was like. I kept picturing different girls in my head."
"Wow, I had no idea," Mary said, shaking her head. "You liked it?" she asked.
"Honestly, I've never had a better blowjob," John admitted sheepishly.
"Wow, that is saying something," Mary said, staring at Bruce's smiling face. "So you don't mind if he sucks your cock now?" she asked.
"Unless you want it for something," John replied, "it's the best offer I've got."
"Show me how to use the camera," Mary replied.
John lay on his back, oriented north to south, and Bruce knelt between his legs, Mary on their side to the east to shoot them with the sunset behind. She had seen Bruce suck on John's cock momentarily after he had cum and she had seen a few men sucking cocks in the tent at the market, but she had never seen a man suck another man's cock right in front of her.
Her hands trembling as she leaned on the shutter and ran off photos, she watched through the viewfinder as Bruce sucked John's cock. She gasped when she saw how easily he was able to take all 9" into his mouth, milking it with his throat.
"Ahhhhh," John cried out, lifting his hips as his balls exploded.
Mary leaned in close with the camera as Bruce held the shaft of John's cock in his hand, directing the flow of cum onto his extended tongue and into his mouth before fastening his lips around it and hollowing his cheeks as he sought to extract every single drop of cum from him. Mary felt her pussy get wet when Bruce extended his cum-covered tongue to stab it into the slit of John's cock, a big smile on his face as he looked into the camera's lens.
"You really cum," Bruce said when he finally sat back, swallowing and licking his lips.
"I would give anything to be able to suck his cock like that," Mary sighed.
"Practice, practice, practice," Bruce said, leaning over and giving her a long, cummy kiss. "I wasn't born able to do it, either."
"How many cocks have you sucked," Mary asked, "or am I not supposed to ask something like that?"
"I don't mind," Bruce replied, shrugging. "I'm not ashamed of it at all. I like sucking cocks almost as much as I like eating pussy. I'm sure I've sucked hundreds of cocks, most of them black."
"Wow! Hundreds?!" Mary asked. "My God! How many women have you been with?"
"Over a thousand, also mostly black," Bruce replied. "I don't know. It never crossed my mind to count. Growing up here, a Tumbuka, sex has been as much a part of my life as breathing ever since I can remember."
"No wonder you're so good," Mary said with a smile.
"Practice does make perfect," Bruce replied, "and I love practicing. Now, how about some dinner?"
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"How long would you like to stay at this camping place?" Bruce asked as they lay back after dinner, passing the bottle of ktang and a spliff.
"What else is there to do from here?" Mary asked.
"Nothing really," Bruce replied. "You've seen the hippos and the birds. Unless you're a fanatic about photographing the birds, there's not really much more in this area. If we go further up in the park, we might see water buffalo, antelopes, elephants, and lions. Maybe even a leopard."
"I wouldn't mind being able to have tomorrow morning to take some more pictures," John said. "After that, I'm easy."
"It's okay with me," Mary said.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"This is the best," John panted a couple of hours later after they all lay sprawled after their latest sexual explosion.
"I'll say," Mary agreed, cupping her brother's balls in her hands as she lay between his legs on her back. "I've never felt so free in my life."
"It is the most incredible sense of freedom there is," Bruce agreed.
"Fuck me some more," Mary said, reaching out for him, pulling him down onto her, his cock once again finding and filling her already cum-filled pussy.
As Bruce fucked her, Mary had John's cock in her hands, jacking it. Bruce alternated between deep kisses with her and sucking on John's cock. Time passed and Mary continued to enjoy the orgasms that Bruce's cock was inducing. Then she felt John stiffen when Bruce was sucking on his cock and she knew that he was cumming, evidenced by the cum leaking from the corners of Bruce's mouth as he gulped down John's hot, thick cum.
At the same time, Mary felt Bruce's cock swell deep in her pussy, then pulse as he came, once again filling her with cum as he continued sucking John off. When he finished, he leaned down to kiss her once again, this time sharing the mouthful of cum that he hadn't yet swallowed. She felt his cock slip from her pussy when he finished cumming.
"Wow, just wow!" John sighed.
"Isn't this great!?" Mary asked, rolling over and crawling up her brother's body to look into his face, her eyes shining.
"It's amazing," John replied just before Mary plastered her mouth to his, kissing him, letting him taste his own cum still thickly coating her tongue and mouth.
"Oh, yeah, that's the stuff," Bruce encouraged when Mary broke the kiss and continued crawling up her brother's body, smiling at the glimpse she caught of his surprised and panicked face just before lowering her dripping pussy onto his mouth.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"It's going to take us most of the day to get to the next spot," Bruce informed them the next morning as they got underway, John having gotten his photos while Bruce and Mary stayed behind to first pack up and load everything into the Range Rover, then to fuck until John arrived, just in time to eat his sister's pussy which was full of Bruce's cum.
"We'll go up the D35 almost to Katumbi, then turn west and head to the Vwaza Marsh," Bruce explained. "The roads are really just rough trails, so we'll need to go slow."
"This is amazing," Mary said many hours later as they stood on the edge of a marshy grassland stretching out before them, broken here and there with large stands of trees, sunset colors making everything seem surreal. They were parked right next to a stream where there was a large outcropping of rock sticking up almost 100' where there was a cave halfway up big enough to accommodate them. There was an easy trail leading up and a good-sized ledge in front of the cave.
"People seem to like using this place," John said.
"Probably for tens of thousands of years," Bruce agreed. "By building a fire in front of the cave, we won't have to worry about lions or any other large predatory cats. A tent would be useless if they got your scent."
They hauled their gear up from the car, then spent an hour foraging for firewood. Once they had their camp totally set up, Bruce pulled out a bottle of ktang.
"You should bring a camera," Bruce said as they passed the bottle around. "It'll take about half an hour to hike to a place I know that will be really nice for sunset."
John grabbed his entire camera bag, complete with tripods, taking up the rear with Bruce leading the way. The trail he followed wasn't difficult, and following Bruce's advice, both John and Mary paid attention to obvious landmarks so that they'd be able to find their way back.
"This is really cool," John said when Bruce finally stopped at the edge of a marshy area that seemed to extend to the horizon, broken here and there by stands of low shrubs and trees. There were huge areas of cattail reeds and the puffy white clouds overhead could be seen reflected in the mirror-like water.
"It won't be long now," Bruce said, lighting a spliff and passing it to Mary as John set his cameras up. "First it will be the birds. I'd take advantage of the opportunity to sort of wash," he said, stripping and immersing himself in the water with a sigh.
Mary wasted no time in joining him, having been wishing for some water to wash in after the long day's drive, John joining them when he finished setting up his cameras.
As they stood drying in the sun, it moved lower in the west over the marsh, the light getting softer, buttery as the sky started changing colors. There was a sound, then a shadow in the low distance, and then tens of thousands of birds of a variety of species were settling down in the marsh, flamingos, roseate spoonbills, egrets. It was an incredible variety of sizes and colors and John was happily running off photos.
"Quietly now," Bruce whispered. "Look to your right."
Mary had to cover her mouth to suppress her gasp when she saw the herd of couple dozen antelope and eland moving to the water's edge to drink. John turned his attention to them with his cameras.
The sky was transitioning from yellow to orange to red and then to purple as the sun slowly set, a flash of green light its farewell as it sank below the distant horizon. Suddenly the herd of antelope, as one, bolted, turning and dashing away.
"Very, very quiet," Bruce whispered, squatting down. "No movement," he said as they watched the large leopard and her four cubs move to the water's edge to drink not 50 meters away. The mother looked long and hard at them, John standing behind his tripod taking pictures, then turned and lowered her head to drink.
"That was amazing," Mary said when the leopards turned and left after drinking their fill about 10 minutes later.
"Every time," Bruce said. "We got really lucky."
"I'll say," John agreed. "I think I got some really good shots."
"We should head back to the campsite while there's still some light," Bruce said, picking up his clothes but not putting them back on. "The moon won't be up until late and it's going to get really dark before then."
Bruce had been correct, as the last couple of hundred meters it had been very difficult to see the trail and they had had to slow down for safety. Back at the campsite, Bruce quickly built a fire and they opened another bottle of ktang and lit a spliff to await dinner.
"This is really great," Mary sighed as she lay back after stuffing herself, taking a big pull on the spliff. "I've never seen so many stars before."
"It'll be even more intense when we get to the Nyika Plateau," Bruce said. "The air's a bit drier and it's a bit cooler in temperature," he explained, handing her the bottle of ktang.
"This will be hard to beat," John said. "I thought the hippos were cool, but this blows that away."
"Yeah," Mary said, crawling over to Bruce and taking the spliff while handing him the bottle of ktang. "This is definitely great," she said, taking a big hit and then passing it to John.
Bruce was leaning back on his elbows, watching Mary with a smile on his face as she leaned forward and licked the head of his cock, then wrapped her hand around it and began to suck on it, none of them having bothered to dress in their sweaty clothes after their swim earlier.
"Come on, John," Mary said, turning to look at him while she reached back with one hand and pulled her ass cheek open, exposing herself to him before turning and resuming sucking Bruce's cock.
John didn't need to think about it, running the head of his cock up and down between his sister's unfurled pussy lips, feeling it get more and more slippery as it became lubricated with her pussy juices before he leaned forward, feeling her pussy stretch to accommodate him as he slowly slid his cock into her.
"God, yes!" Mary hissed, gulping for breath before taking Bruce's cock back into her mouth as John began to fuck her from behind, the fire crackling next to them as the riotous canopy of stars blazed overhead.
"Well, this is a nice sight, don't you think?" a strange voice said as two shadows appeared out of the night next to them, John freezing with most of his cock in Mary's pussy, her hand wrapped around the shaft of Bruce's cock as she looked up in surprise.
Mary felt her pussy clamping on John's cock as she looked at the two naked people, one a woman, the other a man. They both had close-cropped hair with rifles slung over one shoulder, a bow and a quiver of arrows over the other. She felt her cheeks flush when she looked at the rather large cock hanging in front of the man, feeling her pussy get wet, knowing that John would feel it.
Neither one was tall, though both were lithe, the woman's breasts small with hard dark nipples, the hairless slit of her pussy barely visible in the uncertain light of the fire.
"It is a nice sight," the woman said, stepping forward. "Don't stop," she said, kneeling down over Bruce's face facing Mary.
Mary saw Bruce's tongue in the woman's pussy.
"Go on, suck his cock," the woman said.
"Yes, keep fucking her," the man said.
Mary gasped when she felt John's cock move in her, lowering her face to take Bruce's cock back into her mouth while the woman continued to sit on his face getting her pussy eaten.
"She is a good fuck?" the man asked as he watched John's big cock sliding in and out of Mary's pussy.
"Yeah, really good," John replied.
"Would you mind if I tried?" the man asked, his hand on his rifle not unnoticed by John.
John didn't say anything, just slowly backed away, his cock sliding from his sister's pussy. The man smiled, dropping to his knees behind Mary, not removing his rifle or bow and arrows from his shoulders as he slid his cock into her pussy.
Mary was grunting as she sucked Bruce's cock as the man's cock got fully hard inside of her, easily as big as John's as it filled her over and over again.
"And you, you can use that big white cock of yours?" the woman asked, rising up from her seat on Bruce's face.
John just stared at her as she put a hand on his shoulder, gently pressing. John sank to the ground, laying back as the woman mounted him, her hot pussy enveloping his cock, squeezing it as she sank down onto him.
"Yes, a good cock," the woman sighed as she rode him, her hips sliding back and forth, her small firm breasts with their hard, dark nipples glinting in the starlight.
John's mind was awhirl with confused thoughts as the woman's incredible pussy milked him. He could see the man's big ebony cock sliding back and forth in and out of Mary's pussy as she continued to suck Bruce's cock, gasping, her legs trembling as she came over and over again. He could not ignore the rifles or bows and arrows as he groaned, finally putting his hands on the woman's hips as he arched his own, trying to get even deeper inside of her incredible pussy.
"Ah, this is a fine pussy," the man said, pulling Mary's ass cheeks wide apart so that he could watch his cock as it slid in and out of her pussy, her delicate pussy lips clinging palely to the ebony shaft of his cock each time he pulled back. "You have a good campsite, I think," he said, pulling his cock from Mary's pussy and moving around to kneel next to Bruce's head. "A good choice," he added, filling a hand with Bruce's hair as he stuck his cock into Bruce's open mouth, grunting as he came.
Mary stared in astonishment, her hand still wrapped around Bruce's hard cock as the big ebony cock shot stream after stream of cum into Bruce's mouth, his extended tongue quickly becoming thickly coated with cum. When the man released Bruce's hair, Bruce closed his lips on the spurting cock, his throat visibly convulsing as he gulped down a mouthful of cum.
John was torn between watching the incredible ebony woman riding his cock and watching as Bruce sucked the man off. He groaned, losing control when he saw Bruce's lips close on the man's cock, then gulp down a mouthful of cum before slowly but surely taking every inch of that huge ebony cock into his mouth, his throat bulging with the clear outline of it throbbing as it continued to cum.
The woman's pussy was milking John's cock as he came, squeezing it tightly. John thought his balls would pull through his cock, so hard did he cum. When he finally sagged back, totally spent, the woman dismounted him, moving over to sit on Bruce's face as the man moved out of the way, his balls already drained.
Mary could see John's cum flowing from the woman's pussy, dripping from her dark pussy lips onto Bruce's mouth as his tongue delved up into her, finally fastening his mouth on her as she sat on his face. Mary was further astonished when the woman leaned over, taking Bruce's cock into her mouth, Mary's hand still wrapped around the shaft. Mary could feel Bruce's cock pulse, could feel the cum shooting up through it to exit into the woman's mouth as she sucked him off.
"As usual, you provide a warm welcome," the man said when the woman finished sucking Bruce off and dismounted his face, her pussy now clean.
"I like your friends," the woman said, smiling at them and now relieving herself of her weaponry.
"You know these people?" Mary sputtered.
"Masozi and Penjani," Bruce introduced. "My best friends in the world and park rangers. This is John and his sister Mary."
"Sister!" Masozi exclaimed with a laugh. "I don't blame you for fucking her," he said to John. "She's got a great pussy, almost as good as my wife's," he added, smiling at Penjani.
"Your wife?" John asked.
"Yes," Masozi replied. "Did you enjoy her?"
"Well, yes," John replied, nonplussed. "Very much."
"That's good," Masozi said with a laugh. "I can tell that she's going to want more, as will I. I hope you won't mind," he said, turning to smile at a blushing Mary. "I look forward to finding out if your pussy tastes as good as it fucks."
"You could have said something," Mary complained to Bruce. "I was frightened, the guns and bows and arrows."
"But they never even referred to them," Bruce replied. "Besides, if you had it to do again and they didn't have their weapons, you'd do it again, wouldn't you?"
"I wouldn't have been so frightened," Mary replied.
"It felt like you stopped being frightened to me," Masozi said. "I could feel you cumming on my cock. It was very nice. I don't think a frightened woman is going to cum like that."
"Are you okay now?" Bruce asked. "I'd hate to think that you were upset."
"Yes," Mary replied, unable to keep her eyes from Masozi's huge ebony cock. "I was just frightened because I didn't understand."
"Ah, I am glad," Masozi said. "I'd hate to think that you didn't like my cock. It liked you very much."
"It's...very big," Mary said, flushing.
"Too big?" Masozi asked. "I wouldn't want to hurt you."
"Oh, no, no, not too big," Mary stammered.
"Your brother's cock certainly isn't small," Penjani observed. "Almost as big as Masozi's."
"Well, it doesn't matter then, does it?" Masozi declared. "Two women who like big cocks and three men to supply them. Does that sound good to you?" he asked, looking directly at Mary.
"Yes," Mary replied, feeling her cheeks flame and hoping the firelight would hide it.
"So, tell us what you're up to," Masozi said, reaching for the bottle of ktang and gulping it down before handing it to Penjani.
Bruce explained and Masozi and Penjani nodded their agreement with the itinerary.
"It's the perfect time of the year," Masozi said, producing a big spliff from somewhere and lighting it. "The air is dry and the animals instinctively go to the water sources. You'll see more of them in the water at this time of the year, not just drinking it."
"How long have you been in Malawi?" Penjani asked, taking a big hit on the spliff before passing it to Bruce.
"About half a year," John replied.
"Do you like it?" Penjani asked.
"Love it," John replied.
"What do you love about it?" Penjani asked.
"The people most of all," John replied. "And it's a beautiful land."
"And you, how do you feel about Malawi?" Masozi asked Mary.
"I love it here," Mary replied. "I never want to leave."
"So much love!" Masozi said, the gleam of his smile flashing in the firelight. "Come, sit on my lap and tell me about it," he said, taking Mary's hand and gently tugging on it.
Mary felt like her whole body was on fire as she crawled onto Masozi's lap, moaning when she felt him guide his cock to her pussy as she settled down onto it.
"You love Malawi for the sex?" Masozi asked as Mary slowly began to fuck him.
"Yes," Mary replied, feeling her pussy convulse in orgasm from his huge ebony cock sliding in and out of her.
"But you had sex in America," Masozi said, covering Mary's breasts with his hands, finding and squeezing her hard, ruby nipples as she slid her pussy up and down on his cock.
"Not like here," Mary replied, grinding her pussy down on him, rubbing her clit against him and cumming yet again.
"You had sex with your sister before Malawi?" Penjani asked, gently pushing John onto his back and straddling his body.
"No," John replied, his hands on her sleek thighs as she worked her way forward, not stopping until she had planted her pussy on his mouth.
John immediately loved the musky flavor of Penjani's pussy as he ate her, feeling her tremble when he'd suck on her fat pussy lips, lightly chewing on them. Her clit was small, though very sensitive, sucking on it and teasing it with his tongue causing her to writhe on top of him, her juices flowing onto his questing tongue. John then felt a hand on his cock, then a mouth enveloping it as he continued to eat Penjani's pussy.
Masozi easily picked Mary up, keeping her impaled on his cock, and laid her on her back next to John, holding her ankles in his hands as he proceeded to fuck her.
"You Americans, all Westerners, think that sex is something special," Masozi said as he continued to slide his huge ebony cock in and out of Mary's tight pussy. "But you are mistaken about how it is special," he continued. "It is special like breathing; necessary for a healthy life. You have so many societal problems in the West because of people having a lack of sex or the wrong idea of what it is. We don't have those problems in Malawi. Here, sex is a natural part of life."
"This one eats pussy like he was born to it," Penjani sighed, grinding her pussy on John's mouth as his tongue quested up into her flowing pussy.
Mary was cumming non-stop as Masozi's huge ebony cock continued to plow her furrow. She heard John groan and saw Penjani rise up off of his face as he lifted his hips, his mouth open in a near-silent groan as his balls exploded as Bruce sucked him off. At the same time, Masozi pulled his cock from Mary's pussy, spurting cum, and turned to the side, spraying a stream of cum over John's face before sticking his spurting cock into his open mouth.
Mary stared in shock as John coughed and choked as Masozi filled his mouth with cum while Bruce continued sucking him off. Cum was pouring from the corners of his mouth as Masozi's huge ebony cock filled it. Mary's view was obstructed when Penjani crawled over her, lowering her face into her pussy while at the same time lowering her pussy onto Mary's mouth.
"You suck cock like it's your first time," Masozi said when he finished cumming and pulled his cock from John's mouth.
"I've never done anything like that before," John sputtered, reflexively swallowing, trying to clear his mouth of Masozi's thick cum.
"You'll do better with practice," Masozi said as Penjani crawled off of Mary and began to lick John's face, cleaning up all of the cum that coated his mouth and chin before kissing him, long and deep.
"My god!" Mary gasped as she struggled to sit up, her pussy still tingling from the fucking it had just received.
"I saw Bruce sucking your cock and naturally assumed," Masozi started to say.
"It's, it's okay," John said, still swallowing as he tried to clear his mouth.
"This works," Mary said, handing him the bottle of ktang which he gulped, clearly swishing it around in his mouth.
"It does work!" John said, handing the bottle to Masozi.
"Was it so bad?" Masozi asked after finishing the bottle which was immediately replaced with a full one by Bruce.
"I wasn't expecting it," John replied.
"You've tasted cum before?" Masozi asked.
"Yes," John admitted.
"Cum's cum," Masozi said with a shrug. "You either like it or you don't. You like your own cum?"
"It never bothered me," John admitted.
"Practice, then," Masozi said. "It's more fun when you know what you're doing."
They sat watching the stars wheel overhead, passing the bottle of ktang and the spliff in contented silence. At some point Penjani pushed Bruce onto his back and mounted him, silently fucking him as everyone watched.
"You liked eating my pussy?" Penjani asked, looking at John as she continued fucking Bruce.
"Yeah, definitely," John replied.
"You want to eat it again?" Penjani asked.
"Whenever you'd like," John replied, glancing at Masozi and not seeing any reaction.
Bruce groaned, arching his hips as Penjani milked his cock with her pussy as he came inside of her.
"I'd like you to eat my pussy now," Penjani said when she had milked Bruce dry, rising up off of him and moving over to a wide-eyed John, Bruce's cum leaking from her pussy down the inside of her thighs.
Mary realized that she was holding her breath as she watched Penjani lower her dripping pussy onto her brother's extended tongue.
"He eats pussy like there's nothing he loves more," Penjani sighed, tousling John's hair as he feasted on her cum-filled quim.
"Yes," Mary agreed softly, eyeing her brother's growing cock.
John quickly adjusted to the taste of Bruce's cum in Penjani's pussy as he slurped on her, once again loving the musky flavor of her flowing juices.
"Oh, yeah!" John murmured into Penjani's pussy when Mary mounted him, sliding her pussy down on his cock as he continued to eat Penjani.
After some time Penjani moved off of John's face and he was able to look up and see his sister, her ass pounding up and down as she fucked him while everyone watched.
"Yes, now," Mary gasped, dismounting him and reversing herself into a 69, capturing his cock in her mouth as he erupted, streams of cum pulsing onto her tongue and down her throat as she sucked him off.
"We should go down to the water now if you want to see the sunrise," Masozi said many hours later as he finished cumming on Mary's ass after fucking it and not for the first time. The whole night had passed in one long fuck session, fueled with ktang and spliffs. Each of the women had had each of the men many times, often more than one at a time. Mary had experienced and loved her first 3-cock fuck; John in her pussy, Masozi in her ass, and Bruce in her mouth. She had cum non-stop.
"I don't know if I can walk that far," Mary moaned, collapsing onto her stomach. "I've never fucked so much in my life."
"Ahh, yeah!" John gasped, his hand on Penjani's head as she sucked him off once again.
They all got slowly to their feet, sheepish grins on John and Mary's faces as they looked at each other. Masozi volunteered to carry one of the tripods, but stopped them when they reached for their clothes.
"No need for clothes," he said. "They smell. The animals smell you. Go like this, wash when we get there. Much better."
So they all walked down to the edge of the marsh naked. John thought he would burst out in laughter several times as he thought of how timeless an experience it was, the same now as it had been thousands of years ago, absent the camera equipment and weapons. John set up the cameras when they got there while the others washed, then sank down into the water himself to get clean.
"Quiet now," Masozi said softly, pointing down the lakeshore where a herd of Cape buffalo was making its way to the water's edge.
The sky was starting to show signs of light and color, soft pinks, then deeper pinks, then the oranges and reds as the sounds of birds' wings began to be heard and flocks of Goliath herons, openbill storks, and the rare white-winged starling all appeared, rising from the lake as the sun began to broach the eastern horizon.
Mary was startled, then relaxed when she felt hands slide around her body, one finding and massaging her breasts with their hard, ruby nipples, the other sliding down her body to her pussy, fingers delving between her pussy lips to find her liquid center. Looking over her shoulder, she saw Penjani's smiling face as she relaxed back against her, feeling her hard nipples pressing into her back. Reaching back behind herself, Mary's fingers found Penjani's pussy, slipping between her pussy lips into her wetness, a place she had spent much time with her tongue, finding the woman a delight to eat and be eaten by. She had lost track of the number of times during the night that they had shared a 69, both of their pussies full of cum.
"Oh, look!" Mary gasped, pointing to a small group of elephants making their way ponderously down to the water where they proceeded to throw water up in the air over themselves with their trunks as they enjoyed their morning wash as the sun rose.
For the next hour they watched the profusion of wildlife begin its day, each in its own way, everything peaceful and serene. Mary was sitting on the ground, leaning back on her elbows as she enjoyed the show while John continued to take pictures. When Masozi came and stood in front of her, his huge ebony cock hanging in her face, she didn't think anything of it as she opened her mouth and took as much of it as she could, sitting up and using both hands to jack him while she sucked his cock.
Penjani was on her hands and knees, Bruce kneeling behind her, his cock sliding in and out of her pussy. When Masozi's cock finally exploded in Mary's mouth, she struggled to gulp down all of the cum as he filled her mouth, registering out of the corner of her eye Penjani reversing herself and taking Bruce's cock into her mouth. Once again Mary marveled at how much cum Masozi was able to pump into her mouth as she continued to suck him off, not stopping until there was not a drop more to be had.
"A nice way to start the day," Masozi sighed as he stepped back while Mary continued to swallow, licking her lips.
"The best," Mary agreed, smiling up at him.
"We should sleep now," Masozi said as the flocks of birds rose into the sky and the flocks of animals wandered off. "Unless you want to take a nice hike."
"No, I need some sleep," Mary said.
They made their way back to the campsite, everyone laying down in the cave out of the sun to sleep.
"Something smells good," John said many hours later as he woke up.
"My god, the whole day has gone," Mary said.
Exiting the cave, they found Masozi fucking Penjani from behind.
"Did you have a good sleep?" Masozi asked when he saw them, not stopping his rhythmic back and forth as he fucked his wife.
"I slept like the dead," Mary replied, her mouth watering as she watched Masozi's glistening ebony shaft sliding in and out of Penjani's pussy.
"We're about an hour from sunset," Masozi said, grunting as he slammed his cock all the way into Penjani's pussy, holding her hips tightly against him. "You want to go down to the water again?" he asked as he pulled his cock from Penjani's pussy, a stream of cum flowing from her as the deep crimson interior glinted wetly as her pussy gaped open.
"Definitely," John replied, unable to tear his eyes from Penjani's spread pussy, something that he was enjoying getting to know better and better.
"I could use a wash," Penjani said, reaching between her legs and holding up a hand whose fingers were covered in cum.
Once again they made their way down to the water's edge, John setting up his cameras before joining the others in the water to get clean. As the sun sank lower in the western sky, the sky's colors began to soften, then change as the flocks of birds began to settle onto the water as a large herd of antelope came down to the water to drink.
"What is the best part for you?" Masozi asked as he came over to where Mary and Penjani were sitting shoulder to shoulder watching the sun melting into the water.
"All of it," Mary sighed in reply. "But especially this, being able to enjoy this," she said, reaching up for his huge ebony cock which was dangling down.
"Yes, that does make it nice," Masozi agreed as Mary leaned over and took his cock into her mouth, her tongue extended beneath the shaft as the head of his cock banged into the back of her mouth at the entrance to her throat. Try as she might, she could not get it past that point.
Mary moaned around Masozi's cock when she felt Penjani's hands slide around her body to cup her breasts, pinching and pulling on her sensitive nipples as she continued to suck Masozi's cock. The sun had just slipped below the horizon when Masozi's cock swelled, then exploded, hot, thick cum gushing onto her tongue as he came. As she gulped, swallowing his cum as he filled her mouth, Mary felt one of Penjani's hands sliding down her back, between her ass cheeks, and then fingers sliding into her sopping pussy. Masozi seemed to cum forever, requiring Mary to swallow several times before he slowed down and she was now able to suck him off as opposed to just being a cum bucket, albeit a very willing one. She felt Penjani's fingers pushing into her mouth from the corner and tasted her own pussy on them, quickly sucking on them before jamming the tip of her tongue into the slit of Masozi's cock as she attempted to squeeze every last drop of cum from him using both hands.
"I think you like sucking Masozi's cock," Penjani said, once again cupping Mary's breasts, her hard nipples between her thumbs and forefingers.
"It's wonderful," Mary agreed, gasping for breath.
"It's one of the reasons I agreed to marry him," Penjani said, then laughed, joined by Masozi. "Maybe one day you'll find a good man with a big cock that you can marry."
"That sounds like a perfect combination," Mary said, laughing. "I can put an advertisement in the paper: good man wanted, big cock required."
"It would be silly to marry a man with a small cock when you can have a big one," Penjani said.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I hate for this to end," Mary sighed later after they had eaten as she exhaled from taking a big hit on the spliff, a bottle of ktang in her hand.
"It's all a matter of perspective," Bruce said, taking the spliff from her, then the bottle of ktang as he stood over her, his cock dangling in her face.
"It's just so free, timeless," Mary sighed, reaching for Bruce's cock and gently tugging on it, pulling him to his knees in front of her as she lay back, hooking her ankles behind her head as he guided his cock into her open pussy.
"Bruce is right," Penjani said, mounting John as he lay back on the ground next to his sister as Bruce fucked her, "though it is much easier to feel that way out here. It's why we have chosen lives as rangers."
"You are so lucky," Mary said, bringing her legs down to wrap around Bruce's waist as she fucked back at him as he drove his cock in and out of her pussy.
"We are lucky to be Malawian," Masozi said. "There is no more peaceful country in the world."
"Everyone is too busy fucking," Mary said with a laugh, then gasped when Bruce pulled his cock from her pussy and moved up her body to stick it in her mouth, Masozi taking his place, his huge, ebony cock filling her once again.
Penjani was leaning back on her hands, her feet on either side of John's waist as she fucked him. John loved the sight of his white cock sliding between her ebony pussy lips into her glistening vermillion interior. It was the most erotic thing he had ever seen. He turned his head to the side to watch Mary suck Bruce off as he groaned, cumming in her mouth, her cheeks hollowing as she sucked on him, her throat convulsing as she gulped down the cum that gushed into her mouth.
John groaned when he felt his own balls overload, then explode, cum shooting up into Penjani's incredible pussy as she milked him dry, one hand reaching down to fondle his balls as they pumped cum into her.
"Mmm, you are fun to fuck," Penjani said as she squeezed the last drops of cum from his cock with her talented pussy.
"You are an incredible fuck," John replied, collapsing back, totally spent.
"She is very talented in that way," Masozi agreed, his huge, ebony cock sluicing noisily in and out of Mary's pussy.
John stared, still finding it hard to believe that it was the same sister that he had always known as Penjani dismounted his cock and moved to squat over Mary's mouth, cum running from her pussy onto Mary's extended tongue before she sank down onto it as Mary ate her pussy. He groaned, feeling his cock spasm as Bruce sucked it into his mouth, cleaning the cum cocktail from it before moving over to kneel between Mary's spread thighs as Masozi withdrew his huge ebony cock from her pussy, a river of cum following before Bruce could glue his mouth to her and slurp the cum cocktail that filled her while Masozi moved up to allow Mary to suck him clean.
"How long will we stay here?" Mary asked after a long, star-gazing silence as everyone savored the moment.
"As long as you like," Bruce replied. "There is no schedule other than the one we create as we go. We can stay here or we can move on to the upper plateau of the Nyika National Park. It's only a few hours from here but it will seem like an entirely different world."
"Will you come with us?" Mary asked, turning to look at Penjani.
"If you like," Penjani replied.
"I think that would be nice, don't you?" Mary said, asking John.
"Definitely nice," John replied.
Once again, the night became a kaleidoscope of sex beneath the stars. Mary found herself able to doze off now and then before yet another cock was presented to her mouth or pussy or ass. Her whole body was screaming for the intimacy of sexual touch and interaction. At one point Mary found herself on top of John in a 69 next to Masozi and Penjani doing the same. Bruce alternated fucking each of them as their pussies were eaten.
John was startled at first when Bruce's cock slid by his nose and into Mary's pussy as he was eating her. He concentrated on sucking on her tiny button of a clit, aware that she was getting wetter and wetter as Bruce fucked her. Then Bruce moved over to fuck Penjani and John was rewarded with a flood of fresh pussy juice from his sister as she continued sucking his cock.
Bruce appeared once again, his cock sliding easily into Mary's pussy. As John continued to try to eat her pussy while Bruce fucked her, he found himself with his tongue at the junction of Mary's pussy and Bruce's cock as it slid in and out of her, the shaft of his cock sliding along his tongue as it moved in and out of Mary's pussy. John was sucking on that very junction, slurping up the juices that were liberally flowing from his sister's pussy as Bruce fucked her when he noticed a change and realized that he was tasting cum, Bruce's cum as he emptied his balls in Mary's pussy.
John hesitated for a moment, then resumed, the taste of Bruce's cum becoming the dominant taste as he filled Mary's pussy. Then Bruce began to slowly withdraw his cock, the taste of his cum and Mary's pussy on the shaft as it slid along John's lips and tongue as he continued to try to eat his sister's pussy. Then John was surprised by the head of Bruce's cock slipping from Mary's pussy and dropping right onto his tongue, along with a stream of cum from her pussy. John could feel the cum still pulsing from Bruce's cock onto his tongue and he automatically closed his lips around the head of it, feeling it as it continued to cum in his mouth. He had to swallow and gulped down a mouthful of Bruce's cum, then found the courage to actively suck on the head of his cock, getting the last of his orgasm as Bruce finished cumming. When Bruce finally stopped cumming and sat back, pulling his cock from John's mouth, John glued his mouth to his sister's cum-leaking pussy and ate her until it was totally cleaned, leaving it glistening pinkly in the light of the fire.
Nothing was said, Bruce being the only one aware of what had just occurred as everyone once again relaxed, falling into a stupor before the next round began. Masozi had Mary on her hands and knees in front of him, his huge ebony cock gliding in and out of her ass while Penjani fucked John, Bruce filling her ass in a double, when he suggested that it was time to go down to the water for the sunrise. Mary had trouble holding down bouts of laughter as they made their way down to the water's edge, Masozi's cum leaking from her ass and down her legs the whole way. She gratefully sank into the water to clean herself while John set up his cameras.
Once again the flocks of birds awoke as the sky began to pink, the muffled sounds of their stirring breaking the silence. As the sun rose fully above the horizon, the herd of antelope appeared, as well as the group of elephants, the antelope making way and forming around them as everyone did their morning thing.
"Shall we stay the day or move on?" Bruce asked as they made their way back to the campsite after witnessing the sunrise and watching the flocks of birds take to wing and fly off in a sensuous ballet of amorphic shifting shapes.
"I could take pictures here forever," John said, "but I've got more than enough for now. I can always come back here."
"You'll see more big cats up on the Nyika Plateau," Masozi said. "It's also a lot wetter. It's the best place in Malawi to see flowers, hundreds of types of orchids."
"I'm ready for a bit of a change," Mary said, "though I could stay here forever."
With the five of them working, it only took half an hour to break down the camp and load the car. The route they took seemed to go up, up, up, right into the clouds, then through them to reveal a lush, green landscape. When Bruce finally stopped the car, it was where two small streams merged after flowing around each side of a rocky upcropping, the top of which was mostly flat. It didn't take them long to set up a camp.
"Come, we'll show you some of the area," Masozi said when they had finished setting up camp. "It will be wet," he explained as he undressed. "Unless you want wet clothes which will not dry up here, I suggest..."
"Any excuse to get naked," Mary said with a laugh as she stripped, her ruby nipples hard and erect.
By the time they returned to the campsite several hours later, Mary was exhausted. She hadn't been prepared for such an excursion, though it had been breathtakingly beautiful. They saw many small, colorfully plumed birds darting through the verdant foliage, as well as an astonishing array of orchids of every conceivable color and size. True to what Masozi had said, within 30 minutes of leaving the campsite, they were all as wet as if they had just exited a shower. John had to take care to protect his cameras on their tripods, one of which Masozi had put over his shoulder without saying anything.
"It's like a completely different world," Mary observed as she sank into one of the streams which bordered the rocky upcropping where they had their camp.
"And it's only a few hours from the Vwaza," Penjani pointed out.
"We have a couple of hours before we need to go watch the sunset," Masozi said. "It's about a 30-minute walk from here."
"This is really great," John said as he stood next to Mary as she sat in the stream. "You okay?" he asked, having noted how tired she had become on the hike.
"Yeah, I'm just not used to the exercise," Mary admitted. "I've gotten lazy since we've been here."
"Maybe you need an energy boost," John suggested, hefting his cock in his hand with a grin.
"Mmm, maybe I do," Mary agreed, reaching up for his cock, then clambering onto her knees in the middle of the stream to take it into her mouth.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
The next two days were full of a mind-boggling display of nature, from the flora to the fauna. Mary did better the second and third days as they took multi-hour hikes each morning after breakfast after returning from watching the sunrise and seeing the world awaken, flocks of birds rising into the sky, their cries filling the heavens, and even a small family of leopards each morning and evening watering, the cubs playing, rolling in the shallow water while 'mom' watched over them, once fixing her gaze on their group, then deciding that they were no threat after a couple of minutes and ignoring them after that.
The nights were even more magnificent with the spray of stars that comprised the Milky Way blazing overhead while they enjoyed their usual evening orgy.
John was beside himself with the photos he was getting, as well as Penjani constantly taking advantage of his tongue or cock, whichever one might be available. She was so elemental, so primal, Mary actually thrilled when she saw her wrapped around John, so pale, so white, her ebony skin a sharp contrast, the deep vermillion of her pussy, her ebony outer pussy lips with John's big, white cock sliding in and out.
Mary felt as though she were disembodied, almost in a heavenly state as she succumbed to the intoxicating allure of all that nature was offering her, but most especially Masozi and Bruce constantly keeping her filled with cock at every opportunity. She found it interesting, no longer off-putting, when Masozi and Bruce would take turns fucking each other in the ass. She noticed that John watched, though he made no move to join them, though several times she did see both Bruce and Masozi fill John's mouth with their cocks, either as they were cumming or right after, and John seemed more and more comfortable sucking them off.
All too soon they realized that it was time to head back, knowing that their parents would be worried about so long with no contact. Masozi and Penjani disappeared into the brush, but not before saying good-bye, promising to visit them again.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Probably the best time I've ever had in my life," Mary replied to Sara when she asked about their time. "I wouldn't even know where to start."
"Did you meet up with Masozi and Penjani?" Steve asked.
"Yeah, they found us in the Vwaza and went with us to Nyika," Bruce replied.
"They were amazing," Mary said. "I don't think I've ever met anyone like them before."
"And you won't," Sara said. "They are very, very special."
"Needless to say, we've heard from your parents," Steve said. "They're understandably worried, not having heard from you for almost a week. Me telling them that you were out in the bush probably didn't help."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"God, I can't believe that we're leaving," Mary said, her eyes moist as they waited to get on the bus the next morning after a night of non-stop sex with Steve, Sara, Bruce, and John. "I feel like I belong here and don't ever want to leave."
"You will always have a home wherever we are," Sara assured her. "We're Friends, after all."
"But it's also right and good that you go home now," Steve said. "Africa and Malawi are still very new to you, and your parents, and you can each help each other adapt."
"I don't know how I'm going to face them," Mary said. "I feel like a completely different person."
"As are your parents," Sara said. "I'm sure their education of Malawi has been every bit as challenging as yours. They are also learning and growing as people, like you.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Mary, John!" Harriet called out, waving her hand as they disembarked from the bus late the next day in Nkopola, James beaming at them next to her.
"Mom, dad!" Mary said, rushing into her mother's open arms. "Oh, we missed you."
"Well, we missed you, too," Harriet replied.
"You two look great," James observed after shaking John's hand, then hugging him, then hugging and kissing Mary.
"A week in the bush hiking will get you in shape," John said.
"I can't wait to hear all about it," Harriet said as they all climbed into the car.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I don't know how I'd feel so exposed like that with those big predator cats," Harriet said when they finished telling their tale around the kitchen table.
"The mother just gave us a long look, then didn't bother after that," John explained. "We were so deep in nature that I don't think humans are really seen often enough to be seen as a threat."
"Besides, we had Masozi and Panjani with us," Mary added. "They're almost a part of nature themselves. I never felt unsafe, only excited."
"Well, Steve and Sara couldn't say enough nice things about you," James said.
"They were just the best," Mary said. "Bruce, too. In a way, they're just like the Nances."
"It probably has something to do with Malawi," James mused. "It has its effect on you before you even realize it."
"I love it more and more every day," Mary said. "I can't imagine ever leaving."
"But what about school?" Harriet asked, a look of dismay on her face.
"I feel like I've been schooled more in the past 6 months than I'd ever be schooled in a classroom," John said.
"But what would you do?" James asked.
"I'm not going to worry about any of that right now," John said. "We came here for a year to see what it was like, have a break, a vacation, and that's what I'm going to do. I'll let the future take care of itself when the time comes."
"I agree," Mary said. "If we only have this year, then I want to make it count."
"But what about you?" John asked. "How is the school going, your outreach program?"
"Oh, the school couldn't be better," Harriet replied, beaming. "We have 30 students now, because of the outreach program, I think. More and more people are getting to meet us in their homes and they talk. We must be doing something right."
"Well, you sure seem happy," Mary observed.
"And why shouldn't we be?" James asked. "Life is good, God is great, we have our health and a purpose."
"Well, I'm beat," Mary said. "It's been a long day on the bus. I'm going to take a shower and go to bed."
"Me, too," John agreed.
"We'll see you in the morning," James said as John and Mary got to their feet and left the kitchen.
I wondered where I left that camera, John said to himself when he saw the little camera on the table in the hallway, picking it up as he went up the stairs.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"James, I'm really happy to have the kids back home, but at the same time..." Harriet said as she snuggled up next to him, sighing as her body came down from the intense orgasm she had had while James fucked her.
"They're going to cramp our...style?" James asked, chuckling. "No more early-morning Blessings, et cetera?"
"Well, yes," Harriet replied, pinching his nipple. "What are we going to do?"
"Well, for starters, we're going to be more circumspect," James replied.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
John woke up in the middle of a wet dream to find his cock pumping cum into Mary's mouth in the morning, her green eyes looking up at him as she sucked him off.
"I just had to," Mary gasped when she had finished, swallowing his cum.
"What about mom and dad?" John asked, not the least bit sorry.
"They're too busy fucking to hear us," Mary said, giggling.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"What are your plans for today?" Harriet asked when they were all gathered for breakfast and Chabwera and Teleza served them.
"I'm going to sleep," Mary declared.
"I'm going to work on the photos and videos I shot," John replied, "try to make some sense of it."
"Well, we have to get to our classes," James said, "so I guess we'll see you at dinner."
"I meant it, I'm going to sleep all day," Mary said as she got to her feet. "I think everything is catching up to me."
"I'll work on the pictures for a while," John said, "but I think I'll end up sleeping, too."
The first thing John did was to gather all of the memory cards and copy them to the computer in two separate locations on different drives to make sure he had a backup before deleting the memory cards and putting them back into their respective cameras.
"This must be all of the pictures we've taken back to the beginning," he said to himself as he imported everything into Lightroom and saw the directory tree.
Concentrating on the dates that he knew he and Mary had been away, John quickly tagged the photos as Malawi, for normal, regular photos, and J&M for their more personal photos, the ones that they wouldn't be showing to anyone. He was shocked to see that there were several hundred personal photos and his cock quickly got hard as he looked at them.
Unable to control himself, John went quietly to his sister's room, finding her asleep on top of her covers on her stomach, her head turned away.
"Wha-what?" Mary asked groggily when she felt her brother's cock pressing into her pussy. "Oh, god, yes, fuck me, fuck me," she gasped when she realized what was happening, lifting her ass to give him a better angle as he slammed his cock in and out of her tight pussy.
"I'm not complaining, but what was that all about?" Mary asked when John finally filled her pussy with cum and then collapsed onto the bed next to her.
"I was working on the pictures," John explained as Mary leaned over and took his gooey cock into her mouth to suck on. "The ones of you are so hot, I just couldn't control myself."
"Well, don't ever control yourself if this is the result," Mary said with a laugh, lifting her face from his now clean cock. "I want to see them," she said as she swung a leg over his head and lowered her cum-filled pussy onto his mouth, sighing in delight as he began to eat her.
"My god, these are amazing!" Mary gasped as she leaned over her brother's shoulder and stared at the monitor which currently had a photo of her with Masozi's cock sticking in her pussy while she rode him, John's cock buried in her ass and Bruce's in her mouth, cum running down her chin.
"Fuck!" Mary gasped when the next photo filled the monitor showing Charlene's pussy, cum running from it, John's tongue sticking between her long, cummy pussy lips and into her hole.
In a flash, Mary had pulled John over to the bed and mounted him, lowering herself onto his cock, pounding her pussy up and down, the two of them groaning and grunting from their exertions, so much so that they failed to hear or see Teleza at the door to the room, stopping as she entered, her eyes wide, a big smile on her face as she watched the two siblings fucking.
"I think those kids are a lot more like their parents than anyone realizes," Teleza said to Chabwera when she went downstairs and found him in the kitchen, explaining what she had just seen.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, hi, Teleza," Mary said when she and John entered the kitchen a while later looking for something to eat, having worked up quite an appetite.
"Did you have a good sleep?" Teleza asked, a big smile splitting her ebony face.
"Very good," Mary replied, a slight blush coloring her cheeks.
"You enjoyed Rhumpi?" she asked.
"It was fantastic," Mary replied, "though we mostly were in the bush, Vwaza and Nyika."
"Did you see the big market?" Teleza asked.
"Yes," Mary replied as Teleza set the food down on the table for them. "It was amazing."
"And you made Friends?" Teleza asked, capitalizing the word in the way she said it.
"Um, yes," Mary replied, not exactly certain what she was being asked. "The Bishops are wonderful people."
"Yes, very good people, very much Malawi," Teleza agreed. "Many Friends."
"Everyone seems to know them," John agreed.
"They are many years in Rhumpi and their parents before them," Teleza said. "They are also Ngoni, like me."
"Maybe one day we'll be able to be Ngoni, too," Mary said.
"That can be," Teleza agreed, "if you have an honest desire and Chief Bwerani accepts you."
"You mean like mom and dad?" John asked.
"Exactly," Teleza replied, nodding. "Then you can enjoy sharing Blessings with other Ngoni."
"What exactly does that mean," Mary asked, "sharing Blessings?"
"You know what a Friendship ceremony is?" Teleza asked.
"Y-yes," Mary stammered. "We went to a Tumbuka Friendship ceremony with the Bishops."
"That is a form of sharing of Blessings," Teleza said, "though Tumbuka is different than Ngoni. You became Friends?" she asked, eyeing them.
"Well, I did," Mary confessed, her face flushing at the remembrance, "but not John."
"Maybe you would prefer Ngoni Friendship," Teleza suggested. "It is easier."
"Maybe," John replied noncommittally.
"Mom and dad are Ngoni," Mary said.
"Yes, and they are Friends," Teleza replied. "We share Blessings daily."
"Sharing Blessings?" Chabwera said as he entered the kitchen.
"They were asking about it," Teleza said.
"Sharing Blessings is the heart and soul of Malawi," Chabwera said, nodding sagely. "Without sharing Blessings and Friendship, what is life?"
"Mary did the Tumbuka Friendship ceremony," Teleza informed him.
"Ah, very good, and congratulations," Chabwera said, a smile on his face. "Tumbuka is good, Ngoni is best."
"I'd like to learn about all of the tribes, I think," Mary said. "Are they so different?"
"Only in some small ways," Chabwera replied. "Only Ngoni share Blessings whenever they meet. It is our way of recognizing each other, reinforcing the community."
"Do you only share Blessings with other Ngoni?" Mary asked.
"Not necessarily," Chabwera replied, "but always with Ngoni."
"When would you share Blessings with someone who is not Ngoni?" Mary asked.
"If someone is close or perhaps thinking of joining Ngoni," Chabwera replied. "Of course, always if it is requested. It is an honor to be asked to share Blessings."
"Or to be Blessed," Teleza said. "I cannot remember a day in my life that did not start with Chabwera's Blessing. It is the source of my strength to live."
"That sounds wonderful," Mary sighed wistfully.
"Because you are not Ngoni, it is not appropriate that Chabwera should offer you his Blessing," Teleza explained. "But I can assure you that he would be greatly honored if you were to request his Blessing. The same goes for you, John. I cannot offer or ask to receive your Blessing, but you are free to honor me by offering it."
"The man always does the Blessing?" Mary asked.
"Always," Teleza replied. "The man is the source of strength."
"If I knew how, I'd offer you my Blessing," John said, "but I have no idea how that is done."
"It is enough that you offer," Teleza said, smiling at the young man. "And I assure you, you know exactly what to do," she said, sinking to her knees in front of him and reaching for his shorts, Mary gasping when she pulled them down to reveal his cock dangling in front of him.
"Oh, wow!" John gasped when Teleza took his cock into her mouth, all the way, her nose pressing up against his stomach.
Mary just stared in astonishment as this old, black woman sucked John's cock right there in the kitchen while her husband watched, a big smile on his face.
John realized too late that Teleza must be able to taste Mary's pussy all over his cock, as that is where it had been before they came downstairs, and the thought and accompanying imagery were too much for him and his balls exploded, cum surging from his cock into Teleza's mouth.
"I thank you for the honor of your Blessing," Teleza said, gasping for breath when she finished totally sucking John off and rose to her feet.
"Uh, my pleasure," John said, unable to believe what had just happened, an old woman giving him the blowjob of a lifetime.
"I would like to be Blessed," Mary said, sinking to her knees in front of Chabwera and reaching for his pants.
Both Mary and John's eyes opened wide when they saw the thick ebony cock that Chabwera sported. Mary actually moaned when she took it into her mouth, thinking for just a moment that he was old enough to be her grandfather as she sucked his cock. When he finally came, Mary was shocked at how much cum gushed into her mouth as she gulped it down, finally succeeding in sucking him off before she sat back, licking her lips and swallowing.
"Thank you for allowing me to share my Blessing with you," Chabwera said as he put his cock back into his trousers.
"Uh, thank you for, uh, Blessing me," Mary said as she got off of her knees and sat in one of the chairs.
"Now that we have shared Blessings, we are allowed to offer to share Blessings with you," Teleza explained, "as you are allowed to request the sharing yourselves."
"Uh, you won't tell mom and dad about this, will you?" Mary asked. "I'm not sure that they'd understand."
"Of course we will say nothing if you wish us not to," Teleza assured her.
"When you are ready, we invite you to a Ngoni Friendship ceremony," Chabwera said. "We would enjoy being Friends."
"Oh, well, thank you," Mary said. "I think I'd like that."
"Once you are a Friend to Ngoni, other Ngoni will be interested in Friendship," Teleza explained.
"That sounds, well, wonderful," Mary said, beaming. "Do all Ngoni always, uh, share Blessings every time they meet?" she asked.
"The sharing is offered, but accepting is up to the individual," Teleza explained. "Maybe you are busy or not in the mood. The point is that all Ngoni have the sharing as a common bond. It keeps us close."
"I can imagine that it does," Mary said, laughing.
"Wonderful children," Teleza observed when John and Mary had gone back upstairs. "Just like their parents. They'll be fine."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"You look much more rested," Harriet observed as they sat down for their evening meal.
"Today was just what the doctor ordered," Mary said, smiling at Chabwera as he placed dishes on the table with Teleza.
"How did your photo sorting go?" James asked.
"I can't believe that I took over 3,000 photos and videos," John replied with a laugh. "I've got most of the gross sorting done. I'll have enough finished tomorrow to be able to give you a rough look before I try to refine it down to the best stuff if you're interested."
"Whenever you're comfortable letting us see it," James replied.
"You're going out to your Friendship outreach tonight?" Mary asked, a carefully neutral expression on her face.
"Uh, yes, we are," James replied when he saw Harriet cough as she sipped her wine, her cheeks coloring. "A local grain broker and his wife and a goat farmer and his wife. We usually get back by 11:00."
"Have any of your Friends expressed any curiosity or interest in the Church?" Mary asked.
"No, but it's too early for that," James replied. "We're trying to meet them as people first. They know who we are and what we do, but we're trying to meet them on their terms and know them as people first, let them know us as people. The rest will naturally follow in time. It's a long-term process."
"It sounds great, meeting the people in their homes," Mary said. "We've only been in Chewba's home when we bought the scooter."
"It is so much more personal, less threatening for them," James said. "They're in their own space, doing things their way, accepting us if we can adapt. Hopefully, it will all come full circle and we'll accept each other, make it a real 2-way exchange."
"But we need to go," Harriet said, looking at her watch. "One thing we try to do is show our respect for them by arriving at the time they set, not make them wait for us. They seem to really appreciate it."
"Well, you certainly have full lives," Mary observed, "teaching all day, visiting in the evenings. You do it every day?"
"The only evening we've missed, actually, is last night," James said. "Meeting your bus was far more important."
"We'll see you in the morning," Harriet said, hugging and kissing each of them as they left.
"Can you believe that?" Mary asked, laughing after their parents had gone. "They're going to a Friendship ceremony every night."
"It's hard to imagine," John said, shaking his head.
"Well, we've got until 11:00, did mom say?" Mary asked, grinning at her brother. "I am so horny."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, what an evening!" Harriet gasped as she and James slowly walked home. "Sometimes I really do feel as though I'm on an episode of The Twilight Zone," she said with a laugh. "That goat farmer had the fattest cock I've ever seen. And it took him forever to cum."
"The video is over 20 minutes," James said, smiling down at his diminutive wife.
"My pussy is actually sore," Harriet lamented.
"It still turns me on like crazy to see those black cocks plunging in and out of your pussy," James told her.
"I can't believe how much I look forward to the evening," Harriet sighed as they approached their house. "I actually felt a moment of resentment last night at having to miss...to miss..."
"I know what you mean," James said as he opened the door to the kitchen to let her in. "Let's go upstairs and see if my tongue can't make some of that soreness go away," he said, dropping the camera on the hall table as they ascended.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Mary and John listened to their parents fucking the next morning, the sounds of their enthusiastic explosion easily audible through the ventilation duct next to the bed, struggling not to make any noise so that they could listen as John sawed his cock in and out of Mary's ass.
"Good morning!" Harriet greeted John and Mary when they arrived for breakfast, a smile on her face and a spring to her step.
"You look really happy, mom," Mary said, hugging her mother, then kissing her.
"And why shouldn't I, having breakfast with my family," Harriet replied as they all sat down and Chabwera and Teleza served breakfast.
"Good morning, Chabwera, Teleza," Mary said, smiling at the surprise in their faces at being specifically greeted.
"Good morning, Mary," Teleza replied.
"I have some news," James announced. "Beginning next week, we're going to start, or try, the idea we had of rotating personnel through each of the missions. We've all agreed that two weeks are necessary for a reasonable chance to get a grasp of what each mission is doing, so your mother will be going to Chipita and Julie Hooker will be coming here from Lilongwe.
"You're going to be with Greg and Charlene!" Mary exclaimed, her eyes shining. "You are so going to love them and Chipita."
"Why are only the women going to different missions?" John asked.
"That's just this time," James replied. "We're going to see how it goes this first time, see what everyone's feedback is, before proceeding. We plan on each of the couples spending two weeks at each of the missions every two months."
"It's going to be strange with mom not being here," Mary said. "And we don't really know Julie at all. I don't even remember talking to her when we arrived."
"I'm sure it will work out," Harriet assured her.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Whoa!" John gasped as he sat at the computer.
He had been working on the photographs for several hours and had inadvertently clicked on a folder of photos that he had not taken.
"Mary!" he called out. "Mary!"
"What is it?" she replied when she appeared in his doorway, an exasperated look on her face.
"Come look at this," John said, sitting back in his chair as Mary approached.
"Oh, wow!" Mary gasped when she looked at the monitor and saw the photo of her mother leaning back on her elbows, naked, her feet on the edge of some table while a huge black cock stuck in/out of her pussy.
For the next hour, John and Mary scrolled through all of the photos that James had taken at the nightly Friendship ceremonies, seeing their parents having sex with all of the different people.
"I am absolutely blown away," John said as he collapsed back in his chair.
"In a million years, even though I knew it, I wouldn't have believed it," Mary agreed. "This is awful, but mom looks really hot with those black cocks in her."
"She looks just like you," John retorted with a laugh. "Even her pussy is like yours."
"I see where you got that cock of yours now," Mary said with a laugh. "Dad's okay in that department."
"What are we going to do about this?" John asked.
"Why should we do anything?" Mary asked. "Are you going to call them out when we've been..."
"God, I'm not going to be able to look at mom now without picturing her with a big black cock in her mouth or pussy," John groaned.
"God, why do I feel jealous?" Mary asked, dragging John from his computer chair to the bed, pushing him back and crawling on top of him, not stopping until her sopping pussy was planted on his mouth. "I shouldn't be jealous of my own mother, should I, especially not when I've got a brother like you to eat my pussy and fuck me?"
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, mom, I'm going to miss you!" Mary practically sobbed as they said good-bye at the bus station.
"Now, now, Mary," Harriet assured her. "It's going to be fine. We can talk every day on the phone and the two weeks will go by before you know it."
"Let me know when you arrive," James said, hugging his wife tightly.
"I will," Harriet promised. "And all of you make sure to make Julie feel at home. She should feel welcome, not a stranger."
"I'm sure everything will be fine," James assured her.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Hello, Julie," James greeted her when she arrived later that afternoon on the bus from Lilongwe.
"James! Hello," Julie greeted him, hugging him. "And John and Mary, hello!" she said, hugging each of them. "Are you as nervous as me?"
"Yes!" Mary said, laughing and immediately liking her. "It's strange not to have mom here."
"Well, hopefully, I'll be able to fill in for her somewhat," Julie said with a smile, her dark eyes flashing.
John picked up her bag and they all piled into the car for the short ride back to the house.
"Chabwera, Teleza!" Julie cried out when she saw them, hugging each of them in turn. "It's wonderful to see you again."
"You look good, Julie," Teleza observed.
"I feel good," Julie replied, "and excited. I'm looking forward to learning more about your mission."
"Well, you're just in time for dinner," Teleza said.
"Do I have time for a shower first?" Julie asked. "That bus ride..."
"Of course," James replied. "I should have thought of that. Would you like to call Abel, let him know that you got here okay?"
"No, that's not necessary," Julie replied with a laugh. "After more than 20 years in Malawi, he knows that I can take care of myself. Besides, Sara is probably there by now. She'll take good care of him."
"Here, I'll take your bag up and you can take a shower," James said, leading the way.
John and Mary exchanged glances when they left.
"I wonder if she knows just how well mom might take care of Abel?" Mary mused.
"She seems okay," John said. "Maybe this won't be so bad."
"Oh, that's better," Julie said when she reappeared after her shower, her dark hair glistening with wetness, wearing a native wraparound skirt and a halter top. "Oh, I've missed Teleza's cooking," she said as they sat down to eat.
Dinner was basically a series of questions from Julie about the mission and what they were doing and planning. She seemed pleased with what she heard, complimenting James on accomplishing so much, so quickly.
"Well, Harriet is just as responsible," James said. "She's been invaluable in connecting with the local people."
"I've heard about your novel outreach program," Julie said with a smile, as they sat back from their completed meal.
"Yes, it's been very successful so far," James acknowledged. "In fact, I need to go meet two new couples. You'll be okay here with John and Mary until I get back?"
"A Friendship ceremony?" Julie asked, surprised to see James squirming in his seat.
"Uh, yes," James replied.
"Well, you certainly shouldn't go by yourself," Julie said. "I'm not tired and my belly is full. I'd be happy to join you."
"Uh, okay, sure," James replied, nonplussed. "You want to just jump right in?"
"Why not?" Julie replied with a smile. "It's what I'm here for."
"Well, I guess we should go, then," James said, butterflies in his stomach. "We'll see the two of you later."
"Oh, you're not going to join us?" Julie asked, her eyes open in surprise.
"Of course we are," Mary quickly replied, seeing the panic all over her father's face as he struggled to say something. "Mom told us to take care of you, make you feel at home."
"Don't forget your camera, dad," John said, picking it up off of the hall table and handing it to him as they left.
Mary was jumping out of her skin as they walked into town, grabbing and squeezing John's hand several times as they walked, amused at how uncomfortable their father seemed, not saying much and stumbling over his words when he did.
"James, welcome," the smiling man greeted them when they knocked on the door. "But this is not Harriet," he observed.
"No, Harriet is up in Chipita visiting our mission there," James explained. "Julie is visiting from the mission in Lilongwe."
"You are most welcome," the man said as they entered. "And your children of whom we have heard so many good things."
Kmane was a barrel-chested man with a deep voice, his bright smile seeming to be permanently attached to his face. His wife, Imani, was just the opposite, a waif-like slip of a woman. They were in their 50s. The other couple, Dkempi and Palawi, were in their 30s. They both appeared average in every respect.
John and Mary enjoyed the socializing, more the center of attention than James or Julie. James was clearly uncomfortable while Julie seemed at ease.
"Shall we begin?" Kmane asked after an hour or so of socializing.
John and Mary watched, fascinated, as the room was suddenly cleared and transformed, the table where the food had been suddenly piled with carpets.
"I offer Friendship," Kmane said formally to Julie.
"I would be honored," Julie replied, taking his extended hand and moving over to the carpet-covered table where she removed her halter top to reveal two small breasts, more large brown nipples than anything, then unwrapped her skirt to reveal that she wore nothing beneath it, a little thickening from her waist to her knees, though for her early 50s, she still looked good.
"Dad, your camera," Mary reminded him as she saw him staring slack-jawed at a naked Julie.
Startled out of his trance and then embarrassed, James reached into his pocket and produced the small camera just as Kmane was helping Julie up onto the table. Julie smiled as she leaned back on her elbows, bringing her feet up onto the edge of the table well apart, spreading her pudgy thighs wide apart to reveal her pussy with its fat outer lips with her clit bulging out from between them, having noticed that John had moved so that he had a clear view of her.
"Oh, my!" Mary gasped softly when Kmane dropped his trousers to reveal a large, thick ebony cock which he massaged in his hand.
Julie didn't seem to mind when James moved closer, camera in hand as Kmane began rubbing the fat head of his cock up and down between her fat pussy lips. Mary had moved to stand next to John and realized that she was holding her breath as she saw Kmane's cock start to disappear into Julie's pussy.
"Mmm, yes, Friendship," Julie sighed as she watched Kmane's ebony cock disappear into her pussy.
John and Mary watched in fascination as this middle-aged missionary woman was fucked by Kmane. They could see his ebony rod glistening from Julie's pussy juices as it slid in and out of her.
"I offer you my Blessing," Kmane gasped, pulling his cock from Julie's pussy and climbing up onto the table as she lay back, opening her mouth for his cock which began to spurt cum even as it hit her tongue.
"Impressive," Mary said sotto voce to John as they watched Julie take every bit of Kmane's cock into her mouth as she sucked him off.
"Thank you for the honor of your Blessing," Julie gasped when she had finished, licking her lips and swallowing the last of Kmane's big load.
"I offer Friendship," Dkempi said as he moved to the end of the table and dropped his trousers to reveal a fairly normal cock, ebony black.
"I accept your Friendship," Julie said as she pushed up onto her elbows to watch as Dkempi's cock disappeared into her pussy. "I thank you for the honor of your Blessing," she said after Dkempi had finished fucking her and she had sucked him off.
Everyone was all smiles, Imani and Palawi enthusiastically kissing their husbands, their pride in them obvious.
"Are you going to offer me Friendship, James?" Julie asked, once again leaning back on her elbows, her feet up on the edge of the table wide apart, her pussy now gaping open lewdly, her large clit glistening in invitation.
"I'll take the camera," John said, taking it from his father's numb fingers.
James felt like a zombie as he took his place in front of Julie's spread thighs and dropped his trousers to the ground, embarrassed that his children were witness as he filled Julie's pussy with his cock.
"I offer you Friendship," he remembered to say after pumping his cock in and out of Julie's pussy a few times.
"I accept your Friendship," she replied with a smile, squeezing his cock with her pussy muscles, enjoying the surprise in his eyes as he felt it. "And I look forward to your Blessing," she added, a twinkle in her eyes as she watched his cock sluicing in and out of her pussy.
"Oh, wow!" Mary gasped when she saw her father pull his glistening cock from Julie's pussy, only slightly smaller than John's, and crawl up onto the table to fill her mouth, groaning as his balls exploded.
Mary could see Julie's throat convulsing as she gulped down her father's load of cum, then his entire cock disappeared into her mouth as she finished sucking him off, smacking her lips in appreciation when she finally let his cock fall from her mouth.
"And you, John, will you offer me Friendship?" Julie asked, smiling at the shocked look on John's face and noticing the blanching of color from James'.
"I'll take that," Mary said, relieving John of the camera, a big smile on her face as he stepped forward, smiles on everyone's faces except their father's.
"I offer Friendship," John managed to say as he dropped his trousers to murmurs of appreciation of the big, hard cock that appeared, pointing right at Julie's spread pussy.
"I accept your Friendship," Julie replied, reaching down with one hand between her legs to spread her pussy lips apart, revealing her glistening hole.
"Oh, yeah," Mary breathed as she took pictures as her brother's cock slid into Julie's welcoming pussy.
John was surprised at how good Julie's pussy felt, tight even though she had just fucked three different men before him. He could feel her milking his cock with her pussy as he slid it in and out of her.
James was in shock as he watched his son fucking Julie. There were too many conflicting thoughts running around in his head for him to make any sense of anything, other than the fact that John seemed to be having no problem dealing with the situation. Mary's obvious glee in the proceedings surprised him, watching as she got as close as she could with the camera as John continued to fuck Julie.
"Oh, yes, that's it," Julie encouraged John. "Let me taste that Blessing of yours," she gasped as he withdrew his cock from her pussy and climbed up onto the table, cum gushing from the end of his cock as he approached her face, splashing across her nose, mouth, and chin before she could capture it in her mouth to suck him off.
"Wow!" Mary gasped when she saw all of John's cock disappear into Julie's mouth, her throat convulsing as she gulped his cum.
"Thank you," Julie panted when she finally let John's cock fall from her mouth, using a finger to scrape the cum from her face into her mouth, "for sharing your Blessing with me."
"Uh, my pleasure," John said, blushing as he looked down at Julie's spread, red, raw pussy, remembering how good it had felt wrapped around his cock.
"Oh, I just love Friendship ceremonies," Julie sighed as she climbed down off the table, not bothering to dress.
"I offer Friendship," Imani said, standing in front of James and softly taking his hand.
Mary was standing between John and Julie as her father got up onto the table and laid back, his cock standing straight up. When Imani undressed and climbed up onto the table, it was almost impossible to make out any details due to the deep ebony blackness of her skin until she reached down beneath herself and began to rub the head of James' cock back and forth between her pussy lips, exposing the vermillion interior into which it disappeared as she lowered herself.
"It's beautiful, isn't it?" Julie said, an arm going around Mary's shoulders as she felt one of Mary's arms slide around her waist as they watched Imani's ass rise up and down, James' white cock appearing and disappearing until finally Imani dismounted him and spun around, lowering her face towards his glistening cock as it erupted, a stream of thick cum shooting up into the air before she succeeded in wrapping her lips around him and sucking him off, finally sitting up, a big smile on her face as she licked her lips in satisfaction.
"I offer Friendship," Palawi said as she stripped, her ebony body seeming to glow, Imani feverishly kissing Kmane.
"I accept your Friendship," James said, sighing when he felt her hot pussy envelope his cock as she began to fuck him.
Julie was startled when Palawi began sucking James' spurting cock as Mary suddenly took off her clothes.
"I offer Friendship," Mary said, climbing up onto the table as Palawi kissed Dkempi after finishing sucking James off and climbing down off the table.
"M-M-Mary!" James gasped when he saw her straddling him, her naked breasts with their hard ruby nipples pointing at him as she reached beneath herself to wrap her hand around her father's still-hard cock.
"Do you accept my Friendship?" she asked, placing the head of his cock at the entrance to her pussy and lowering herself until it was inside of her.
"I accept your Friendship," James groaned as Mary lowered herself completely onto her father's cock.
"My, my, my," Julie said softly, her eyes wide as she watched Mary fucking her father while John took pictures.
Because he had already cum several times, Mary was able to fuck her father for almost 15 minutes before she felt him getting ready to cum. Quickly spinning around, Mary took her father's glistening cock into her mouth, smiling around it into the camera that her brother had in her face as James' cock exploded, cum quickly filling her mouth, some leaking from the corner to run down her chin before she finally succeeded in sucking him off, sitting up as she licked her lips and swallowed to the approving murmurs of the audience.
"God, John, that was amazing!" Mary gushed, hugging her brother when she had climbed down off of the table, mashing her naked breasts into his stomach.
"I don't even know what to say," John said, shaking his head. "Probably the most outrageous thing I've ever seen."
"I offer Friendship," Kmane said, standing in front of Mary.
"Oh, how sweet," Mary replied, blushing. "I accept your Friendship," she said, taking his hand and allowing herself to be led to the table as James just stood staring in shock.
"My, my, my," Julie said, licking her lips as she watched Kmane's cock disappear into Mary's pussy while her brother took pictures.
"I offer Friendship," Dkempi said shyly after Kmane had finished fucking Mary and allowed her to suck him off.
"I accept your Friendship," Mary replied, watching intently as once again another black cock filled her pussy.
"Your daughter is quite special," Julie said to James as she stood next to him watching Dkempi fuck her.
"I don't even know what to say," James said, shaking his head. "We'd tried to keep this from them."
"Clearly a waste of time and energy," Julie replied with a laugh, turning to him and cupping his cock and balls in her hand as she pressed her nipples into his arm and side.
"She looks just like her mother," James sighed as he watched Dkempi crawl up Mary's body to stick his glistening cock into her mouth and cum, Mary's throat convulsing as she gulped his cum down.
Everyone was offering congratulations when Mary finished sucking Dkempi off and he climbed down into the embrace of his wife.
"John," Mary said, leaning back on her elbows, her pussy spread wide open, glistening as it gaped open, her delicate inner lips swollen with excitement, like her tiny clit, "aren't you going to offer Friendship? I am your sister, after all."
John froze, all eyes on him, noticing his father's mouth had fallen open.
"Maybe you'd better use this," Julie said, taking the camera from John's hand and gently pushing him towards the table, then handing the camera to James. "There's only one first Friendship ceremony," she told him, then turned to watch as John slid the head of his cock up and down between his sister's spread pussy lips.
"Ahhhhh, yes," Mary moaned as she felt her brother's cock fill her pussy, excited beyond words that everyone was watching, especially her father.
John was aware of their father and the camera, he just didn't care. Nothing he had experienced so far compared to fucking his sister like this in front of everyone, at her request. When he finally pulled his cock from her pussy to crawl up her body, it was already spurting, cum splashing onto her open pussy, then across her body and breasts until he finally succeeded in getting to her face and sticking it into her mouth where she finished sucking him off.
"Oh, yes, yes," Mary gasped as she let John's cock slip from her mouth, arching her hips in delight as she felt a mouth on her fiery pussy, looking down to meet Julie's eyes as she felt her tongue sliding into her.
"I just don't know what to say," James said as they walked home.
"You could say that you enjoyed it," Mary said. "God knows, I sure did."
"But incest," James said.
"Is not a problem in Malawi," Julie said. "There is no stigma and they don't allow pregnancies to develop in case of an accident. Was that your first Friendship ceremony?" she asked John and Mary.
"We went to one in Chipita, but only as guests," Mary replied. "But that was a Tumbuka ceremony. It was different from this."
"I'll say it is," Julie laughed.
"You seem so relaxed about the whole Friendship ceremony," Mary said as they approached their house.
"Well, we've been in Malawi almost 25 years now running a mission," Julie said as they entered. "I've done several thousand Friendship ceremonies. I never get tired of them. They're such a wonderful way to really connect with people."
"Well, your pussy sure doesn't feel like you've fucked thousands of men," John said injudiciously. "I hope that doesn't sound wrong."
"No, that sounds perfect and I thank you for the compliment," Julie laughed, "especially coming from such a nice young man with such an impressive cock. I've learned, we all learned, that if you fuck enough, your fucking muscles get in shape. Abel accuses me of trying to squeeze his cock off with my pussy sometimes."
"Uh, dad, where is Julie going to sleep?" Mary asked.
"Well, if you and your brother don't mind, I'll sleep with your father," Julie said.
"Gosh no," Mary replied, grinning at her father's embarrassment and discomfort.
"And you should each feel free to join us whenever you'd like," Julie added. "Unless you object, that is," she said to James.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Harriet! Hello! Welcome!" Greg Nance called out as Harriet stepped off of the bus, finally arrived in Chipita.
"Oh, hello, Greg," Harriet said, feeling as though she had just stepped off of a boat after the harrowing bus ride. "It's so nice to see you again," she said as he enveloped her in his arms, holding her close as he hugged her.
"Hello, Harriet," Charlene said, smiling at the diminutive woman when she stepped back from her father's embrace.
"Charlene!" Harriet said, her face lighting up. "I almost feel as though I know you. John and Mary never stop going on about you and how much they enjoyed their time here. All of you," she added, smiling at Greg.
"It was just awful when they left," Charlene said as Greg grabbed Harriet's bags. "I was just about ready to go visit them, actually, I miss them so much."
"Well, I know that they'd love that," Harriet said.
"I'll bet you'd like to get cleaned up and eat something," Greg said as they piled into the Land Rover.
"Desperately," Harriet agreed. "Bus travel in Malawi is definitely a full-contact sport."
"It is fun, isn't it?" Charlene laughed.
"I seem to remember something about a spring?" Harriet said when they pulled up to the house. "This is a beautiful setting! No wonder you love it so much."
"We're really lucky, that's for sure," Greg said. "Actually, it's a good time for the spring. Sunset's in about an hour. You won't want to miss that. Charlene, why don't you take Harriet down to the spring. I'll get some things together and join you."
"Come on," Charlene said, her face lit up as she grabbed one of Harriet's hands. "It'll be almost like having John and Mary here again. It's amazing how much the two of you look alike."
"Oh, my!" Harriet gasped when they pushed through some rushes to reach the spring next to the flowing river. "This is beautiful."
"And the water's great," Charlene said as she stripped, Harriet staring at her open-mouthed as she lowered herself into the water. "Aren't you coming in?" she asked, looking up at her.
Trying not to blush, Harriet undressed, aware of her ruby-tipped nipples knurling into knots as she entered the water, conscious of Charlene's eyes on her.
"You really do look just like Mary," Charlene told her.
"How's the water?" Greg asked when he suddenly showed up.
"It's marvelous," Harriet replied, resisting the urge to cover herself, unable to tear her eyes away as he undressed, admiring his lean body as he splashed into the water and sat down between them, his thigh pressing against hers.
"Ktang, anyone?" Greg asked, holding up a bottle.
"I was hoping you'd bring some," Charlene said, reaching for the bottle. "You like ktang, Harriet?" Charlene asked after taking a big mouthful from the bottle and offering it to her.
"We drink it almost every night," Harriet laughed as she took the bottle from Charlene.
"That's right, the Ngoni Friendship ceremony, they like the ktang," Greg said nodding. "I like the Ngoni Friendship ceremony, though it's a bit tame compared to the Tumbuka, which you'll see. There's ktang available, it's just not so much a part of things."
Harriet almost choked at the casual discussion of the Friendship ceremony, especially right in front of Charlene.
"Our local community, Christians and just Friends, are all very excited about you being here," Greg said.
"They know?" Harriet gasped. "We didn't say anything. We weren't sure how the idea would be accepted."
"The approval seems to be unanimous," Greg said. "The Malawian people are so community focused. In their minds, us doing this proves that we are not an insular church, like the Catholics, who, though they admit the Malawian people, look down at them and don't treat them as equals. You'd never find a Catholic priest or nun at a Friendship ceremony."
"I never thought of it from the Malawian perspective," Harriet admitted.
"Well, you'll get to meet a bunch of them tonight after dinner," Greg told her. "We're going to have a small welcoming Friendship ceremony in your honor."
"Oh! I, uh, I, I wasn't expecting that," Harriet stammered, her face flushing as she realized the implications, suddenly feeling a bit panicky without James.
"It's not necessary to have a Friendship ceremony," Greg said, reading her body language. "It can just be a simple welcoming party."
"I, I was just surprised," Harriet said, her nipples so hard she thought they would break off. "I wouldn't want them to think there was something wrong. I'm sure it will be okay," she said, feeling herself relax as she made her decision, as well as the butterflies in her stomach in anticipation of what would likely occur.
"You know that I am Ngoni?" Greg asked. "Like you."
"I seem to remember something about that," Harriet replied.
"Actually, I'm a member of five of the tribal groups," Greg informed her. "Most of us that have been here a long time are. We were quite honestly amazed at how quickly you and James became Ngoni."
"The whole thing was a surprise to us, too," Harriet said with a laugh.
"But you accepted it, in your hearts?" Greg asked.
"Oh, most definitely," Harriet replied. "It was one of those life-changing, epiphany-type of happenings. We wouldn't undo it for the world."
"In that light, then, I offer to share Blessings with you," Greg said, standing up, his cock standing out in front of him.
"Oh! Oh!" Harriet gasped as she stared at Greg's cock pointing at her face. "I, I would be honored to share your Blessings," Harriet managed to say after seeing the smile on Charlene's face.
Harriet could not believe that she was kneeling in a spring in a river in nature about to suck a relative stranger's cock while his daughter watched. She hoped James would understand as she wrapped a hand around the shaft of Greg's cock and swiped it with her tongue.
Harriet found it very disconcerting to be sucking Greg's cock with Charlene's wide-eyed face mere inches away watching. Greg's cock was the perfect size to suck, no strain to take it all into her mouth, a nice shape, a nice taste, she realized. Out of the corner of her eye, Harriet saw the sun going down behind the distant mountains, the sky a kaleidoscope of colors, and then she realized that Greg's cock was pumping cum into her mouth.
Harriet felt her own pussy get wet as Greg's thick, hot cum filled her mouth, coating her tongue. She moaned as she let it slide down her throat, gulping to swallow it as she continued to suck on the head, her tongue teasing the slit as cum continued to ooze into her mouth. Finally, she could get no more cum from him and sat back, licking her lips and swallowing as she looked up.
"Thank you for sharing my Blessing," Greg said, raising her to her feet and bending over to softly kiss her on the mouth, an arm sliding around her waist to pull her closer, her rock-hard nipples pressing into his chest as his tongue found hers and they kissed, long and deep.
"Thank you for sharing your Blessing with me," Harriet said softly when they broke their kiss.
"Let's go eat," Charlene said. "That made me hungry."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"So, what's been the hardest thing for you to adapt to here in Malawi?" Greg asked as they ate dinner.
"Oh! Well, uh..." Harriet stammered, blushing.
"No need to be embarrassed," Greg said. "Like everyone else who first comes here, it is probably something to do with the different attitude towards sex; am I right?"
"Well, yes," Harriet agreed, her cheeks flaming, embarrassed to be having this conversation, much less in front of Charlene who had just an hour ago watched as she had sucked Greg's cock. "I was raised to think so differently."
"Yet you didn't refuse," Greg pointed out, "when the opportunity arose."
"No," Harriet replied softly, feeling her cheeks flaming. "It was just so sudden, in the middle of nowhere, the whole Ngoni tribe standing around. I felt intimidated, completely at a loss of what to do other than to comply."
"Can you describe how you felt?" Greg asked.
"God, I was so nervous," Harriet said with a laugh. "I've never been in a situation where I was the only white person in a group of blacks."
"Did that bother you?" Greg asked.
"It frightened me," Harriet admitted. "It made me think if we were crazy to have come so far into the bush."
"Had you ever had any kind of sex with a black man before?" Greg asked.
"Oh, no!" Harriet replied, shaking her head. "I'd only ever had sex with James. Suddenly I found myself on my knees and Chief Bwerani's huge black cock was hanging in front of my face. He was even bigger than James. I could see Dziko next to me sucking James' cock. I just tried not to choke. He was so big! I hadn't realized that a cock could produce so much cum."
"How did you feel afterwards?" Greg asked.
"Shocked," Harriet replied. "Worried about what James would think."
"You weren't bothered by Dziko sucking his cock?" Greg asked.
"Actually, no," Harriet replied. "It never occurred to me. I was so wrapped up in myself."
"And how did James react?" Greg asked. "Was he upset about any of it?"
"No," Harriet laughed. "He actually told me that he thought I looked hot with a black cock in my mouth."
"And the initiation?" Greg asked.
"I was so embarrassed," Harriet admitted. "Even more than sucking Chief Bwerani off in front of everyone. I'd never had sex in front of anyone before. They were all gathered around so close, holding my legs up and apart, completely exposing me."
"Were you at all turned on by anything?" Greg asked.
"That's where most of my shame came from," Harriet replied. "I was ashamed at how my body reacted. When Chief Bwerani was cumming in my mouth, I came. I could feel my thighs getting wet. When he fucked me, I couldn't stop cumming. His cock, I've never been so full. And everyone watching. And seeing James watching. I remember seeing him lick his lips."
"Do you enjoy your Friendship outreach program?" Greg asked.
"Yes," Harriet replied, her face flaming once more.
"So you've excepted the Malawi bonding?" Greg asked.
"Once I got over the whole adultery thing, stopped feeling guilty about being unfaithful to James," Harriet replied. "His support has made it possible. He never fails to tell me how much it turns him on to see me with a cock in my mouth or fucking me, especially when it's someone else's."
"And your sexual relations with James, have they suffered?" Greg asked.
"God, no," Harriet asked. "We're like teenagers. I don't think we've ever been so hot for each other."
"It sounds like you're what Malawi needed and that Malawi is what you needed," Greg commented.
"But how do you reconcile all of it with Christ and our teachings?" Harriet asked.
"Christ brought the message of love," Greg replied. "I see no inconsistency. If anything, it has made Christ's message clearer. The Malawians accept Christ, slowly, because he brought the message of love. As long as Christ's teachings don't conflict with the Malawian ways, they are very content to marry the two, especially when they see us accepting their ways."
"Well, I am not the same person I was when I arrived," Harriet admitted. "And I don't know if I could or would want to go back to being the person I was before. I feel more alive, complete somehow."
"Well, I'm sure you're going to enjoy our Friendship ceremony evening, then," Greg said. "Shall we go?"
Harriet gasped and momentarily froze when she saw that there were at least a dozen couples when they arrived at the mission. They had never seen more than three couples at a Friendship ceremony. She found herself wondering if they were all going to participate.
Everyone was more than friendly, clearly pleased and excited to meet her, honored that she had become Ngoni, even though they were all Tumbuka, which were historical enemies. Harriet found herself relaxing as she enjoyed conversing with the different people, enjoying the fruits and nuts that were generously offered in large wooden bowls, and earning big smiles when she asked for ktang.
"My Friends," Greg said after an hour or so of socializing had passed. "We have all had the pleasure and honor of meeting Harriet, the newest member of our mission here in Malawi. Shall we show her what Tumbuka Friendship is all about?"
Harriet blushed when everyone applauded, some people cheering.
"Harriet," Greg said, offering her a hand and leading her over to a now familiar-looking table covered with hand-woven carpets. "I offer Friendship," Greg said, letting his pants drop to the floor, his cock standing out in front of him, the same cock that she had sucked not so long ago, Harriet thought, blushing at the thought.
"I would be honored to accept your Friendship," Harriet replied, finishing the ritual formula and then slowly, with wooden fingers, undressing, not missing the murmurs of approval when she revealed her breasts, her ruby nipples rock hard, then the gasps as the fiery bush above her pussy became visible as she stepped out of her skirt and G-string panty.
Harriet knew that she was blushing furiously as she got onto the table, leaning back on her elbows, her feet up on the edge and well apart, her pussy spread, glistening pinkly as everyone crowded around. She had a fleeting thought for James, then gasped when Greg bent over and glued his mouth to her sopping pussy, his tongue sliding up into her, slurping at her juices before he locked his lips on her clit, teasing it with the tip of his tongue and tripping her into an orgasm which he eagerly lowered his mouth to drink up.
Harriet's whole body was trembling as she came, Greg standing up and sliding the head of his cock up and down between her spread pussy lips before pressing it into her, filling her pussy. She was surprised by the soft chanting from the audience as Greg began to fuck her. At one point, she had the presence of mind to lift her eyes from Greg's cock sliding in and out of her pussy to look around the circle of people watching her get fucked, seeing the smiles of joy on their faces.
"I offer you my Blessings," Greg finally gasped, surprising Harriet by jamming his cock deep into her pussy as he came.
She could feel it pulsing as it filled her with cum and then he was withdrawing it, climbing up onto the table, kneeling astraddle her body as he offered his gooey, sticky cock to her mouth. As Harriet wrapped her lips around Greg's cock, tasting her own familiar pussy juices and his cum all at once as she sucked on him, she felt a mouth fasten onto her cum-filled pussy and begin to eat her. When Harriet finished sucking Greg's cock clean and he climbed off of the table, she was able to see that it was Charlene who was eating her pussy, the first time that she had ever had any sort of a sexual interaction with another woman.
"I offer you Friendship," Charlene said, looking up at Harriet, her mouth and chin covered with her pussy juices and her father's cum.
"I thank you for your Friendship," Harriet gasped, her whole body tingling from the orgasms Charlene's talented tongue had triggered.
For the next three hours each of the couples present repeated what Greg and Charlene had done, the man fucking her and filling her pussy with cum, then his wife eating her pussy while she sucked his cock clean. The cocks were all sizes and after a time Harriet found herself cumming non-stop, her whole body spasming as orgasm after orgasm wracked her body.
Finally, she realized that she was lying sprawled on the table and nobody was sticking a cock into her. Gentle hands helped her up and she stood on shaky legs as everyone pressed around, offering congratulations.
"So, how are you doing?" Greg asked as the three of them drove back to the house afterwards.
"I'm in shock," Harriet admitted. "There's never been more than three people before."
"We kept it small for you," Charlene said with a laugh. "There were only eighteen."
"I feel shameless," Harriet said, her cheeks flaming.
"You were anything but," Greg said as they arrived at the house. "Everyone was impressed that you were willing to become Friends and to show that by sharing your most personal and private self. Personally speaking, you have a delicious pussy and it felt wonderful to be inside of you."
"Oh!" Harriet said, blushing furiously as they entered the house.
"I agree," Charlene said. "It was almost like eating Mary's pussy again."
"M-Mary!" Harriet gasped.
"She didn't tell you?" Charlene asked.
"No," Harriet replied, feeling suddenly lightheaded.
"I'll bet you'd like a shower," Greg said.
"I'd love one," Harriet replied gratefully, "and then a bed."
"Right this way," Greg said, leading her to the en suite bathroom in the master bedroom. "Just make yourself at home," he said, leaving her.
Harriet luxuriated under the shower for a long time, feeling the ache in her pussy from all of the fucking she had done, her head still spinning with everything, the Friendship ceremony, but most of all, the realization that Mary was far more sexually active than she had realized. Charlene had eaten Mary's pussy! And her own! Her mind was whirling when she finally crawled into the big bed and fell asleep.
Harriet awoke once in the night, disoriented, in the midst of a wet dream that she realized was caused by Greg's head between her thighs, his tongue gently busy in her sore pussy. She came several times before he stopped and she fell asleep again, sighing.
The next time she awoke, sunlight was streaming in the window and next to her Charlene was riding her father's cock, her full breasts with their hard nipples swinging in front of her as she raised her ass up and down. Even though she knew that Charlene had eaten her pussy full of her father's cum the previous evening, she still hadn't quite connected the dots until now.
"Look who's awake," Charlene said, smiling at her but not missing a beat. "Good morning."
"Good morning," Harriet replied, staring in shock at Greg's cock disappearing into his daughter's pussy.
"Good morning," Greg said, an arm reaching out around her shoulders to draw her close. "Sleep well?" he asked after kissing her, long and deep.
"Like the dead," Harriet replied, feeling her pussy getting wet. "Though I did have a strange dream," she added, smiling at him.
"A specialty of the house," Greg said, grinning at her, then groaning, reaching up to cup and squeeze Charlene's breasts as he lifted his hips, pressing himself into her.
Harriet's eyes opened wide when she saw Charlene lift herself off of her father's cock, her long pussy lips clinging to the shaft, cum dripping. She froze, wanting to panic, but freezing when Charlene dismounted her father and then knelt over her face, her pussy spread open, cum drooling from her gaping hole and from her long pussy lips. Harriet had seen the pussies of the women James had fucked in the Friendship ceremonies, but never from just inches.
Harriet had time to gasp before Charlene lowered her cum-filled pussy onto her mouth, the cum cocktail filling her immediately sliding down her tongue into her mouth. Harriet had always loved the taste of herself on James' cock when she sucked it, but she had never experienced such an intense taste of pussy as she was now, the taste of Charlene's pussy juices literally intoxicating, Greg's cum merely a textural difference, not really seeming to affect the taste.
"Oh, my!" Harriet gasped when Charlene lifted herself off of her face, turning to smile down at her.
"That was nice," she said, leaning down and kissing her, surprising Harriet when the tip of her tongue pressed between her lips to find her own.
"Oh, I'm so sore," Harriet gasped when she felt Greg lifting her legs onto his shoulders and rub his cock between her pussy lips.
"Not a problem," Greg said, placing the head of his cock against her rosebud.
"Oh, yes, yes," Harriet panted as she felt Greg's cock sliding into her ass.
"What a nice way to start the day," Charlene said many minutes later after Greg had cum all over Harriet's pussy and Charlene had sucked her clean.
"I can honestly say I've never experienced anything like it," Harriet said, laughing. "God, I feel so depraved."
"Isn't it great?" Greg asked, a big grin on his face.
"What's the plan for the day?" Harriet asked, inwardly shocked by her casual acceptance of what had transpired.
"That's entirely up to you," Greg replied. "You're going to be here for two weeks, so there's no hurry. If you want to spend the first days playing tourist before you start seeing how the mission works, that's fine."
"I think I'd like to start in the mission first," Harriet said. "Then I'll understand better when I start playing tourist."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"So, how was your first day at the mission?" Charlene asked when they all sat down for dinner at the end of the day.
"Nothing like I was expecting," Harriet admitted with a chuckle. "Back in Nkopola, we teach school to children all day, then visit homes in the evenings."
"It was a pretty normal day," Greg added. "I think it was eight Blessing sharings and three Friendship ceremonies."
"Oh, you're not counting the two blowjobs and the lunchtime fuck with you?" Harriet asked, laughing at the chagrined look on Greg's face.
"I'm surprised he was that restrained," Charlene said. "Did you enjoy it?"
"Well, it did take some getting used to being on my knees sucking some stranger's cock and having people come in and just stand watching," Harriet replied.
"It always turns me on when people watch me," Charlene said.
"I was so wet, my pussy stopped aching," Harriet said.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Do you think that they're fucking?" Mary asked her brother after she had finished sucking him off when they woke up in the morning, having slept in John's bed.
"One way to find out," John replied.
"She did invite us," Mary agreed, getting to her feet and heading to the door.
"No clothes?" John asked.
"I'm hoping not to need them," Mary replied with a laugh as she left the room, her sexy ass swinging.
To her surprise, Mary found that the door to her parents' bedroom was wide open, something that it never was, even when they weren't home. The door was always closed unless they were entering or leaving. Even more surprising was seeing Julie riding her father reverse cowgirl, her hands on the bed behind her, her feet on either side of his knees as she slid her fat pussy up and down on his cock.
When Julie smiled at her when she saw her watching, Mary entered, crawling onto the bed to watch from mere inches as her father's cock slid in and out of Julie's pussy. She could feel Julie shudder when she leaned forward and teased her fat clit with her tongue, then slid her tongue down to her father's cock, tasting Julie's pussy on the shaft.
"Holy Christ!" James gasped when he felt Mary's tongue on the shaft of his cock as Julie fucked him, his balls exploding, cum gushing up into Julie's pussy. "Ahhhh!" he cried out when he felt his cock pulled from Julie's pussy, only to be engulfed by Mary's mouth.
Julie collapsed down onto James, her arms and legs splayed wide as she watched Mary sucking her father off, then lift her face to smile at her before gluing her mouth to her pussy to eat her, slurping up the cum cocktail that filled her.
"Well, good morning!" Julie said when Mary had finished.
"This is definitely my favorite way to start the day," Mary said, smiling at the shocked look on her father's face.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Morning," John said when he entered the kitchen and found them sitting at the breakfast table.
"Good morning, John," Julie said. "Did you sleep well?"
"Uh, I guess," John replied. "How about you? It must be a little strange to be in a strange house."
"Your father was very good at making me feel comfortable and welcome," Julie replied, smiling at the color suffusing James' face. "Would you honor me with a Blessing?" she asked.
"Uh, sure," John replied, blushing at the look Mary gave him.
"There is no better way to start the day," Julie said as John moved to stand in front of her.
James stared slack-jawed as Julie began to suck John's cock.
"She's really good, isn't she?" Mary asked as she watched John's entire cock disappear into her mouth. "I hope I can suck a cock like that someday."
"It's all about practice," Julie gasped, lifting her face from John's cock.
"I plan on lots of practice," Mary said, laughing at the shocked look on her father's face. "Didn't you enjoy sharing your Blessing with me, dad?" she asked. "God knows, I sure liked it."
"I can honestly say I never envisioned having this kind of a conversation with you," James replied, his eyes widening when he saw cum leaking from the corners of Julie's mouth as John quietly groaned as he emptied his balls.
"Oh, my, what a nice Blessing," Julie gasped as she sat back, gulping down John's cum. "Thank you for the honor."
"The honor was all mine," John assured her, looking down at this middle-aged woman who had just sucked his cock in front of his father and sister.
"I'll look forward to that every morning," Julie said with a smile.
"Are you going to share Blessings with me, dad?" Mary asked, smiling at him as she licked her lips.
"I-uh-I..." James stammered, his face flushing as Mary knelt in front of him and pulled his zipper down, smiling up at him as she took his cock into her mouth.
"Oh, I just love receiving Blessings," Mary gasped as she leaned back, swallowing the last of her father's cum. "It makes everything seem so good and it's the best way to start the day, setting the right tone."
"I couldn't agree more," Julie said, smiling at her beaming face.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Well, that was an interesting day," Julie said when they all got together for dinner that evening. "You only teach each day, never any time for anything else?" she asked.
"That takes all of our time," James replied. "The school was our original idea for community outreach."
"And it's a great idea," Julie said. "The kids are great and clearly enjoy their lessons. But you need to be more than teachers in a school if you want to really succeed."
"That's why we started meeting people each evening," James replied. "But we've only been doing that for a month or so."
"Yes, and only a couple of couples each time," Julie said, "which is a start, a good start. The previous three families that they brought in before you escaped as soon as they were confronted with the Blessing and Friendship ceremonies. The fact that you didn't, that you accepted and embraced it, proves that you're right for Malawi."
"What do you suggest that we do?" James asked.
"Well, first of all, let the parents all know that they're always welcome to drop by the school to observe the lessons, share Blessings, or share Friendship," Julie replied. "Since your mission and your home are one and the same places, you should also let them know that they're always welcome, for whatever reason, even if it's just to say hello and have a cup of water."
"But wouldn't that be disruptive of the class, parents stopping by for, uh, Sharing and Friendship?" James asked.
"Take turns," Julie replied with a laugh. "We'll create a space just for that."
"Do you have a school at your mission in Lilongwe?" Mary asked.
"No, not formally," Julie replied. "We teach different crafts and skills, go to their homes to help when they're sick or having children, and just generally being there for them."
"And people come by just for sharing Blessings and Friendship?" John asked.
"They do," Julie replied, laughing at the surprise on all of their faces. "I'm sure I average half a dozen Blessings and four to six Friendships a day," Julie said. "Sometimes more, sometimes less, but that's a pretty good average."
"What a great job," Mary sighed.
"But why do they come?" James asked, bewildered by the conversation.
"You ask me that after last night?" Julie asked, bursting into laughter at the embarrassed look on James' face. "They won't directly admit it, but I'm fairly certain that the Malawians believe that sharing with a white person increases their personal juju. When you go to the weekly market, do you go to the Tent of Dreams?"
"We've never been to the night market," James confessed.
"You've been here half a year and haven't been to the night market?" Julie asked, truly flabbergasted. "That's the center of life in any community. You need to go, every week. Make it a point to greet those with whom you have shared Blessings and/or Friendship. They will be so proud to be recognized and acknowledged. They will also introduce you to their friends. Your circle will grow. And always go to the Tent of Dreams."
"I've never even heard of it," James said, shaking his head.
"It's not usually talked about," Julie explained. "It doesn't really exist in terms of its impact on reality. What happens in the Tent of Dreams is just that, dream stuff that didn't really happen."
"This is making absolutely no sense to me, you realize?" James asked.
"John and I have been to the Tent of Dreams," Mary said. "In Chipita and also in Rhumpi."
"We can ask this evening about the market," Julie said. "You do have an outreach appointment tonight, don't you?"
"Yes," James replied.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"God, I just love seeing the look on dad's face when I'm sharing Blessings and then Friendship," Mary said as she crawled on top of her brother when they got home later that evening.
"I told you, you're hot, especially to watch," John said as Mary worked her pussy down onto his cock.
"His cock was so hard," Mary said, rocking her hips as she began to fuck her brother.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Of course it excited you," Julie said, tousling James' hair as he ate her pussy. "She's a gorgeous, sexy young woman. It excited me, too."
"But she's my daughter," James said, lifting his pussy-smeared face to look up at her.
"She's an adult," Julie retorted. "She's perfectly capable of making her own decisions about what to do with her body and with whom."
"I worry about what she thinks of all of this," James confessed.
"She seems to be reveling in it," Julie said, "which you should be, too. I could be insulted that you're between my legs talking instead of eating," she said, sighing when James' tongue stroked her big, fat clit before sliding into her flowing hole.
"I also worry about Harriet, how she's going to react, to any of this," James said, crawling up Julie's body, stopping to suck on her large nipples, eliciting a moan from her as he did, his cock finding her sopping pussy and sliding into her.
"I'm sure that she's going to be just fine," Julie said, her legs lifting to wrap around his waist as he plunged his cock in and out of her hungry pussy. "I'm more curious about how you're going to react when you hear about her experience in Chipita."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, god, I'm so nervous," Mary said, fidgeting as she waited with her father and brother as the bus arrived.
"Dear God, give me strength," James prayed out loud as the bus door opened and Harriet stepped out, looking around, her eyes lighting up when she saw them.
"Oh, I have so missed you, all of you," she said, hugging each of them tightly, then kissing James, practically sucking his tonsils from his mouth.
"We've missed you, too, mom," Mary replied as they went to the car. "It was so strange without you being here."
"No problems with Julie?" Harriet asked.
"She's the best," Mary replied, John agreeing. "We just loved her."
"James?" Harriet asked, cocking an eye at him as they drove towards their house.
"We have so much to talk about," James said, avoiding a direct answer.
"You have no idea," Harriet replied with a laugh.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"How did Julie like our mission?" Harriet asked as they ate dinner.
"She seemed to like it a lot," James replied. "She seemed very comfortable in just about any situation."
"Did she have any suggestions?" Harriet asked.
James explained about inviting the parents to visit and any others who might be so inclined, especially the Ngoni.
"Greg and Susan do the same thing in Chipita," Harriet informed him. "It's actually a really good idea. Have you started with it yet?"
"Just for a week or so," James replied.
"Is anybody taking advantage?" Harriet asked.
"Each day, a few," James replied. "What was it like in Chipita?" he asked.
"Well, they don't have the school, so they have a lot more opportunity for people to come by," Harriet replied.
"Well, we need to go," James said. "You up to it or do you want to stay here and sleep?"
"No, I'll be fine," Harriet replied. "We'll talk more when we get back," she said to John and Mary.
"Uh, that's one of the things we're going to talk about," James said as John and Mary got to their feet.
"I-I-I don't understand," Harriet stammered.
"We're coming with you," Mary said, slipping an arm around her mother's waist.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Harriet had butterflies in her stomach as they socialized with the three couples, Afari and Rotoru, a shy couple in their 50s who were their nominal hosts, Dkora and Nanimi, a high-energy couple in their 30s, and Ranuli and Krabari, a heavy-set couple in their 40s, unable to keep her eyes off of her children as they comfortably interacted with everyone.
"Would it be acceptable to begin?" Afari asked, approaching James and Harriet.
"Of course," James replied with a smile.
"I would like to offer Friendship," Afari said to Harriet.
Harriet was acutely aware of her face flushing as she saw John and Mary standing together watching her.
"I would be honored," Harriet managed to reply, allowing Afari to take her hand and lead her to the table that had been prepared.
Harriet felt her pussy juices running down the inside of her thighs as she undressed, very aware that John and Mary had undressed with everyone else and had moved closer and were closely scrutinizing her. Her ruby nipples were so hard, they ached when she stood up after stepping out of her dress.
"I offer Friendship," Afari said formally after helping Harriet up onto the table where she leaned back on her elbows, her feet up on the edge and wide apart, her pussy spread open for everyone to see, including her children.
"She looks just like you," John whispered into Mary's ear as they both stared at their mother's spread pussy. "I wonder if she tastes like you?" he asked, grunting when he felt his sister's elbow dig into his ribs.
"I accept your Friendship," Harriet replied, inhaling when she felt Afari's cock enter her pussy, unable to resist looking up at John and Mary as Afari's cock filled her, her eyes widening as she took in John's huge cock standing out in front of him as he watched her being fucked.
John smiled when he saw that his father was busy taking pictures, positioning himself and Mary so that they were in the background of several of the shots.
"It is time for the Blessing," Afari gasped, pulling his glistening cock from Harriet's pussy and climbing up onto the table to straddle her, sticking his cock into her open mouth, groaning when he felt her lips lock on the shaft of his cock as she sucked on him with her whole mouth, her eyes opening slightly when she felt the first spurt of cum on her tongue.
"I thank you for your Blessing," Harriet gasped when she had finished sucking him off.
She felt her cheeks flame as she once again looked at John and Mary, her pussy getting wetter than it already was from the nice fucking it had just received at the sight of John's huge cock throbbing in front of him, her cheeks flushing even more when she realized what she was thinking. Dkora and Ranuli followed, each one fucking her long and hard before climbing up onto the table to be sucked off.
"John!" Mary gasped, trying to grab his arm as he stepped forward.
"I offer Friendship," he said as he stood at the end of the table looking down at his well-fucked mother, her pussy gaping open from having been fucked by three men, his rock-hard cock standing out in front of him, almost touching her spread pussy. "Mom?" John asked after she just stared at him open-mouthed, not saying a thing. "Mom?" he asked, slapping her pussy with his cock, causing her to jump, then sliding the head of it up and down between her dripping, spread pussy lips, delicate like Mary's.
"I accept your Friendship," Harriet managed to say after exchanging a look with James, seeing the smile on his face. "Oh, god, yes," she groaned as her son's cock slid into her pussy.
Even though she had just been fucked by three successive men, John's cock was so much bigger, it felt like the first one, stretching her pussy delightfully as he filled her. She was peripherally aware of James and his camera as John fucked her, aware of Mary standing right next to the table, watching her brother's huge cock as it slid in and out of their mother's pussy.
"It is time for the Blessing," John grunted, pulling his glistening cock from his mother's pussy and staring at it gaping open before climbing up onto the table, sticking it in her face, looking down as she opened her mouth and extended her tongue, tasting him, then wrapping her lips around him as he lost control, cum gushing from his cock into his mother's mouth as she gulped his cum down, not stopping until she had completely sucked him off, leaning back and gasping for breath as the flavor of her own son's cum filled her mouth for the first time.
"I-I thank you for your Blessing," Harriet managed to say as John got down from the table and everyone rushed forward to help her up.
"I cannot believe you did that!" Mary gasped, grabbing her brother's arm, her eyes wild. "God, that was just so hot!"
"She's a great fuck," John said, shaking his head. "Every bit as good as you."
"John!" Mary gasped, though her cheeks blushed with the compliment, her ruby nipples hard on the ends of her breasts, feeling the wetness between her thighs.
"I offer Friendship," Afari said as he approached Mary, his ebony cock leading the way.
"I'd be honored," Mary replied, putting her hand in his as he helped her up onto the table.
"How long has this been going on?" Harriet asked James in a shaky voice as he took pictures of their daughter being fucked.
"Since the night Julie arrived," James replied.
"And have you..." Harriet tried to ask.
"Yes," James replied, turning to look at her, "many times now. And she insists on receiving my Blessing every morning in the kitchen. She prefers an audience."
Harriet watched numbly as each of the three men took their turn with Mary, hard to accept that it was her own daughter on the table, her pussy being filled by the same strange black cocks that had just fucked her, then watching as each of them came in her mouth, Mary clearly eagerly sucking them off and gulping down their cum. Then Rotoru approached James shyly.
"I offer Friendship," she said.
"I am honored," James replied, allowing her to lead him to the table.
Harriet watched as each of the women fucked James, then sucked him off, her feelings warring within herself as she thought of the ramifications of her children being involved, still rocked by the thought that James had done the Friendship ceremony with Mary, fucked her, his own daughter, and was getting his cock sucked by her every morning. She couldn't even think of it in terms of sharing a Blessing or Friendship when it came to her own daughter, especially not with her own father. And then she watched, impressed in spite of herself as the three women offered Friendship to John and he accepted, blushing when she realized that she, too, had just been fucked by her son and had sucked him off and had thoroughly enjoyed it.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I think this is why I love Malawi so much," Mary sighed as they walked home afterwards.
"Why is that?" Harriet asked.
"I just love the Friendship ceremony," Mary replied. "It's no wonder that it's such a peaceful country with such gentle people when their idea of shaking hands is to have sex."
"I think I have to agree," James said. "I think the connection is inescapable."
"Was the whole thing difficult for you at first?" John asked.
"I think it was more difficult for your mother," James replied.
"I think I loved it from the very first time, with Greg," Mary replied. "Just having people watching while he fucked me and I sucked him off, nothing but smiles and approval. I still get wet just thinking about it."
"Mary!" Harriet gasped, shocked to realize that she had done the Friendship ceremony with Greg.
"Don't you enjoy it now?" Mary asked. "You sure seemed to."
"It's difficult for me to talk about it with you," Harriet confessed. "It was hard enough with your father, but you're our children."
"Are you going to tell me that you didn't cum like crazy when John's cock was fucking you?" Mary asked, laughing. "You're not being consistent."
"I said it was difficult for me," Harriet sighed, remembering exactly how good it had felt to have her son's cock in her pussy, cumming non-stop. "But yes, I do enjoy it now. In the beginning, I had a lot of problems because of my upbringing, the programming associated with the 7th Commandment not to commit adultery."
"How did you reconcile that?" John asked as they arrived at the house.
"Adultery is inherently dishonest," Harriet replied. "There is nothing dishonest about your father and I sharing Blessings and Friendship with others."
"So Julie being here, going to the Friendship ceremonies with dad each evening," John said.
"I understand and have no problem with it, though I admit to some butterflies in my stomach at first when I thought about it in Chipita," Harriet replied. "Besides, I would have had to condemn myself first and foremost."
"Why?" Mary asked.
"Oh, my!" Harriet said, shaking her head. "I was nervous enough about this conversation with your father. I never thought you'd be a part of it, too."
"You don't have to," Mary volunteered. "We'd understand."
"No, that wouldn't be right, especially considering all of the present circumstances," Harriet said, sighing resignedly. "When I first arrived in Chipita, Greg and Charlene took me to the spring you told me about. I almost died of embarrassment when he offered me his Blessings right in front of Charlene."
"I'm sure Charlene just loved it," Mary said with a laugh.
"I'm sure she did," Harriet agreed, "but at the time all I could think of was that she was his daughter and his cock was in my mouth. And then I thought of you, all of you, and I had to fight some guilty feelings."
"Did you go to any Friendship ceremonies?" Mary asked.
"The mission in Chipita is very different from ours," Harriet replied. "People come in every day, all day, to share Blessings and Friendship."
"I think we've had four people in a day once since we started the same practice," James said. "We still have days when nobody stops by."
"In Chipita I shared Blessings in the mission at least a dozen times a day," Harriet confessed, her cheeks flushing with color, "and Friendship probably half a dozen times a day. And that's not counting Greg. The man is insatiable."
"Lucky you!" Mary said, laughing at the shocked look on her mother's face as everyone joined in laughing.
"It gets worse," Harriet said, taking a deep breath. "Each evening there was a Friendship ceremony, usually with half a dozen couples. I was in shock."
"It sure wasn't like that when we were there," Mary said.
"We talked about it," Harriet said. "Greg explained that they didn't want to overexpose you when they realized how new you were to such a sexual awakening and how Malawi really worked."
"That's a lot of people," John said slowly.
"This is embarrassing enough without the two of you being here," Harriet said, her face bright red. "I was so shocked by how many people there were the first time that I counted. After that, I just couldn't help counting. I gave up trying to keep count of all of the blow...Blessings I received, but the different men that fuc...uh, shared Friendship with me, well, I counted 138."
"Oh, wow!" Mary laughed. "You got to fuck 138 different men in just 2 weeks? I am so jealous."
"Their mission is so well-established," Harriet said defensively, not unaware of James' slack-jawed face as he stared at her. "They have many hundreds of...Friends, perhaps thousands. Our mission is just getting started, for all intents and purposes. Perhaps in 10 or 20 years, we'll have as many Friends."
"What was it like fucking so many people?" Mary asked, the fascination in her voice and face very obvious.
"Truth be told, I was sore as hell the first few days," Harriet admitted. "But Greg anticipated that and limited the numbers the first few days. After that, my body adjusted."
"Did it turn you on, just fucking total strangers like that, one after the other?" Mary asked.
"Once I got over the psychological shock and stopped thinking about it," Harriet replied, blushing as she met James' eyes. "It's almost like something is triggered that gives you an almost hyper-sexual drive. It's overwhelming the way it dominates your mind. You have to really work at not thinking about it."
"That's how it is for me, too," Mary said, nodding in understanding. "When John, Bruce, and Masozi were all fucking me all day and night, it happened to me. Suddenly I couldn't get enough. I was so horny, am so horny all the time now."
"Maybe we should continue this discussion tomorrow," Harriet suggested, realizing that she needed to talk with James, worried about how he had reacted to what she had told them.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"God, I am so horny," Mary gasped as she ripped her clothes off and jumped on the bed with her brother. "Mom's story turned me on so much," she said, inhaling John's cock at the same time that she plastered her sopping pussy on his mouth.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"James, are you okay?" Harriet asked as they went upstairs to their room.
"No, leave it open," James said when he saw Harriet start to close the door.
"Oh?" she asked, arching an eyebrow at him.
"Something Julie started," he explained. "She wanted the kids to feel welcome whenever they wanted."
"James?"
"I'm just blown away, I guess," James admitted. "I think of 138 different men fucking you and wonder how you had any time for anything else."
"I almost didn't," Harriet replied, then burst out laughing. "I actually had that thought at one point, that I was spending more time with a cock in me than not. Are you bothered by it? That was my biggest concern."
"A little," James admitted. "Not because you fucked so many other men, just that I wasn't there."
"You are such a voyeur!" Harriet laughed as she dropped her clothes to the floor to stand naked in front of him. "Do you still want me?" she asked, her arms above her head as she spread her feet wide, feeling the coolness of the air between her spreading pussy lips.
"More than you can possibly imagine," James said, his clothes disappearing as he reached for her.
"Is it still as tight as it was?" Harriet asked fearfully when he finally slid his cock into her after eating her to several intense orgasms.
"Any tighter and it would rip my cock off," James replied, laughing as she raised her legs to wrap around his waist as they began to fuck.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Well, you look like the cat who ate the canary," Mary commented the next morning when she came down for breakfast and found her parents in the kitchen, noticing that her mother was wearing the peignoir that Julie had left, the one that only came down halfway over her ass, leaving her pussy exposed. "Will you share Blessings?" she asked, kneeling in front of her father and reaching into his short housecoat for his cock, rolling her tongue around the head before taking it into her mouth.
"Mmm, tastes like me," she said, licking her lips and smiling as she looked at her mother watching open-mouthed before taking it back into her mouth.
"Looks like I'm just in time," John said as he entered the room and saw his sister on her knees with their father's cock filling her mouth. "Share Blessings?" he asked, pulling his cock out and sticking it in his mother's face.
"Oh!" Harriet gasped, staring at her son's huge cock, her mouth automatically opening as John leaned forward, her lips locking around him as his cock filled her mouth.
Harriet almost choked as her son's cock filled her mouth and throat as she pressed her nose up against his belly, feeling it throbbing, shocked as she realized that the flavor of her own pussy that she was tasting on him had to be Mary's, his sister's.
Harriet felt herself cumming when she realized that James was cumming in Mary's mouth, her eyes racked to the side to watch, noticing the bit of cum that had escaped the corner of her mouth as she noisily sucked her father off. And then John's cock was exploding in her mouth, cum literally gushing onto her tongue and down her throat as the gulped and gulped, siphoning his cock with her mouth as she greedily tried to suck all of the cum from his balls.
"Mmm, thanks for the Blessing, dad," Mary said as she sat back with a Cheshire cat's grin on her face as she licked her lips, swallowing the last of her father's cum.
"Always a pleasure, Mary," James replied, smiling down at his daughter and shaking his head, realizing that she sucked his cock almost as well as her mother.
"Oh, yeah!" John gasped as Harriet finished him off by taking his entire cock into her mouth and throat and milking him before sitting back, gasping for breath as she swallowed the last of her son's cum.
"I thank you for your Blessing," Harriet managed to say, blushing furiously as she realized that she was thanking her son for allowing her to suck his cock.
"I look forward to Blessing you often," John replied, a big grin on his face as he locked eyes with Mary who was still licking her lips.
"This is going to take some getting used to," Harriet said with a sigh.
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"So, how was your first day back?" Mary asked when they all sat down for the evening meal.
"Relaxing," Harriet replied. "So different from Chipita."
"How so?" James asked.
"Well, there was only one couple today that wanted to share Blessings and Friendship," Harriet said, blushing when she realized that John and Mary now knew full well what that meant. "In Chipita, there'd be one or two couples per hour for Friendship and two or three times that many just to share Blessings. We were constantly busy."
"We haven't come so far from Astarte, have we?" Mary asked, a sublime smile on her face.
"I'm sorry, who?" Harriet asked.
"Astarte," Mary replied. "She was the goddess of war and sexual love in ancient Egypt, also with the Hittites and in Canaan. They'd have temple ceremonies where people were rewarded with sex with the incarnation of Astarte in her priestesses."
"Why on earth would you know that?" James asked, laughing.
"I don't remember the class, but it interested me and I looked into it a bit," Mary replied. "I used to daydream of being a priestess of Astarte."
"The more things change, the more they remain the same," John observed.
"In a way, you and dad are the priest and priestess of your temple, the mission, and people come to feel closer to God with you," Mary said. "Nothing is closer to God than orgasm."
"Mary!" Harriet gasped.
"Do you disagree?" Mary asked, looking her mother in the eye.
"Well, that's not the point," Harriet replied, flustered.
"I'd say it is exactly the point," James interjected. "I happen to agree with Mary. I've never felt closer to God than when I'm cumming. It's like all of the boundaries disappear and I'm only in this bubble of pure pleasure. That's how I've always thought of a personal interaction with God, a moment of pure pleasure, pure love."
"Is that how you see it?" Harriet asked, looking at Mary, then John.
"Not me," John replied, shaking his head. "I still don't get the whole God thing, other than as an excuse to explain the unexplainable. To me, the whole Malawian sex thing is just a great way to get closer to people. Doesn't it turn you on at all to think that you have the freedom to have sex with whoever you want, as often as you want, and you won't be judged negatively for it?"
"It unsettles me to think about it at times," Harriet replied. "Especially the past two weeks."
"Did you feel closer to God?" Mary asked.
"I don't know how to explain it," Harriet replied. "When I cum, I am lost, totally disembodied, fully enraptured by the orgasm. I can see someone describing that as being closer to God, but in all honesty, it was all just one long orgasm, never ending. I'd feel guilty because I realized that I was enjoying it, didn't want it to end, looked forward to the next one. I have a hard time reconciling that with my Christian upbringing and what we're supposed to be doing here. Instead of us bringing them to Christ, it seems to me that they're bringing us to, well, Astarte."
"I'll take Astarte any day," Mary said, laughing. "Christ and his disciples never got laid, unless they were taking turns with Mary Magdalene."
"Mary!" Harriet gasped. "That's...that's..."
"Blasphemous?" Mary asked. "If you believe the Bible, what you've been taught, indoctrinated with, then you have to believe that that's true, even if you don't like the words I've used to describe the situation."
"Now you know why the church forbade anyone but the clergy to know how to read and write back in the Dark Ages," James said with a chuckle. "As soon as you let the people learn to read and write, they do, and they learn, and then they do the absolute worst possible thing; they think and ask questions."
"This whole experience has caused me to re-evaluate just about everything I had ever thought or learned about life, people, religion, God," he continued. "I have felt what I thought of as very close to God at times in my life; praying, doing an act of charity, but I have never felt as close to God as I do when I have an orgasm. It involves every cell of my being. It is all-encompassing, all-consuming. If our purpose as Christians is to strive to get close to God, then I honestly have to say that the Malawians have done a far better job of it than Christianity, Judaism, Islam, take your pick. I've never felt closer to God."
"I...I...I don't know what to say," Harriet said, her face pale as the impact of her husband's words hit home.
"Well, I've never experienced life so intently before," Mary said. "I mean, I know that I'm young, but there is nothing that compares to the feeling of an orgasm, nothing. Not even close. And it's so much fun getting there," she added with a laugh. "God, I just love being able to be...to be...to be a slut! Yes, a slut," she said, nodding her head emphatically when she saw the shock on her mother's face. "In Malawi, being a slut is the norm, for men and women. In the West, well, being a slut is a negative for women, you're a stud if you're a male slut. Malawi sure seems more peaceful and friendly than anywhere else I've been."
"Maybe we should go," James suggested after a long, pregnant pause, seeing the shock on his wife's face.
"Go!" Harriet exclaimed, looking at him. "Oh, outreach?"
"No, it's market night," Mary said.
"Market night!" Harriet said. "I never thought about a market here."
"Didn't you go to the market with Greg, Susan, and Charlene?" John asked.
"Yes," Harriet replied, her cheeks coloring.
"Julie made us go," Mary said. "We knew about the market in Chipita, but had never thought about the one here. It's really nice. And, of course, the Tent of Dreams is here."
"The Tent of Dreams," Harriet repeated in a whisper, her blush deepening.
"I know they would have taken you," Mary said. "That's the main reason they go to the market."
"Yes," Harriet replied.
"I thought it was great fun," Mary said with a laugh. "All of those big, black cocks sticking through the screen, just waiting to be sucked. It was so funny to be kneeling between Susan and Charlene while we all sucked cocks. Did you enjoy it?"
"It was...difficult for me," Harriet replied, now completely flushed.
"Why?" Mary asked. "I mean, you like sucking cocks, don't you?"
"Mary!" Harriet exclaimed, then burst out laughing. "I can honestly say I never imagined that my own daughter would ever ask me such a question."
"The Friendship ceremony, sharing Blessings, I can reconcile those in my mind," Harriet replied.
"Seems to me that they're just fancy words to hide the reality of what they are," John said. "Fucking and sucking. I don't mind paying lip service to whatever people want to call it, but that's all it is to me and I'm good with that."
"Me, too," Mary agreed. "This is Malawi and I feel like I belong here. I love to fuck and suck cock and eat pussy and those are considered virtues here. I'll never leave."
"In Chipita, did you always in your mind think that you were sharing Blessings, receiving and giving Friendship," James asked, smiling, "or did it ever become just another cock to suck or fuck?"
"I would and still do feel such shame when I realize that that had happened," Harriet replied. "I felt so guilty, like I was cheating on you, because in my mind that's what it was; I was sucking some stranger's cock or being fucked by some stranger. I wasn't thinking of it in terms of Blessings and Friendship, it was just sex, another mouthful of cum."
"People like to hide behind words, labels," James said easily. "It gives them more security than just seeing things for what they are. I wonder how the Malawians describe these things in their own languages when they're describing their interactions, with us, with others."
"Truth be told, I only cursorily think of these interactions as sharing Blessings or Friendship," James admitted. "I'm with John on this; to me it's sex, getting my cock sucked or fucking someone else's wife while they watch, and then orgasm, cumming, getting close to God."
"Does it bother you that mom sucks all of those strange cocks, lets them fuck her?" Mary asked.
"That's my shame," John admitted, glancing at Harriet. "I enjoy it, watching her with the other men."
"Wow, that's...cool!" Mary said, laughing. "How does that make you feel, Mom?" she asked. "Do you like seeing Dad with all of the other women?"
"It was confusing at first," Harriet admitted. "I definitely hid behind the labels to insulate my mind, my sensibilities. Then I saw how proud the women were, and their husbands, too, and I looked at it differently."
"I like the surprise on their faces when they see that Dad and John have such big cocks," Mary said, laughing at the shock on her mother's face. "I mean, there are a lot of black cocks just as large, even larger, but I feel proud when I know that they're thinking about their white cocks being bigger than a lot of the black ones."
"You are so twisted," John laughed, hugging his sister.
"I've had that thought, too," Harriet admitted, blushing.
"Chipita is mostly Tumbuka, isn't it?" John asked, remembering the Tumbuka Friendship ceremony.
"Yes," Harriet replied.
"And they do the Tumbuka Friendship ceremony?" he asked.
"Yes," Harriet replied, once again blushing.
"Which one do you prefer, the Ngoni or the Tumbuka?" John asked.
"What's the difference?" James asked.
"Oh, I...I can't talk about it with you," Harriet said, blushing. "You're not Tumbuka."
"We promised, too," Mary said.
"It's the same as the Ngoni," Harriet reminded him. "We don't talk about it with non-Ngoni or those who haven't attended a Ngoni Friendship ceremony."
"I understand," James said, obviously frustrated. "Come on, let's go to the market, then."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, Mom, you are just amazing!" Mary laughed as they walked home hours later.
"Stop!" Harriet said, then joined her in laughter, handing the bottle of ktang to James.
"My balls hurt from cumming so much," John groused.
"Nobody forced you to keep sticking that big cock of yours through the screen," Mary said. "My jaw hurts, though. Doesn't yours?" she asked her mother.
"After a few days in Chipita, I got used to it," Harriet replied with a big sigh. "It was difficult at first."
"I want to know how you get them to cum so fast," Mary said. "I was finishing my third one and you were finishing your fifth."
"That should be an interesting entry into your diary," James laughed. "Taught my daughter how to more quickly suck a cock to orgasm."
"I didn't know you kept a diary," Mary said. "What do you write in it?"
"Everything," Harriet replied. "What I did that day, how I felt."
"That must be some very interesting reading since we've been here," Mary said.
"It personal, Mary," Harriet said. "Even your father has never violated my privacy with my diary. Now I guess I'll go write in my diary, explain how I spent an hour on my knees next to my daughter sucking strange black cocks through a screen."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"Oh, James," Harriet sighed as she ruffled his hair while he ate her pussy. "Sometimes I'm so confused. I was handling all of this until John and Mary became involved. Now I'm conflicted."
"It was the same for me," James said, crawling up her body and sinking his cock into her pussy, rolling her over on top of him as he began to slowly piston his cock up into her. "Julie was a big change catalyst. Right from the start. After a few days, well, it just wasn't an issue anymore. I'm sure it will be the same for you."
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
"I'm not so sure that that's a good idea," Mary said as she sat on the edge of the bed, staring at her brother's cock sticking in her face.
"I've just got to fuck her again," John said, his hands resting on his sister's head as she leaned forward, his cock sliding along her tongue into her mouth. "And not behind some Friendship ceremony. I want it to be like this, just sex for the sake of it."
"Well, just go do it, then," Mary said, sitting back, smiling as his cock bobbed in front of her in time with his heartbeat. "She'll either let you or she won't. You know Dad won't care. We haven't fucked since Mom got back."
Harriet's back was to the open door, so she didn't see it when John and Mary appeared, naked, stopping for a moment in the doorway before stepping into the room and up to the bed, watching as their mother's ass rose up and down, her pussy causing their father's cock to glisten as it was revealed on each stroke.
James had seen them enter, his cock lurching in Harriet's delectable pussy at the thought of them joining in. Julie had finally gotten them to all sleep in the same bed and he had gotten used to the family orgy each night.
Filling his hands with her breasts, his fingers finding and pulling on her hard nipples, James pulled Harriet down into a kiss, feeling her suck his tongue into her mouth even as her pussy continued to ride his cock.
"Wha...wha..." Harriet gasped when she suddenly felt hands on her hips.
"Don't stop," Mary said as she mounted her father's face, lowering her pussy onto his mouth as she faced her mother. "We just want to join in," she added as Harriet gasped when she felt John's cock probing at her rosebud while her pussy continued to spasm on James' cock.
"You don't mind, do you?" John asked, surprised when his cock easily slid into his mother's ass.
Harriet moaned, her whole body spasming in orgasm as her son's cock filled her ass while his father's filled her pussy. In spite of all the things that she had done, she had never had more than one man at a time. Now she was having the most earth-shattering orgasm as both cocks fucked her at the same time.
"Isn't that just the best, Mom?" Mary asked as she continued to ride her father's tongue, Harriet's eyes unable to tear themselves from the sight of his tongue slithering to and fro between her pussy lips right in front of her eyes.
The rest of the night was a mind-bending, incestuous orgy as John and James each had her in the mouth, pussy, and ass several times, at one point fucking both of them in the ass at the same time that they ate each other's pussy lying on their sides. She came the hardest watching John and Mary together, marveling at the fact that they were her children.
Harriet looked over at her daughter as the sun broke, seeing her hard, ruby nipples swaying on the ends of her breasts as she rode her father's cock, her own pussy busy milking John's cock once again.
"I just love being in a missionary family," Mary sighed, smiling at her mother as she continued sliding her pussy up and down on her father's cock.